Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual

Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual

Copyright © Nikon Metrology

All Rights Reserved

This publication or parts thereof may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any

purpose.

Company names, logos and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their

respective owners. Nikon Metrology N.V. or any of its group companies make no claim to third

party trademarks.

The use of Nikon Metrology products, services and materials is subject to the Nikon Metrology

General Sales Terms and Conditions.

iii

Table Of Contents

Introduction ...............................................................................................1

What’s New ................................................................................................3

What's New in Focus 10.1 ........................................................................... 3

Focus Handheld ........................................................................................... 3

Authorising Focus Software ....................................................................5

Obtaining a license ....................................................................................... 6

License Admin Control Center .................................................................... 8

Using the software .................................................................................. 10

The User Interface...................................................................................... 10

Frequently Asked Questions about the new GUI ...................................... 12

Using the three mouse buttons ................................................................... 14

Getting started using the software .............................................................. 14

Configuring ribbon groups ......................................................................... 16

Property sheets ........................................................................................... 18

Selection ..................................................................................................... 19

Manipulating the model ............................................................................. 19

Keyboard short cuts ................................................................................... 20

Conventions used in the documentation .................................................... 21

Multiple processors .................................................................................... 21

Starting Focus from the command line ...................................................... 21

Starting Focus from a command line ............................................. 21

Starting Focus from Camio ............................................................ 22

The Focus Menus ................................................................................... 24

The File menu ............................................................................................ 24

The View menu .......................................................................................... 33

Workflows menu ........................................................................................ 40

The Focus Tool bars ............................................................................... 48

The Quick Access toolbar .......................................................................... 49

The Additional toolbar ............................................................................... 50

Inspection toolbar....................................................................................... 51

Named Views toolbar ................................................................................ 54


iv

Info/Visibility toolbar ................................................................................ 63

Feature Flyouts toolbar .............................................................................. 66

Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow ........................ 68

Nominal task .............................................................................................. 68

Import Nominal .............................................................................. 69

Feature Fitting ................................................................................ 75

GDT Dimensions ......................................................................... 114

Modify Nominal........................................................................... 132

Handheld Measurement task .................................................................... 140

Previews ....................................................................................... 140

Measure ........................................................................................ 142

Settings ......................................................................................... 202

Measured task .......................................................................................... 204

Import Measured .......................................................................... 205

Cut/Merge .................................................................................... 209

Filter/Mesh ................................................................................... 219

Feature Fitting .............................................................................. 224

Modified Measured ...................................................................... 285

Advanced ..................................................................................... 294

Align task ................................................................................................. 299

Align ............................................................................................ 300

Orient ........................................................................................... 331

Compare task ........................................................................................... 336

Compare ....................................................................................... 336

Sections ........................................................................................ 352

Report task ............................................................................................... 366

Flyouts.......................................................................................... 366

Reporting...................................................................................... 387

Dimensions .................................................................................. 400

Export ........................................................................................... 413

Handheld Measurement - Inspection (STL Based) workflow ............ 418

Nominal task ............................................................................................ 418

Import Nominal ............................................................................ 418

Feature Fitting .............................................................................. 418

Table Of Contents

v

GD&T Dimensions ...................................................................... 418

Cut / Merge .................................................................................. 418

Filter / Mesh ................................................................................. 418

Modify Nominal........................................................................... 418

Handheld Measurements task .................................................................. 419

Measured task .......................................................................................... 419

Align task ................................................................................................. 419

Compare task ........................................................................................... 419

Report task ............................................................................................... 419

Import Nominal Ribbon Group ................................................................ 419

Import ........................................................................................... 420

Import Features ............................................................................ 423

Handheld Measurements - Inspection Turbine Blades workflow ..... 424

Nominal task ............................................................................................ 424

Handheld Measurements task .................................................................. 424

Measured task .......................................................................................... 424

Align task ................................................................................................. 424

Turbine Blade task ................................................................................... 424

Compare ....................................................................................... 424

Sections ........................................................................................ 424

Construct ...................................................................................... 424

TBI ............................................................................................... 424

Report task ............................................................................................... 425

TBI Ribbon Group ................................................................................... 425

Turbine Inspect ............................................................................ 425

Turbine Blade Flyout ................................................................... 430

The Information dialog ......................................................................... 432

The Numbers tab ...................................................................................... 432

The Curvature Radius Information dialog - Numbers tab ........... 433

The Wall Thickness Information dialog – Numbers tab .............. 433

The Colors tab .......................................................................................... 434

The Interrogate tab ................................................................................... 435

The Drawstyle tab .................................................................................... 436

The Section Information dialog – Drawstyle tab ......................... 437


vi

The Edge Information dialog – Drawstyle tab ............................. 438

The Attributes dialog – Drawstyle tab ......................................... 439

The Attributes tab .................................................................................... 439

Automation ............................................................................................ 441

Glossary ................................................................................................ 447

Index ...................................................................................................... 451

1

Introduction

Focus 10.1 Inspection is the successor to Focus 10.0 Inspection, the next-generation software for

point cloud to CAD inspection built on the new Metris software platform, Together with greatly

improved functionality, Focus 10.1 Inspection is ready for all your Inspection needs.

Details on the configuration of the scanning hardware is contained in the Handheld API manual.

The software offers a complete tool set for measuring and processing pointclouds.

Points can be imported from any source; both standard and machine dependent formats

are supported.

A closed triangulated mesh can be generated through the points. The accuracy of this

mesh is guaranteed by the integrated 3D filter.

The triangulated mesh can be exported to standard formats such as STL, ready for copy

milling.

The user interface, composed of different worksheets guides the user through each task in the

workflow.

The following workflows are available:

The Solid based workflow deals with Solids as primary Nominal model.

The STL based workflow deals with meshes as primary Nominal models.

The Turbine Blade Inspection workflow deals with turbine blade data and provides

specific computations and reports.

Each task contains its own dedicated set of tools with user intuitive icons. Data and results are

organized in a clear directory tree containing nominal, measured and inspection data, thus

providing a comprehensible overview when applying multiple inspection strategies on this data.

Reporting is smoothly integrated with Microsoft Excel in which users can create their own report

templates. The conventional 3D deviation and section reports can be annotated with user defined

fly-outs, text, and comments. The use of Microsoft Excel for reporting enables easy sharing of

results with colleagues or customers.


2

This Reference Manual describes each of the tools provided in the user interface. For more

extensive or customized training, contact your Nikon Metrology Dealer.

For technical support you can consult the Support Page on the Nikon Metrology Web site

http://www.nikonmetrology.com.

http://www.metris.com/

3

What’s New

What's New in Focus 10.1

Full LC15Dx support.

Many changes in the data processing and scanner calibration have been done during the

development of the LC15Dx scanner, based on the feedback we’ve had from internal as

well as external customers. The most important changes are:

New calibration method.

The calibration speed and the calibration path have been reviewed to get the

highest possible accuracy with an LC15Dx scanner.

Online subtract.

The online subtract algorithm that was originally developed for XC scanners has

been adjusted so that it can also be used for line scanners. The algorithm results in

removing the ripples that are sometimes visible in the overlap zones of a scan

patch. It also performs an automatic blend operation to remove possible jumps

between subsequent scan lines in the same patch.

Added support for Wenzel 2040 controllers using PHS heads in discrete mode.

The ACIS importer library has been updated to version R22 SP2.

Edge point comparison.

The directional comparison function can now automatically create surface points on

edges based on specified anchor points, to automate inspection of edge normals.

Improvements to turbine blade inspection.

Focus 10.1 features a more accurate calculation of the chord length of a blade section at a

given angle, and now also outputs the maximum chord length.

New licensing scheme.

Focus 10.1 uses a new licensing that allows more flexibility. Besides the familiar

hardware keys, it now supports soft-locks and trial licenses. It is also no longer necessary

to import a license file when moving a hardware key from between computers, since all

license information is stored in the hardware key itself.

New application icon.

The new style application icon features the Nikon color scheme and will be used for the

different Nikon Metrology software packages to provide a more unified look.

Focus Handheld

Full 64-bit handheld support.

Handheld users can now also benefit from a virtually unlimited amount of RAM that can

be used by Focus when acquiring and processing pointclouds. Where the size of the

pointclouds in the 32 bit version is limited to a maximum of 3 GB of memory, the size of

the point clouds captured in the new, native 64 bit handheld module of Focus is only

limited by the amount of memory available in the PC. This means handheld users can


4

now take full advantage of the 80.000 points per second (or 150 stripes per second) that

the Modelmaker MMDx scanners are capable of capturing.

5

Authorising Focus Software

Focus software is protected with a licensing mechanism that requires either a hardware key

(dongle) or a software key.

If Focus is started without a valid license, the following message will be seen.

This means that you either need a new or an updated key to unlock the software. See

Obtaining a license.

If a license disappears while Focus is running, you will see the following dialog:

This dialog will also show information messages to notify you if a license is going to

expire in less than 14 days.

See Obtaining a license for instructions on updating existing licenses


6

At any time you can consult the License Admin Control Center to obtain information about

current licenses.

Obtaining a license

Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to obtain a license to unlock Focus. Focus can be unlocked

with either a hardware lock (dongle) or a software lock.

Hardware key (Dongle)

A hardware key (Dongle) can be used :

To unlock a new software license

To unlock the software when an existing license is no longer valid

Both procedures are explained below.

To unlock a new software license

1. Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to obtain a new hardware dongle. Once you have

received your dongle, follow the steps below.

2. Close all instances of Focus.

3. Connect the hardware dongle to a USB port on the machine.

4. Start Focus, which will now be licensed.

To unlock the software when an existing license is no longer valid

If you already have a compatible hardware dongle, it can be upgraded with a new license as

follows.

The first stage is to create a C2V (Customer to Vendor) file:

1. Open the Start menu in Windows, go to Nikon Metrology > Tools and launch “License

Remote Update System”.


7

The following window will appear.

2. Click on the “Collect Key Status Information” tab

3. Connect the hardware dongle to be upgraded to the machine.

Disconnect all other dongles.

4. Click on the [Collect Information] button.

5. Select the folder where you want to save the C2V file and click on “Save”.

6. Send the C2V file to your Nikon Metrology dealer.

The second phase is to install a new V2C (Vendor to Customer) file which will be sent to you by

your Nikon Metrology dealer.



2. Click on the “Apply License Update" tab.

3. Click on the “…” button next to “Update File” and select the V2C file you have received.

4. Click on [Apply Update].

After the V2C file has been applied, you can start Focus with the upgraded license on the

corresponding dongle.

Software Key

Software locks are licenses locked to a specific machine, and must be installed using a process

called activation. Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to start this process.


8

The first stage is to generate a C2V (Customer to Vendor) file which contains a fingerprint of

your machine.



2. Make sure all hardware based dongles are disconnected from the machine.

3. Click on the “Collect Key Status Information” tab.

4. Click on the [Collect Information] button.

5. If you are asked to select a specific key, select a ‘provisional’ key. These are keys that

have 19 digits.

6. Select the folder where you want to save the C2V file and click on “Save”.

7. Send the C2V file to your Nikon Metrology dealer.

The second stage is to install the license key. This will be contained in a V2C (Vendor to

Customer) file that you will receive from your dealer.



2. Click on the “Apply License Update" tab.

3. Click on the “…” button next to “Update File” and select the V2C file you have received.

4. Click on [Apply Update].

After the V2C file has been applied, you can start Focus with the available licenses

Network License

It is possible to install a network license on your company’s network. To setup a network license:

1. Choose the server on your company’s network where network license is to be installed.

2. Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to order a network license, which can be either a

hardware lock (dongle) or a software lock.

3. Install the license following the same procedure as described for non-network licenses.

License Admin Control Center

At any time, you can launch the License Admin Control Center from Nikon Metrology > Tools

in the Windows Start menu. This gives an overview of all licenses found on your machine or on

your company’s network. Software keys are shown with a icon, while hardware keys are

shown with a small picture of the hardware lock. The following shows an example of a machine

on which one Hasp HL Pro hardware dongle is found.


9

When you click on the “Features” button for a key, you get see information on the specific

licensed features on that key.

The feature called “Focus Maintenance Contract End Date” specifies when your maintenance

contract expires in the “Restrictions” column. In the above example, the maintenance contract

expires on 201304. This is always in the format YYYYMM (Year Month), thus 201304 means

that the contract expires in April 2013, and more specifically, on the first day of that month.

10

Using the software

This section describes the arrangement and the terminology associated with the interface as well

as some general procedures for using the Focus software.

The User Interface

The various elements of the interface are shown in the Figure below.

For more information on using the new interface refer to Frequently Asked Questions.

The File menu

provides access to a number of basic functions for managing the complete document and

for setting preferences. For more details

The Quick access menu

provides direct access to a number of functions. The contents of this menu can be

configured by the user. For more details

The Task tabs

allow you to step through each task in the workflow.

The Additional toolbar

provides access to functions relating to the presentation of the interface as well as

information and help. For more details

Using the software

11

The Ribbon bar

groups all the tools associated with a task. The contents of the ribbon groups can be

configured by the user. For more details

The Toolbar

contains tools that are accessible in all the tasks. For more details

The Graphical scene

is where the models and associated features are displayed. The arrangement of the

windows in the graphical scene can be modifed using the Layout options from the View

menu. See also Getting started.

The Inspection tree

consists of a set of panels listing the contents of the different elements of the document.

The Message line

displays useful information concerning the progress of requested functions.

The Cursor position

displays the current coordinates of the cursor.

The Units panel

displays the currently used units and allows you to change them. See below.

The Workflow menu

allows you to switch between different workflows and to configure the workflow. For

more details see the Workflow menu.

Model Units

This option is used to set the model units, i.e. the units the object was scanned in. Setting

the units tags your Inspection file with a unit's reference when you export or save the file.

The units do not affect your object while in a session. The information is provided for

downstream applications that may read the units reference information.

The Model Units dialog

Select one

Select the model units to use in your document.


12

Decimals

Sets the number of decimals for display.

Frequently Asked Questions about the new GUI

Focus 10.1 Scanhas a newly defined user interface. This page answers some frequently asked

questions about finding your way around the newly designed interface.

Question : How do I change or configure the workflow?

Click on the current workflow in the bottom right hand corner of the Focus 10

application window.

From here you can select a new workflow or configure the current workflow.

Question : How do I change the units?

The current units are displayed in the bottom right hand corner of the Focus 10

application window.

Click on the current units to open up the Model Units dialog.

How do I open an existing workspace / document?

Using the software

13

All the File manipulations are made by clicking on the Focus

icon in the top left hand corner of the Focus 10

application window.

How can I change my Preferences?

Your Preferences can be set by first clicking on the Focus icon in the top left hand

corner of the Focus 10 application window (see above).

You can then click on the button which appears in the bottom right hand

corner of the menu that appears.

How do I access the automation function?

The Automation function is accessed from the View menu that appears in the top right

hand corner of the Focus 10 application window.

Why do the same tools different colors?

The different colors indicate the type of object that this tool will operate on.

Gold - the tool relates to a Nominal object.

Blue - the tool relates to a Measured object.

Green - the tool relates to a Constructed object.

Why can't I see the Inspection Tree panels?

The different panels in the Inspection Tree can be switched on or off using the options

in the View menu.


14

Even when they are switched ON, they may be "hidden" ( which means that they will

only be visible when the mouse is moved over them). You can "pin" them into position

by setting the pin icon to be vertical.

Using the three mouse buttons

The use of a three buttoned mouse is assumed when working with Focus software. The three

mouse buttons are used for specific purposes. The three buttons are described as:

LMB – the Left Mouse Button, used for selecting objects in the tree or the graphical

scene.

MMB – the Middle Mouse Button or scroll bar used for initiating the operation of

commands from tools.

RMB – the Right Mouse Button, used for displaying a contextual menu on items in the

inspection tree as well as in the graphical scene.

Getting started using the software

The software will start with a specific workflow in operation.

The title of the workflow is shown above the graphical scene.

To select a different workflow: select the required option from the Workflow menu in the

bottom right hand corner of the screen.

Using the software

15

Each workflow has a number of tasks that are displayed below the workflow title.

These tasks should be executed in sequence in order to accomplish most workflows.

Click on a tab to execute a task.

The tools used in a specific task are presented in Ribbon Groups.

Items can be selected for operation either by clicking on them in the graphical scene or in the

inspection tree.

The layout of the graphical scene can be adjusted using the Layout options from the View menu

that is available in the top right hand corner of the screen. This would enable you to divide the

scene into separate areas to provide different aspects of the same model. In the Align task one

area can be used to show the nominal model and the other the measured one for example.

By default the inspection tree appears on the right hand side of the screen. It consists of three

panels relating to the nominal model, the measured model and results of the inspection. You can

choose which panels you wish to display by selecting the required option from the View menu.


16

Individual panels can be closed by clicking on the cross. By default the panels are "pinned" into

position on the right hand side of the screen. This is indicated by the vertical pin icon as shown

below.

The panels can be set "auto-hide" by clicking on the pin icon so that it turns horizontal. The panel

will then be hidden and replaced by a tab on the right hand edge. This is the case for the "Inspect"

part of the tree as shown above. The panel will appear when the mouse is moved over the tab.

Items are selected in the tree using the LMB.

Multiple items can be selected using the <Shift> or the <Ctrl) key.

To hide items: check the box in front of an item OFF, as is the case of the "Slots" as shown

above.

To perform an operation on the model with the default parameters, use the LMB to select an

item and then the MMB to execute the function.

To set the parameters for an operation: open the property sheet for a a tool by clicking on the

small arrow next to the tool.

To deactivate a tool: click on the Mixed Object Select tool.

The status of any operation or messages regarding functionality can be seen in the Status bar that

is to be seen at the bottom of the application interface. If the status bar is red, then it indicates an

error message.

Configuring ribbon groups

The most commonly used functions provided in Focus software are accessible from groups of

tools in the ribbon. The contents of these groups depends on the current task and workflow.

Using the software

17

There are a set of general tool bars below the ribbon which provide a range of general operations

that apply to all workflows and tasks.

The tools presented in ribbon groups are color-coded:

Gold - the tool relates to a Nominal object.

Blue - the tool relates to a Measured object.

Green - the tool relates to a Constructed object. (A constructed object is an object created

from a nominal and measured object.)

A ribbon group can be manipulated from a popup menu obtained by right clicking on the group.

It contains the following operations that relate to ribbon groups.

Add to Quick Access Toolbar: If the menu has been obtained by right-clicking on the name of

the group (as shown above) this will add the complete group to the Quick Access toolbar. If the

menu has been obtained by right-clicking on a single tool, this will add the tool to the Quick

Access toolbar.

Minimize the Ribbon: this option will hide the complete ribbon. It can be shown again by right-

clicking on the down-arrow to the right of the Quick Access toolbar. All operations provided

within a task can also be accessed by using the RMB in the graphical scene to open a popup

menu.


18

Customize Quick Access Toolbar...: this option schedules the Customize dialog in which the

presence and the contents of the ribbon group can be customized.

Property sheets

Functions are executed through the tools in the Ribbon Group. These functions can operate in

two ways:

By scheduling a dialog box in which you can enter the parameters required and then using

the action buttons to perform the operations.

Some dialogs are "dockable" as described below.

By using parameters defined in Property sheets.

In this case you can either execute the function directly using the default parameters or

you can open the property sheet to set the parameters and exercise more control over the

operation.

Opening Property sheets

A property sheet is opened by clicking on the small arrow next to the tool, as illustrated in the

picture below.

In the property sheet you can set the required parameters, then click on the tool again to execute

the function.

Not opening the Property sheets

If the property sheet is not opened, the function is executed using the default parameters.

The usual procedure to execute a function without opening the property sheet is:

1. Click on the tool.

2. Click on the object with the LMB that is to be selected for the operation.

3. Click with MMB to execute the function with the default parameters.

Using the software

19

This represents an efficient means of executing functions for which the parameters do not require

modification.

Dockable dialogs

Focus uses dockable dialogs that appear within the main application interface.

They can be 'undocked' by clicking on the title bar and then dragging it to the required position.

Selection

In executing functions there are often two ways of working:

Pre-selecting an item in the Inspection tree or the scene before activating the tool.

Not making a selection before activating the tool.

Pre-selection

If an item is selected before a tool is activated, then it will be the target of the operation.

Depending on the function this may be the reference item.

If the tool schedules a dialog or has a property sheet, then there will be the possibility to select a

different item as either the reference or the moveable item.

No pre-selection

In this case the Focus Inspection will make an automatic selection of items for the operation.

This will depend on the tool but generally all possible items are selected and operated on.

When making selections in the scene, the cursor changes to an appropriate shape to indicate the

type of selection.

Manipulating the model

The models can be moved within the graphical scene using several methods. There are a number

of general tools that are provided in the Inspection toolbar.

In addition there are alternative ways to interactively manipulate the model using the keyboard

and the mouse.

The manipulation methods given below are those associated with the default View Manipulation

setting made in the Preferences dialog available from the File menu.

To rotate – Drag with the Left Mouse Button (LMB)

To pan - Press and Drag with the Middle Mouse Button (MMB)

To zoom - Scroll with the Middle Mouse Button (MMB)

Space Mouse

The Space Mouse from 3Dconnexion is supported to provide a means of manipulating the model

(zooming, rotating and panning) without having to use the keyboard or specific tools.


20

Keyboard short cuts

This table lists the define keyboard shortcuts.

You can define your own keyboard shortcuts for specific tool using the Keyboard tab in the

Configure dialog. This is accessed from the Workflow menu.

S return to Selection mode

Esc return to Selection mode

V Zoom selected

F5 Zoom selected

W Zoom all

F4 Zoom all

Z Zoom window

Drag+LMB Rotate camera

Drag+MMB Pan

Scroll+MMB Zoom dynamically

ALT+CTRL Zoom window, in and out, depends

of movement of mouse: left to right

= in and right to left = out.

ALT+SHIFT+LMB Constrained rotate camera screen X

or Y, depends of first movement of

mouse.

ALT+SHIFT+MMB Constrained pan camera, depends of

first movement of mouse.

ALT+SHIFT+RMB Constrained rotate camera screen Z

CTRL+A Task dependent: select all solids in

Nominal, all point clouds/meshes in

Measured

CRTL+I Invert current selection

CTRL+Z Undo

F1 Help

Using the software

21

Conventions used in the documentation

[Buttons]

Action buttons that will initiate a function are enclosed in square brackets, e.g. click [Create] to

create a section.

<Keys>

Keys to be pressed on the keyboard are indicated in angled brackets, e.g. use the <Alt> key.

Multiple processors

If the computer used to run Focus Inspection software has multiple processors then advantage

will be made of all these processors during the execution of a number of functions. These

functions are:

all filters operations

meshing

subtract operation without "Blend" options

global compare

Starting Focus from the command line

Starting Focus normally involves using the shortcut created on the desktop or the options

available from the Start menu. These operations open Focus with an empty document for

interactive use.

There are means to start Focus and open an existing document or automation script or to start

Focus remotely from another application (e.g. Camio).

Starting Focus from a command line

The following command is an example of starting start Focus from the command line:

run "C:\Program Files\Metris\Focus 10.1 Scan

Inspection\Focus.exe" -script c:\temp\test.mfa

The various parts of the command are described below:

run

this indicates which executable (.exe) to run

"C:\Program Files\Metris\Focus 10.1 Scan Inspection\Focus.exe"

This is the path to the executable to be run. If the path is longer than 8 characters, or contains a

space, then it must be enclosed by quotes “”.

-script

this indicates the next entry will be an automation script

c:\temp\test.mfa

Tthe path to the script


22

Additional Parameters

In addition to the script, some additional parameters can be added to the command line. These are

parameters that also can be defined in Focus Automation.

-script "FilePath/Name"

Allows you to open Focus and start a script designated by the 'Filepath" and the "Name"

-import “FilePath/Name”:

Allows you to open Focus and immediately import a file designated by the 'Filepath" and the

"Name".

/ContinueOnFail

When this parameter is included, the designated script will continue even if an error is generated

by the script. If this parameter is not set, the script will stop at the line that fails.

Example: run "C:\Program Files\Metris\Focus 10.1 Scan

Inspection\Focus.exe" -script c:\temp\test.mfa /ContinueOnFail

/CloseReport

When this parameter is set, the Excel report created by the automation script will automatically

be closed when Focus is closed. it this parameter is not set, the report will remain open when

Focus is closed.

Example: run "C:\Program Files\Metris\Focus 10.1 Scan

Inspection\Focus.exe" -script c:\temp\test.mfa /CloseReport

/Quit:

Setting this parameter will close Focus at the end of the script playback

These additional parameters can be entered in one command line.

Starting Focus from Camio

This is initiated from the Call Routine dialog.

The Routine is just the path of the executable (.exe) to start.

The Arguments contain the script and additional parameters, as described above.

Example: CALL/EXTERN,SYS,'C:\Program Files\Metris\Focus 10.1

Using the software

23

Inspection\Focus.exe','-script C:\Customers\New-Data-12-3-

07\Blade.mfa’

24

The Focus Menus

A number of menus are provided containing functions that are common to all workflows and

tasks.

This section describes:

The File menu accessed by clicking on

the Focus icon in the top left corner

The View menu available in the top

right corner

See also the additional tools in this

group.

The Workflows menu available in the

bottom right corner

Note that an Action menu is available from a pop-up menu in the scene

The File menu

The File menu groups all commands to manage the complete analysis document. The File menu

is access by clicking on the Focus icon in the top left corner.

The Focus Menus

25

Note that functions in this menu can be added to and removed from the Quick Access toolbar.

Note also that keyboard shortcuts can be modified using the Keyboard tab in the Configure

dialog. This is accessed from the Workflow menu.

New Creates a new document

This closes the active document to create a new one. If the current document has been

modified, you will be prompted to save changes.

Open Opens an existing document

This closes the active document to open an existing document. If the current document has

been modified, you will be prompted to save changes.

Save Saves the current document

This tool saves the current document. If this document has not yet been saved, the Save As

dialog box prompts you for the file name and location as described below.


26

Save As… Saves the current document with a new name and format

This tool saves the current document with a new name and format. The Save As dialog box

prompts you for the file name and location.

It allows you to save the document in two different formats.

MFI Metris Focus Inspection file

this is the standard format for saving a current work session and includes the solid model.

MFR Metris Focus Report file

saves the document in format suitable for use with the Focus Inspection Viewer. A

document saved in this format will strip out the solid and point cloud information, but

retains all reporting and compare information.

Edit -> Undo Undoes the last action

This removes the effect of the last operation you have performed.

Note: not all actions can be undone. In this case the function is labeled ‘Can’t undo’.

Note: that the undo functionality can be disabled using the Preferences function (see below) to

improve performance when working with large models.

Edit - > Redo Restores an undone operation

This command is used to redo the last undone action .

Edit -> Erase Erases selected objects

This operation removes objects that have been selected either in the graphical display or

the Inspection tree.

Import -> Solids… Imports solid models of different formats

This menu entry enables you to imports solid models of IGES, SAT-ACIS, STP/STEP, VDA-

VDAFS, CATIAV4, CATIAV5 or ProE formats. Solids can also be imported from native mfi

files. If the mfi file does not contain a solid, this is reported in the status bar.

This operation can also be performed using the Import Nominal Solid tool where all the

details are described.

The Focus Menus

27

Import - > Metris Focus Files… Imports objects from Inspection native files

This option enables you to imports objects from Inspection’s native files (mfi, mfr, pff). It

schedules the Import Metris Focus files dialog.

Solid Display Accuracy

This defines settings for the visualization of the solid. The further the slider is to the right,

the more accurately the solid is displayed but the higher the memory usage.

Export -> Point Clouds… Exports point clouds in various formats

This option allows you to export point clouds as OBJ, MFI, MFR, PFF or ASCII point files.

The Export Point Clouds dialog box

This dialog allows you to define the location and the file type for the export of the cloud.

Export - > Meshes… Exports meshes in various formats

This option exports polygonal meshes as MFI, MFR, PFF, ASCII STL or binary STL files.

The Export Meshes dialog box

This dialog allows you to define the location and the file type for the export of the mesh.

Selected Only

When this option is checked ON, only selected meshes are exported. Otherwise all

meshes in the current document are exported.

Export -> Solids… Exports solids in various formats

This option exports solids as MFI, PFF or SAT-ACIS files. Export as IGES file is supported

through the optional module Focus Interop IGES.

The Export Solids dialog box

This dialog allows you to define the location and the file type for the export of the solid.

Selected Only

When this option is checked ON, only selected solids are exported. Otherwise all solids in

the current document are exported.


28

Export -> Sections/Mesh borders… Exports sections and / or mesh borders

This option exports solids or mesh borders as IGS, IGES or ASCII files. Export as IGES

file is supported through the optional module Focus Interop IGES.

The Export Section(s) /Mesh border(s) as dialog box

This dialog allows you to define the location and the file type for the export of the section /

mesh border.

Print… Prints the current view

The option prints a copy of the current contents of the scene (active view). It schedules the

Print dialog in which the print is created according to the current print setup.

Print Setup Defines the layout to be used for printing

This option defines the settings to be used for the Print function described above.

Preferences Sets user preferences for the application

This option allows you to set some user preferences for the operation of the application.

The Preferences dialog

The Preferences dialog contains three tabs.

The Focus Menus

29

The General Tab

STL Import Tolerance

This parameter defines the tolerance for merging vertices on imported STL models. STL

files store meshes as individual triangles. Inspection merges all coincident vertices into a

single polygon vertex during import. Occasionally, vertices are not precisely coincident

due to small calculation errors, resulting in holes in the imported mesh. Increasing the

tolerance will merge together any vertices that are slightly apart. By default, the STL

import tolerance is set to 1e-008.

Undo Enabled

When this option is enabled, recent operations can be undone. In order to achieve this, a

record of the operations must be kept to restore the previous situation. When working

with large models, creating the undo file is time consuming. To improve the speed

performance, you can disable the Undo functionality.

Registry [Reset]

This saves the settings in the operating system’s registry.

Show Origin

Shows or removes the origin and orientation of the XYZ axes in the scene.

[Set Password]

This allows you to set a password that will be used to protect the operation of the Registry

Reset. A dialog appears in which you can enter the password to be used.

Click [OK] to confirm the password.


30

Language

Sets the language in which the interface is displayed. The new language setting will take

effect the next time the application is started.

Stop playback in case of error

When this option is enabled, if an automation script encounters a command that it can not

execute, then it will halt at this point in the script until some manual operation is

performed.

If not enabled, then the script will continue to the next command.

The Appearance tab

The Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog box sets the appearance of the Focus

Inspection interface.

Scheme

A list of previously defined schemes (see the instructions below for creating a scheme).

[Load]

Loads a color scheme from a Color Map file.

[Save As…]

Save the current scheme as a Color Map file.

The Focus Menus

31

[Delete]

Deletes the current scheme from the scheme list.

Note: The Default scheme can not be deleted.

Item

This panel in the dialog enables you to select an interface item from the drop down list

and then define how it is to be displayed. The fields controlling the display will depend

on the type of item selected.

View Manipulation

These options allow you to choose the manner in which the model will be manipulated in

the scene.

The default selection is "Unified" which represents a unified means of manipulating the

model with other Nikon Metrology products. This means that :

- The RMB is used to Rotate 3D/2D

- Dragging the MMB is used to Pan

- Scrolling the MMB is used to Zoom.

To define a display scheme

1. Select an item from the drop down list.

2. Specify how each of the parameters associated with that item are to be displayed; colors

and line widths.

3. Select another item, and repeat the process for all display items

4. Click [Save As…]

5. In the dialog that appears click on […] and browse to the location where the file is to be

saved.

6. Enter a file name.

7. Click [Save].

8. Click [OK] in the Save Scheme dialog.

9. Click [OK] in the Preferences dialog when all preferences have been set.


32

The Auto Save tab

This tab allows you to define auto-save options for the document. It takes a lot of memory

Enabled

Check this button ON to enable automatic saving of the document. Click the [Apply]

button to activate the setting so that you can define the other Auto save parameters.

Save Interval

This defines the period between two automatic save operations. It can be set when the

Enabled option is ON.

Count Down

This parameter represents the amount of time remaining for the next Save.

[Save Now]

The Save Now button saves the document. If the active document is a new document, the

Save As dialog box prompts for the file name and location.

[Restart]

The Restart button resets the count down time to Save interval time. The save process is

started afresh from the current state. By clicking the Restart button, the current status is

not saved, but the timer process to save is started.

Save Location

The Save Location represents the location to save temporary (automatically) saved files.

The file is typically named as #AUTOSAVE#.mfi. In case of application crash, restarting

the application resumes the status from the last saved session.

The Focus Menus

33

You can enter the location in the field or browse to select one.

Exit Closes the application

This closes the Focus Inspection application. If unsaved modifications have been made to

the document, you will be prompted to save them.

The View menu

The View menu groups functions that determine the panels that are visible and their visual

appearance.

Auto Hide All

When this option is selected all the visible Inspection Trees are removed from their positions in

the scene and appear as tabs on the right hand edge of the application interface. The number of

tabs corresponds to the number of tree panels defined as visible using the Inspection Tree entry

described below.

In Auto-hide mode the panel will appear when the mouse is placed over the tab and remain on

view for as long as the mouse remains over the tree.

When this option is unchecked all the visible trees will appear as fixed panels in the interface.

To permanently fix a tree as a panel, click on the pin icon in the top left corner.


34

Inspection Tree Toggles the presence of the Inspection Trees

The Inspection Trees are where Nominal and Measured data as well as Comparison data

are listed and can be manipulated. They allow you to select, de-select, show or hide

objects.

This option allows you to choose which Inspection Trees you wish to have visible in the

interface. When a tree is checked on it will appear as a fixed panel in the interface. You can

Auto Hide a fixed panel by clicking on the pin icon as shown in the screen shot above. It will

then appear as a tab as is shown for the Inspect tree in the screenshot below.

The use and the positioning of an Inspection Tree is described in the General procedure to use the

software.

Properties Sheet Shows the properties of select objects or the camera

This option displays the properties sheet panel. The properties sheet displays global

properties relating to the document as well as the properties of the selected objects. If no

objects are selected in the scene, the camera object properties are displayed.

The Properties Sheet (panel)

The Global tab

The Global properties sheet displays information relating to Point clouds, Meshes and

Solids.

Point cloud :

Quick Shading

Toggle to switch the Quick Shading option on or off.

The Focus Menus

35

Quick Shading Size

The Quick Shading Size represents the default value for the Smallest Detail Parameter in

the Compute Quick Shading property sheet.

Sparse Motion

Toggle to switch the Sparse Motion option on or off. Checking this option ON substitutes

a low density version of the point cloud for display, while the scene is in motion. This

option is useful for high density point clouds during smooth motion when tumbling or

zooming the camera.

Point Size

The Point Size controls the size of each point in the point cloud. Increasing the value here

increases the size of the rendered points in the point cloud.

Mesh :

Static Rendering

Clicking on this field, displays a drop down list to select the rendering method for objects

displayed in a stationary view. Setting the Static Rendering style sets the display style for

all scene elements.

Motion Rendering

Clicking on this field, displays a drop down list to select the rendering method for objects

when the camera or objects are in motion. Setting the Motion Rendering style sets the

display style for all scene elements.

Backface Rendering

The backfaces of an object are those faces whose normals point away from the camera.

Check this option ON to display all faces; check it OFF to display only those faces facing

the camera.

Two-sided Lighting

If this option is checked ON, the model has both sides of its faces lit. When checked OFF,

the model has its faces lit on the positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual

inspection of Face Normals. This parameter is also available in the Align Normals and

Flip Normal property sheets.

Solids :

Boundaries

Toggle to switch the display of the boundaries of a solid.

Faces

When this option is checked ON the surfaces of a solid are displayed. When checked

OFF, the model appears as a wire frame.

The Object tab

The Object tab of the Properties sheet is used to view or modify the properties of the

selected object. The properties listed depend on the selected object. If the selection contains

multiple objects, the Properties sheet displays the properties of the last selected object. If

no objects are selected, it displays the camera properties of the active view. The Camera


36

Properties are listed below. Camera properties can also be set in the Camera Properties…

entry from the View menu.

Type

Specifies the camera view of the active view pane. To change the camera view, click in

the field and select the desired view from the pull down list. The choices are: Perspective,

Orthographic, Top, Bottom, Right, Left, Front, and Back.

Pan Scale

Specifies the mouse sensitivity for panning the camera. The greater the value, the greater

the sensitivity. The value is a relative number, so if you want greater sensitivity, set this

value higher than its current value. The default value is 1.

Tumble Style

Selects the behavior for tumbling the camera. To change the tumble style, click in the

field and select the desired style from the pull down list. Your selection persists until you

change it. Each camera has its own value, even though you can only tumble in

Perspective view. The tumble style options are: Local, Global and Trackball.

Tumble Scale

Specifies the mouse sensitivity for tumbling the camera. The greater the value, the greater

the sensitivity. The value is a relative number, so if you want greater sensitivity, set this

value higher than its current value. The default value is 1.

Zoom Scale

Specifies the mouse sensitivity for zooming the camera. The greater the value, the greater

the degree of zoom you will get for a given mouse drag distance. The value is a relative

number, so if you want greater sensitivity, set this value higher than its current value. The

default value is 1.

Dolly Style

Specifies the behavior when you dolly the camera. To change the style, click in the field

and select the desired style from the pull down list. By default, the Dolly Style is set to

Local. The styles available are: Local, Global.

The Local dolly style moves the camera forward and backward along the direction of the

lens without altering the center of interest.

The Global dolly style moves both the camera and the center of interest forward and

backward. A global dolly may be used to navigate your camera view through objects

along the direction of the lens.

Dolly Scale

Specifies the mouse sensitivity for dollying the camera. The greater the value, the more

the camera will move for a given mouse drag. The value is a relative number, so if you

want greater sensitivity, set this value higher than its current value. The default value is 1.

Headlight

Turns on and off the camera headlights. By default, each camera view has an associated

headlight. When the camera moves, so does the headlight. This provides constant

illumination for the camera view.

The Focus Menus

37

Checking this option OFF, turns the headlight off. You may want to do this to illuminate

the object using only the session lights.

Headlight Diffuse Color

Sets the light color that is emitted by the headlight and reflected by the diffuse area of the

illuminated object. Select the color by clicking the color bar or arrow and selecting a

color from the Color Browser. By default, the color is set to light grey. Setting the light

color to black means no light is emitted; setting the light color to white means all colors

of light are emitted.

Headlight Specular Color

Sets the light color that is emitted by the headlight and reflected by the specular area of

the illuminated object. Select the color by clicking the color bar or arrow and selecting a

color from the Color Browser. By default, the color is set to medium grey. Setting the

light color to black means no light is emitted; setting the light color to white means all

colors of light are emitted.

Toolbars Sets the visibility of general toolbars

A list of the general toolbars is presented from which you can select those to be displayed.

See also The Focus Toolbars.

Views Layout Sets the current screen layout

A list of available screen layouts is displayed from which you can select the one required.

See also The general procedure for using the software.

Camera Properties… Sets default camera properties

This option allows you to define default camera properties that control the view of objects

in the scene. Camera properties can also be viewed and adapted in the Properties Sheet

entry from the View menu.


38

The Camera Properties dialog box

View

The options in this area set the default position of the camera. The corresponding setting

is shown at the bottom of the display area. The camera position can also be adapted using

the corresponding options in the toolbar.

Pan Scale

Set the scale factor for panning.

Zoom Scale

Set the scale for zooming.

Tumble Style

Selects the behavior for tumbling the camera. To change the tumble style, click in the

field and select the desired style from the pull down list. Your selection persists until you

change it. Each camera has its own value, even though you can only tumble in

Perspective view. The tumble style options are: Screen Model and Trackball.

Scale

The Tumble Style Scale specifies the mouse sensitivity for tumbling the camera. The

greater the value, the greater the sensitivity. The value is a relative number, so if you want

greater sensitivity, set this value higher than its current value. The default value is 1.

Dolly Style

Local Use local dolly style.

Global Use global dolly style.

Scale Set the scale for dollying.

Headlight Lighting

Enable or disable the headlight.

Headlight Properties

Set the headlight properties. This option is disabled in the current release.

The Focus Menus

39

Object templates Defines templates used for Reports

This option schedules the Object Information template dialog that enables you to create

templates that will be used for Reports.

Object information templates are used in the Report task. When selecting the "Object

Information" tool in the Reporting toolbar, you will be able to choose one of the templates

that are defined here.

Note: that definition of templates is an operation that can be password protected.

[Save]

Saves the current template definition in a file. It schedules the ‘Save as’ dialog in which

the name and the location of the file can be specified. The file is saved with the extension

.otp (object template file).

[Load]

This loads a previously saved object template file. You can select a template from the

recently opened list, or you can selection the option "From file". In this case the ‘Open’

dialog appears in which you can search for the required file. Once a template is loaded all

the fields in it will be displayed in the dialog.

Description

The description that will be appear when the data is added in the Reporting tool and will

appear in the output file.


40

Line

This list contains line numbers for the output file.

Excel field

The name of the Excel field where the information needs to be written.

[Add]

This adds the entered description and line number to the end of the list in the Object

information templates preview.

[Update]

This updates the currently selected line in the Object information templates preview with

the entered Description and Line.

[Delete]

Deletes the currently selected line in the Object information templates preview.

Up and Down Arrows

Moves up or down the selected line (description + line number + Excel Field) in the

preview of the Object information templates on the left. This is the sequence as they will

appear in the Object information templates.

[Close]

Closes the dialog, saving the settings.

To define or edit an object template

Note that this operation can be password protected.

1. Load an existing template if necessary by selecting the required one from the list and then

clicking [Load]. To create a new template enter the name in the field.

2. Enter a description for the line in the description field.

3. Enter a value for the line number in the file. This does not refer to its position in this list.

4. Enter a value for the Excel field.

5. Push [Add].

6. Add further lines as required.

7. To adapt the line if necessary enter the new data and push [Update].

8. To remove a line select it and click [Delete].

9. Click [Save].

10. Click [Close] when the definition is complete.

This template can be accessed using the Object Information tool in the Report task.

Workflows menu

The Workflows menu allows you to switch or configure a workflow. The Workflow menu is

accessed by clicking on the current workflow which is displayed in the bottom right corner of the

interface.

The Focus Menus

41

Configure Workflow… Customizes the appearance and behavior of the Focus software

The Customize dialog

This dialog allows you to create and configure workflows. Workflows consist of Tasks and

Tasks have a number of ERROR: Variable (Ribbon-Group) is undefined.s associated with

them. Tools are organized in Ribbon Groups. This dialog allows you to manage the tasks

and the tools associated with a workflow.

In addition it allows you to configure the Quick Access toolbar, to define keyboard

shortcuts and set a number of Options.

The Workflow tab

The Workflow tab enables you to create or configure a workflow composed of a set of tasks. For

each of the tasks defined you can set which objects will be visible and operated on and which

tools will be present in the Ribbon Groups.


42

Workflow Name

This field represents the name of the currently selected workflow and can be used to

define the name of a new one.

Workflow File Name

The name of the file containing the current configuration. The name of a new

configuration can be entered here.

Save To Disk

Salves the current workflow to disk with the defined file name. ##Error##. The newly

defined workflow will appear in the Workflow menu list.

The Focus Menus

43

Tasks Manipulation

This area allows you to manipulate the tasks in your workflow. The tasks currently

associated with the workflow are represented by the tabs shown below. Five buttons are

provided to manipulate the tasks.

Creates a new task. A dialog appears in which you enter the name. The new task will

appear as the last tab. Its position can be moved to the left if required.

Deletes the currently selected task (tab).

Renames the currently selected task.

Moves the currently selected task one position to the left.

Moves the currently selected task one position to the right.

Operable Objects

Operable Objects are objects that have operations performed on them.

Click on the [+] button to see the operable objects. For each task, the operable objects can

be set.

Visible Objects

Visible Objects are objects that are visible in the document.

Click on the [+] button to see the visible objects. For every task, the visible objects can be

set. The operable objects are selected by default.


44

Ribbon groups

This panel allows you to create new Ribbon Groups and modify the tools contained

within them.

A list of groups defined in the current task is presented.

A set of tools allows you to create a new group , delete a group , move a group up

or down .

When a new groups is defined it will appear in the Ribbon band in the interface. Tools

can be added to the group by dragging them from the right hand list directly into the

ribbon group. Tools can be removed by dragging them from the group back into the

Module UI Buttons list.

To configure a workflow

1. Enter a new name if required for the workflow.

The Focus Menus

45

2. Define the tasks to be associated with the workflow.

Use the Task Manipulation buttons to create, delete and organize tasks.

The defined tasks will appear as a series of tabs.

3. Click on the [+] button next to Operable objects.

4. Step through each of the task tabs and define the operable objects for each task.

5. Click on the [+] button next to Visible objects.

6. Step through each of the task tabs and define the visible objects for each task.

7. Click on the [+] button next to Ribbon Groups.

8. Select a task tab.

9. Select a task tool bar from the left hand list, or click on the create new icon to create a

new toolbar.

The new Ribbon Group will appear in the Ribbon band in the interface.

10. Drag the tools from the right hand list of Module UI buttons into the new group.

11. Repeat the process for the other Ribbon Groups and the other tasks.

12. When the workflow is configured click on [Save to Disk].

13. Enter a file name for the workflow and save it with the extension .wff

14. Click [OK].

The workflow will become the current workflow.

The Quick Access tab

This tab enables you to manage the contents of the Quick Access toolbar.


46

Choose commands from:

Select the required command set from the drop down list presented. The list of tools

shown below will adapt.

[Add]

Adds the item selected from the left hand list to the item in the Quick Access toolbar that

are shown in the right hand list.

[Remove]

Removes the item selected from the right hand list from the Quick Access toolbar.

[Reset]

Resets the content of the Quick Access toolbar to the default setting (containing items

from the File menu).

Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon

When this item is checked, the Quick Access toolbar will be placed below the ribbon.

When this option is unchecked, the Quick Access toolbar will be placed above the ribbon.

For other methods of modifying this toolbar see the Quick Access toolbar.

The Keyboard tab

This enables you to view, edit and create keyboard shortcuts.

Category:

Select the required command set from the drop down list presented.

The Focus Menus

47

Commands:

The list of functions that correspond with the selected category.

Description:

A short description of the selected command.

Key assignments:

The current keyboard shortcuts associated with the currently selected command.

Press new shortcut key:

The new key that will be associated with currently selected command.

[Assign]

Assigns the defined new shortcut key to the currently selected command.

[Remove]

Removes the currently selected key assignment from the command.

[Reset All]

Resets the keyboard shortcuts to the default values.

To create a new keyboard shortcut

1. Select the Category to which the command belongs.

2. Select the command from the list.

3. Check the current key assignment if one exists.

4. Press the key(s) that you wish to use as a shortcut.

The key combination will appear in the "Press new shortcut key" field.

5. Click [Assign].

48

The Focus Tool bars

Focus 10.1 Scan Inspection provides a number of toolbars which contain tools that are common

to all workflows and tasks.

These include:

the Quick Access Toolbar.

the Additional toolbar

a set of General Toolbars located below the ribbon which includes :

the Inspection toolbar

the Named Views toolbar

the Info/Visibility toolbar

the Feature Flyouts toolbar

Manipulating the General Toolbars

The general toolbars can be moved by grabbing them on the on the left hand edge and dragging

them into the scene as shown in the screenshot above.

The presence of these toolbars can be adjusted by right-clicking on the ribbon to open the popup

menu shown below. The toolbars can be hidden or shown by checking the corresponding button.

This same operation can also be performed from the View menu in the Additional toolbar.

The Focus Tool bars

49

Tools that are contained in these toolbars can be added to the Quick Access Toolbar by selecting

the option Customize Quick Access Toolbar from this menu.

The Quick Access toolbar

The Quick Access toolbar provides you with direct access with just a single click to selected

functions.

By default the Quick Access toolbar :

is positioned next to the Focus icon that provides access to the File menu.

contains items that are available from the File menu.

Both the position and the contents of this toolbar can be configured by the user.

To add a command to the Quick Access toolbar

1. Click on the down arrow at the end of the toolbar.

2. From the drop-down menu select More Commands ...

3. In the Customize dialog select the required command from the left hand list.

4. Click on [Add].

5. Click on the <Up arrow> key on the keyboard to move it up the list.

Commands can also be added to toolbar directly from the Ribbon Group and the Customize

dialog accessed from the Workflow menu.

To remove commands from the Quick Access toolbar

Either

1. Right click on the icon in the Quick Access toolbar.


50

2. Select Remove from Quick Access Toolbar.

Or



3. In the Customize dialog select the required command from the right hand list.

4. Click on [Remove].

Commands can also be removed from the toolbar directly from the Ribbon Group and the

Customize dialog accessed from the Workflow menu.

To move the Quick Access toolbar

Either


2. Select Show Below the Ribbon (or Show Above the Ribbon).

Or



3. Check (or uncheck) the option Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon.

The Additional toolbar

The Additional toolbar provides tools to determine the content and style of the interface as well

as providing help and information.

The View menu The View menu groups functions that determine the panels that are visible and their visual appearance.

The View menu is described in the Focus Menus section

About Displays information about the installed Focus Inspection framework and modules

This schedules the About dialog box.

[Close]

Closes the About… dialog box

[System Info…]

This schedules the System Info dialog box that shows information on the installed 3D

rendering hardware and on the operating system.

[View End User License Agreement…]

This schedules the End User License Agreement.

The Focus Tool bars

51

Enable / Disable Tutorial Help Schedules the online help for the current task

This schedules the online help for the current task. Even if you close the Help window, it

will be re-scheduled when you move to another task. To stop the Help appearing click

again on the Help icon.

The Help will only be available if it was selected for installation. The help is also

available in a printable form in pdf format. This is accessible from Start -> Metris ->

Program Files -> Documentation.

The Styles menu Sets the color scheme for the user interface

A list of styles is presented from which you can choose the color scheme for the user

interface.

Inspection toolbar

The Inspection toolbar contains tools for manipulating, selecting and presenting the

Inspection models.

Mixed Object Select Allows selection of different objects

The Mixed Object Select tool enables the selection of all types of objects in the document.

It ends the current operation – active tool. You can use the Keyboard short cuts to perform

these operations.

Component Selection Creates a lasso for selection

This tool allows you to select all the objects that are contained within the boundaries

defined by a lasso.

To create a lasso for selection

1. Click on the Lasso tool The cursor will change to the lasso form This mode will be

2. scheduled automatically by some operations.

3. Click in the document using the LMB.

4. Check the Visible on button to restrict the selection to items that are visible.

5. Click on points to define a lasso to contain all the objects that you want to select.

6. Click with MMB to close the lasso and define the selection.

View All Zooms to make all objects visible

This tool sets the zoom on your view so that all objects are visible.


52

View All - Property sheet

All Views

If the All Views check box is ON, the View All command is applied to all views. If it is

checked OFF, the command is applied to the current view only. The number of views is

set using the Views – Show layouts menu entry.

Update Rotation Center

If the Update Rotation Center check box is checked ON, the rotation center is

recalculated after the View All command. The new rotation center is located in the

average position of the center point of all visible objects. If the Update Rotation Center

check box is checked OFF, the current rotation center is maintained.

View Selected Zooms to make all selected objects visible

The View Selected tool sets the zoom on your view so that all selected objects are visible.

View Selected - Property sheet

All Views

If the All Views check box is checked ON, the View Selected command is applied to all

views. If the All Views check box is checked OFF, the View Selected command gets

applied to the current view only. The number of views is set using the Views – Show

layouts menu entry.

Update Rotation Center

If the Update Rotation Center check box is checked ON, the rotation center is

recalculated after the View Selected command. The new rotation center is located in the

average position of the center point of all visible objects. If the Update Rotation Center

check box is checked OFF, the current rotation center is maintained.

Zoom Zooms the view

The Zoom tool enables zooming in and out of the active view. Drag the mouse to the right

to zoom in or to the left to zoom out.

Rotation Center Sets the center of rotation

The Rotation Center command sets the rotation center. The rotation center can be put at

any selected location.

The Focus Tool bars

53

Tumble Tumbles the view

The Tumble tool enables tumbling the active view around the current rotation center. Drag

the mouse on the view to tumble the camera. Press the SHIFT key to constrain tumbling.

Note: The Tumble tool can also be invoked by keeping the ALT key pressed while dragging the

LMB

Dolly Dollies the view

The Dolly tool enables dolling of the active view. Drag the mouse horizontally on the view to

dolly the camera. Press the SHIFT key to zoom.

Note: The Dolly tool can also be invoked by keeping the ALT key pressed while dragging the LMB

and MMB

Pan Pans the view

The Pan tool enables panning the active view. Drag the mouse on the view to pan the camera.

Press the SHIFT key to constrain panning.

Note: The Pan tool can also be invoked by keeping the ALT key pressed while dragging the MMB.

Roll View Rolls the view

The Roll tool enables rolling the active view around the rotation center. Drag the mouse

horizontally on the view to roll the camera.

Note: The Roll tool can also be invoked by keeping the ALT key pressed while dragging the RMB.

Evaluation Light Toggles the presence of the evaluation light

The Evaluation Light tool toggles the evaluation light. Press the LMB to position and move the

evaluation light.

Evaluation Light - Property sheet

[Reset]

The Reset button resets the evaluation light to its original location.

Two sided lighting Sets the evaluation light to the single or two-sided

The Two sided lighting tool toggles if the evaluation light is to be switched on in one direction or

both. If this tool is selected, the lighting is turned on from both the directions; if not then only in

a single direction. If they are flipped,the flip normal tool can be used to make them consistent

with the rest of the faces.


54

Named Views toolbar

The Named Views toolbar contains tools to set the camera position to provide specific

views. With the named views that correspond to one of the six directions of the axes, an

Automotive grid can be displayed.

Top Sets the view to the top of the object

The Top command sets the active view to the top view.

Bottom Sets the view to the bottom of the object

The Bottom command sets the active view to the bottom view.

Front Sets the view to the front of the object

The Front command sets the active view to the front view.

Back Sets the view to the back of the object

The Back command sets the active view to the back view.

Left Sets the view to the left of the object

The Left command sets the active view to the left view.

Right Sets the view to the right of the object

The Right command sets the active view to the right view.

Top South West Sets the view to the top south west of the object

The Top South West command sets the active view to the top south west view.

Top South East Sets the view to the top south east of the object

The Top South East command sets the active view to the top south east view.

Top North East Sets the view to the top north east of the object

The Top North East command sets the active view to the top north east view.

The Focus Tool bars

55

Top North West Sets the view to the top north west of the object

The Top North West command sets the active view to the top north west view.

Bottom South West Sets the view to the bottom south west of the object

The Bottom South West command sets the active view to the bottom south west view.

Bottom South East Sets the view to the bottom south east of the object

The Bottom South East command sets the active view to the bottom south east view.

Bottom North East Sets the view to the bottom north east of the object

The Bottom North East command sets the active view to the bottom north east view.

Bottom North West Sets the view to the bottom north west of the object

The Bottom North West command sets the active view to the bottom north west view.

Align View to Entity

The Align View to Entity command works specifically on features and sections. It aligns the

view to a specified feature or a section. This command works on a pre-selection or the user

can select the entities once the dialog is shown.


56

The Align View to Entity dialog box

Align View

The Align View section aligns the view in two ways:

Perpendicular

when the normal of the entity is perpendicular to the view-plane or

Paralle

when the normal of the entity is parallel to the view plane and pointing to the top.

Rotate View

The rotate view section has options to rotate the view.

Scale

The value in this field sets the scale of the view. A default scale is selected when the

dialog is opened. This field allows you to define a specific magnification. By setting a

value higher than the default value, the view is magnified (zoom in). When a lower value

is set, the view is diminished (zoom out).

[Default scale]

This returns the magnification factor to the default for the view.

Rotate by

The Rotate by button allows the view to be rotated by the value specified in the edit box

in the anti-clockwise direction. To rotate in the clockwise direction, simply give a

negative value in the edit box.

The Focus Tool bars

57

Rotate 90˚ anti-clockwise

The Rotate 90 ˚ anti-clockwise button allows the view to be rotated in the anti-clockwise

direction by 90˚. The entity continues to remain aligned to the view.

Rotate 90˚ clockwise

The Rotate 90 ˚ clockwise button allows the view to be rotated in the clockwise direction

by 90 ˚. The entity continues to remain aligned to the view.

Flip Horizontal

The Flip Horizontal button will flip the model horizontally keeping the entity aligned to

the view.

Flip Vertical

The Flip Vertical button will flip the model vertically keeping the entity aligned to the

view.

Hide all except selected

When this option is selected everything except the selected item is hidden from the

screen.

[Pick] / [Restore]

The Pick button allows to pick the entity – feature/section from the scene or the

Inspection tree. If the entity is pre-selected, then the caption of the button changes to

Restore. Restore button de-selects the entity and allows re-selection.

To align a view to a feature

1. Select the feature or section in the Inspection tree.

2. Click the [Pick] button to select it for alignment.

3. Set the alignment to the perpendicular or parallel as required.

4. To rotate the view enter a value in the input field then click the Rotate button.

5. Click [Restore] to restore the view to its original orientation.

Named Views Manages specific views

The Named Views tool manages customized named views. It allows you to save a specific

view of an object that can be retrieved when required.


58

The Named Views dialog box

Available Views

The Available Views list box lists all views that have been defined in the document.

[Restore]

This button sets the view to the view selected from the list.

[Rename]

This button renames the view selected from the list.

[Delete]

This button removes the view selected from the list.

View Name

This field allows you to enter a name for the current view.

[Save current view with this name]

This button saves the current view with the name specified in the View Name edit box.

[Close]

This button saves the modifications and closes the Named Views dialog box.

[Cancel]

This button cancels the modifications and closes the Named Views dialog box.

To create a named view

1. Position the object as required in the document.

2. Click on the Named Views tool.

The Focus Tool bars

59

3. Enter a name for the view.

4. Click [Save current view with this name].

5. Click [Close].

Clipping planes Defines a pair of parallel clipping planes

This tool allows you to define a pair of parallel planes which can be used to clip away the

parts of the object outside of the clipping planes. The planes used to define the clipping

planes can be based on system axes, planar parts of the model or features.

The clipping planes can also be used to define sections on solids, meshes and point clouds.

They can also be used to cut a mesh or a point cloud along the planes and so create new

objects in the inspection tree.

The Clipping Planes dialog


60

Selection

The Selection panel allows you to switch between the selection of objects or the

manipulation of clipping planes.

The field shows the number of items that have been selected in the Inspection tree and

upon which the clipping planes actions will be performed.

[Reselect]

The [Reselect] button allows you to update the selection field when the selection in the tree or the

scene has been changed.

Objects

When this option is checked, you can modify the objects that are selected in the tree or the scene.

The selection will be updated in the dialog when the [Reselect] button is used.

Clipping Plane Location

When this option is checked, you can click in the scene to define the position of the clipping

planes. The position information will be updated in the Method panel.

Add / Remove clipping planes

This panel lists the currently defined clipping planes. A number of clipping planes can be

defined allowing you to clip an object from different directions, for example in the X and

the Y directions. When the button next to a clipping plane is checked ON, the clipping

planes will be visible in the scene.

[Add]

This adds the current clipping plane definition to the list. A maximum of three clipping

planes can be defined. After that the [Add] button becomes insensitive.

[Remove]

This removes the currently selected (highlighted) clipping planes from the list.

Method

The Method panel contains a number of options for creating the clipping planes.

X , Y , Z

These options enable you to define planes that are perpendicular to the selected axis.

1. Click in the scene to define the position of one of the planes. This will be either the front

or the rear plane according to the option set in the Handling panel.

2. The parallel clipping plane is specified using either the To field (in which the position is

specified) or the Step field (in which the distance between the planes is specified).

Plane passing through three points

This option enables you to define a plane that passes through three point.

1. Click in the scene on each of the point that you want to use to define the planes. This will

be define either the front or the rear plane according to the option set in the Handling

panel.

The Focus Tool bars

61

2. The parallel clipping plane is specified using the Step field (in which the distance

between the planes is specified).

Defined planar area

This option enables you to define a plane that corresponds with a planar area on the

model.

1. Click in the scene on the planar area you want to use to define the planes. This will be

define either the front or the rear plane according to the option set in the Handling panel.



Measured feature

This option enables you to define a plane that corresponds with a plane passing through a

selected measured feature

1. The feature whose plane will be used to define the clipping plane can be selected from the

drop down list.

2. You can choose whether the clipping plane will be Parallel to, or Perpendicular to the

selected feature plane.



Handling

These buttons allow you to manipulate the defined planes.

Three buttons are provided to allow you to move the position of the clipping planes. You

can choose whether to move the front (yellow) plane, the rear (blue) plane or both of the

planes.

These buttons allows you to choose which of the parallel clipping planes will be most

visible in the scene. These buttons also define which of the planes will be used for the Cut

and Create Section operations. The yellow plane represents the front plane and the blue

plane represents the rear one.

Actions

[Cut]

This operations cuts away the part of the object that lies outside of the currently selected

clipping planes. This operation can be undone using the Edit-Undo function from the

menu bar if necessary.

Extra Points

When checked ON extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the

defined plane. In the case of a mesh additional triangles will be generated in order to

create a straight cut edge. This is illustrated in the figure below.


62

Cut effect with and without extra points

[Create section]

This operation allows you to create sections that correspond to the clipping planes. You

can create sections on either one or both of the clipping planes according to options

described above.

[Apply]

Applies the current settings in the dialog, i.e. clips the object according to the settings.

[Close]

This closes the dialog

To define a set of clipping planes

1. Click on the Clipping planes tools.

2. If no object has been selected then you will need to do so, by checking the Objects button

and then selecting the object in the scene or in the inspection tree. Click the [Reselect]

button.

3. Click the Clipping Plane Location button.

4. Choose the method you want to use to define the clipping planes and follow the

instructions given above.

5. Choose whether you wish to clip on both planes or one plane by selecting the appropriate

option from the Handling panel ( ).

6. When the clipping plane is as required click [Add] to add the defined clipping planes to

the list.

7. Choose another method and create another set of planes to add to the list if required.

8. Select the clipping planes to be used by checking the buttons ON in the list.

9. Click [Apply] to clip the object.

The Focus Tool bars

63

10. Clip operations can be undone using the Undo function from the tool bar or the Edit

menu.

To create sections on clipping planes.

1. Follow the instructions given above to create a pair of clipping planes.

2. If you wish to clip the object first, select the required pair of clipping planes and click

[Apply].

3. Otherwise select whether you wish to create the section along the front, the rear or both

clipping planes by pressing the required buttons in the Handling plane ( ).

4. Click [Create Section].

5. The sections will appear in the nominal or the measured section of the inspection tree.

To cut an object along clipping planes

Cup operations can only be performed on point clouds and meshes.

1. Follow the instructions given above to create a pair of clipping planes.

2. Click [Cut].

The point cloud mesh will be cut along the clipping planes. Three new point clouds/meshes will

appear in the inspection tree.

- The part that was on the side of the front plane will be termed _Inner

- The part that was on the side of the rear plane will be termed _Outer_Inner

- The part that was on between the rear and the front plane will be termed _Outer_Outer

Cut operations can be undone using the Undo function from the tool bar or the Edit menu.

Info/Visibility toolbar

The Info/Visibility toolbar provides a set of tools that enable you to view different aspects

of information about objects.


64

The illustration above shows that 'Alignments' can not be viewed because they do not have

a check box next to them. The visibility of any single object can be switched on and off

using the check boxes as well as the entries in this toolbar.

Info Provides information on selected objects

This tool displays the Object Info dialog box with information on the selected objects.

Colors Allows you to define object attributes

This schedules the Attributes dialog on the Drawstyle tab

Automotive grid Displays a grid on the scene with user-defined characteristics

This tool generates a grid on the scene, the characteristics of which are defined in the

Automotive Grid Properties dialog. The grid can not be used with a ortho view, it can only

be displayed on a Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left or Right view. The grid is defined in the

planes of the axes.

The Automotive Grid Properties

Text starts at X, Y, Z

The values along the three axes at which grid and values grid will be displayed.

Text interval

The distance between major grid lines with text on them.

Ticker interval

The distance between minor tick lines between the major grid lines.

Decimals

The number of decimal places used to display the grid values.

The Focus Tool bars

65

Line type

A continuous line is shown across the entire scene. Marks represent short lines along the

axes.

Text

The font size (in points) used for the text.

Labels color

The color used for the text.

Lines color

The color used for the grid lines.

Lines color

The color used for the grid lines.

Show grid

When this button is checked ON, the grid will be displayed. The grid as defined in this

dialog will appear whenever a suitable view is selected.

[OK]

This button applies the defined grid.

Attributes info Allows you to define object attributes

This tool schedules the Attributes dialog in which you can define the way in which the

current objects are displayed. The options that are available in this dialog depend on the

object selected.

Toggle Visibility Toggles the visibility status of objects

This tool switches the visibility of objects in the scene. Objects that have been hidden using

the 'Hide Selected' or 'Hide All Except Selected' tools will be restored to visibility, and

objects currently on view will be hidden.

Show All Displays all currently available objects

This tool restores the visibility of all the objects that are currently available in the

Inspection data tree.

Hide Selected Hides selected objects

This tool will remove selected objects from the scene. Their visibility can be restored using

the Toggle Visibility or the Show All tool.

Hide All Except Selected Removes all objects except those that are selected from view

This tool will remove all objects that have not been selected from the scene. Their visibility

can be restored using the Toggle Visibility or the Show All tool.


66

Feature Flyouts toolbar

The Feature Flyouts toolbar contains commands to label existing features and sections.

Show Feature Name Shows the name of a feature

This tool displays the labels of selected feature(s). If no features are specifically selected, it

displays the name of all features in the nominal and/or measured data. The picture below

shows an example.

To show the names of feature(s)

1. Select Mixed Object Selection Tool.

2. Select the nominal and/or measure feature(s) for which you want to show the label(s) in

the data tree.

If no features are selected, the names of all will be displayed.

3. Click on the Show Feature Name tool.

Hide Feature Name Hides the name of a Feature

This tool hides the labels of selected or all feature(s) in nominal and/or measured data.

To hide the name of feature(s)


2. Select the nominal and/or measured feature(s) for which you want to hide the label(s).

If no features are selected, all labels will be hidden.

3. Click the Hide Feature Name tool.

Show Section Name Shows the name of a section

This tool reveals the name of sections.

The Focus Tool bars

67

To show the names of section(s)


2. Select the nominal and/or measure section(s) for which you want to show the label(s) in

the Inspection Tree.

If no sections are selected, the names of al lsections will be displayed.

3. Click on the Show Section Name tool.

Hide Section Name Hides displayed section names

This tool hides the name of all the sections revealed in the scene using the Show Section

Name tool.

This tool will remove the names of sections that are selected in the Inspection Tree. If no sections

are selected, all labels will be removed.

Flyout Properties Changes the flyout display style

This tool enables you to edit the display characteristics of an existing flyout. A flyout can

be created using the Create Flyouts tool.

This option schedules the Flyout Properties dialog. This dialog contains the Flyout

properties tab, the Flyout Colors tab and the Sign indication tab as described for the

Create Flyouts tool.

68

Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow

The Solid Based workflow uses solids as primary nominal models.

It provides sets of tools grouped intuitively within a series of tasks that enable you to accomplish

a full analysis of nominal and measured models.

Nominal task

The Nominal task is primarily used for importing and preparing the Reference or Nominal

model(s) ready for comparison. The Solid based workflow deals with Solids as primary Nominal

models.

The preparation of the nominal model for comparison includes:

Importing the Nominal datasets and managing the membership of Nominal models in the

scene.

Fitting features such as lines, circles, rectangular slots, round slots, key slots, planes,

point cloud/mesh-areas, spheres and cylinders. These are used for feature-based

alignment with measured models in the Align task.

Modifying the model in various ways including, merging and mirroring solids, aligning

and flipping face normals, deleting, duplicating, hiding and manipulating layered faces

Creating GD&T annotation based on features and dimensions as well as determining

other dimensions.

Creating sections and adding them to a rail.

The Nominal task includes the following Ribbon Groups:

o Import Nominal

o Feature fitting

o GD&T Dimensions

o Modify Nominal

o Sections :

All of these tools are described in the Solid Workflow - Compare task.


69

Import Nominal

The Import Nominal Ribbon Group contains commands to import the nominal Solid

models.

Import Nominal Solid

Imports a Solid model from various file formats

The Import Solid command imports solid models of types:

SAT-ACIS

IGS/IGES,

CATIAV4(EXP, MODEL, SESSION),

CATIAV5(CATPART),

Pro/Engineer(PRT, ASM),

STP/STEP,

VDA-VDAFS or

Unigraphics (UGS)

Solids can also be imported from Focus Inspection native mfi or pff files. If the mfi or pff

file does not contain a solid, its absence is reported in the status bar. This option also

imports GD&T information.

The Import Solids dialog box

The Import Solids dialog provides the means to browse to where the file to be imported is

located. It also includes some importation options.


70


This defines settings for the visualization of the solid. The further the slider is to the right,

the more accurately the solid is displayed but the higher the memory usage. This value

can also be set afterwards inside the application using Solid Display Accuracy tool.

Simplify

If this option is checked ON, a simplification process is applied during the import to

reduce an excessive number of edges.

Note: It is possible that the solid geometry may be damaged because of this option. Hence, it is

recommended that this option is used only for solids with excessive number of edges which cause a

problem during importation.

Acis Healing

Check this option ON to initiate a healing process that sequentially analyzes, calculates

and fixes stages of geometry simplification. This option is recommended if the file being

imported has been corrupted.

Import Features

This option is only available for CATIAv5 models. When checked features that have been

defined on the model will imported and appear in the Nominal section of the Inspection

tree.


71

Import Attributes (PMI)

This option is for CATIAv5 and ProEngineer models. When checked attributes associated

with the model will be imported. Attributes include the colour, the material thickness and

the compare tolerance values. These values can be seen in the Attributes tab of the Global

information dialog.

Roughness - this imports the roughness attributes associated with the CAD model.

Import Hidden Objects

This option can be used when importing CATIAv5 models. When this option is checked

ON, then all hidden objects associated with the CATIA model will be imported. When

checked OFF, only visible objects will be imported.

As Separate Solids

This option imports the CAD model as separate solids.

To import a solid

1. Click on the Import Solid tool.

2. In the Import Solids dialog select the required file type in the 'Files of type' drop down

list.

3. Select the required files.

4. Set the required Solid Display Accuracy.

If the complexity of the model is unknown set a low value (slider to the left). The

accuracy can be adjusted using the Solid Display Accuracy tool.

Only move the slider one or two clicks at a time. Dragging may cause memory problems.

5. Check the 'Import Features' button if you wish to import these with the solid model (this

applies to CATIAv5 models only).

6. Check the 'Import Attributes' button if you wish to import these with the solid model (this

applies to CATIAv5 and ProEngineer models only).

7. Check the 'Import Hidden Objects' button if you wish to import these with the solid model

(this applies to CATIAv5 models only).

8. Click the [Import] button.

9. If the status bar indicates problems set the Simplify or Acis healing options described

above.

Note: Apart from importing IGES Solids, you can also import IGES surfaces as Solids. While

importing the IGES surfaces, watch the status bar for the IGES surfaces to Solid processing

information.

The solid is imported and automatically added to the Nominal window in the Inspection tree.

Solid to Mesh

Converts a solid to a mesh

This option enables you to convert a solid to a mesh from the tree or from a file. It

schedules the Solid to Mesh dialog.


72

The Solid to Mesh dialog

From tree

Use this option to select an already imported solid that is in the Nominal tree, or re-select

it.

From File

Click this option to enables you to select a solid that is not yet imported. It will be

imported into the current document when it is converted.

Solid sampling

These options control how the solid will be converted to a mesh.

Chordal Deviation

Enter the value in this field that determines when a new point will be created on a curve.

This is illustrated in the figure below. When the value of the Chordal Deviation is

achieved, a point is created on the arc of the curve.

Maximum Point Distance

Enter the value in this field that determines the where a point will be created on a plane

surface. When the value specified of the specified Maximum Point Distance occurs a

point is created on a plane. This is illustrated in the figure above.

Keep solid

This option is only available when the solid is already in the Nominal tree. When checked

the original solid will be retained.


73

[OK]

This button converts (and imports if necessary) the selected solid.

The mesh(es) appear in the Nominal tree. They can only be seen in the display if you are working

in the STL workflow .

To import a solid and convert it to a mesh

1. Click on the 'Solid to Mesh' tool.

2. In the "Solid to Mesh" dialog select the solid to be converted from the Inspection tree and

click [Reselect] if necessary

or

Click 'From File' and browse for the file to be imported and converted.

3. Enter the required solid sampling parameters.

4. If the solid has already been imported and is in the tree you can choose to keep the

original solid.

5. Click [OK] to import and convert the solid to a mesh.


Sets the accuracy with which a solid is displayed

The Solid Display Accuracy tool is used to set the accuracy of the display of the Solids in

the scene. This tool is also useful to set the accuracy if it was not set earlier while

importing using the Import Solid command, see Import Solids.

Note: This tool is active only when there is a solid model(s) under the Models node of the Nominal

tree.

The Solid Display Accuracy dialog box

In the Solid Display Accuracy dialog box, the accuracy of the display of the Solids in the

scene can be set. The more the slider is to the right, the more accurate the solid will be

displayed but the higher the memory usage will be.

The image below shows a solid model. The first image shows a simplified (inaccurate)

representation that can be used on complex and large models, whereas the right image

shows an accurate representation that can be used on easy and small models.


74

To set the Solid Display Accuracy

1. Select a solid from the Models node of the Nominal tree if necessary.

If no solids are selected, the accuracy of all solids will be adapted.

2. Click the ‘Solid Display Accuracy’ tool. The Solid Display Accuracy dialog box appears.

3. Drag the slider 1 or 2 clicks at a time (moving the slider all the way to the right will

allocate a lot of (possibly too much) memory) .

4. Click [Apply].

5. Stop dragging the slider to the right when a satisfying result is achieved.

Do not set to a value higher than necessary to avoid using excessive memory.

6. Click [Close ].

Add to Nominal

Adds the Selection to the Nominal models

This tool adds an object (Solid / Point cloud /mesh / Feature ) to the Nominal model.

Note: This tool is only active when there is a model (Solid/Point cloud/mesh/Feature) ready to be

added to the membership. Since the application automatically adds the model to the Models node

when you import a Solid model, this tool is typically grayed out after import.

All nominal models are displayed in the Nominal window of the Inspection tree. During import,

nominal models (Solid/Point cloud/mesh) are automatically placed under this node.

Note: Object types that are not accepted can be modified in the “Config Workflow Tasks…” editor

in the Workflows menu.

To add a model to the membership of the Model node

1. Click the Mixed Object Select tool.

2. Click on the object to be selected and added to the Model node.

This can be a solid, a point cloud, a mesh or a feature


75

If the tool is not activated then the object is already a member of the Nominal Model

node.

3. If the tool icon is active, click on the tool to add the solid model’s membership under

Models node.

Feature Fitting

Features are geometrical entities, definable in both the Nominal and Measured models. The

purpose of feature detection is to extract the geometrical entities and obtain specific parameters

such as a center point, axis direction, radius etc for use in alignment, comparison and/or

dimensional verification.

Features in the Nominal CAD are well-defined geometries. Detection of these features is easy

because of the clean input. Solid: features are fit to selected face edges.

All the feature-fitting tools support the rapid MMB option to fit the selected feature without

opening the feature’s property sheet.

Fit Feature

Opens up the Feature Detection panel to select the feature(s) to be fitted.

This tool opens the feature detection panel in which you can select the type of feature to be

generated and set the parameters to define it. Some of the options in this panel will always

be insensitive since it depends on the context in which you are working.

Click on the required feature tool. The fields in the panel will be adjusted as required.

When the All button is checked on, then you can detect a number of different features

simultaneously.


76

Create Nominal Feature Point

Creates a point feature at a specified location

The Create Nominal Feature Point tool creates a feature point in the model at the specified

location.

The Feature Parameters are as shown below.

Feature Name

This field can be used to name the feature point that is to be created. The default name

contains the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.

Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones

in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.


77

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the feature point to be created. These fields will either show the

coordinates of the point selected in the scene or can be used to define the required

coordinates of the feature point manually.

[Create]

This button will create the feature point at the defined position.

[Undo]

This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be

repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes

insensitive.

[Close]

This closes the feature detection panel.

To create a nominal feature point

1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.

2. Click the Create Nominal Feature Point tool.

3. In the Selection dialog choose the Pick Select option.

4. Enter a name if required, otherwise the default name will be used followed by an integer

in brackets.

5. There are two means to define the position of a nominal feature point:

EITHER

Click with the LMB on the solid where you want to create a nominal feature point. The

co-ordinates in the panel will be updated to show co-ordinates of the clicked point.

OR

Enter the required XYZ coordinates in the corresponding fields in the panel.

6. To create the point

EITHER

Click the MMB in the scene

OR

Click [Create] in the definition panel.

7. Click [Close] when all the required features have been defined.

The feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the Inspection tree.

Fit Nominal Line

Detects or creates a line feature.

This tool fits a straight line to the selected points/edge in the model, or creates a line with

specified characteristics.



78

Feature Name

This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains

the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.



Fixed Length

When this option is checked, the line feature will have a defined length. The value for the

length can be specified in the input field.

Fixed Center

When this option is checked, the center point of the line will be set at a defined point.

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the center of the line.

Fixed Direction

When this option is checked, the axis of the line will be set by a defined vector.


79

I, J, K

The components of the vector defining the axis of the line.

[Detect]

This button will detect the feature once the required input has been selected on the model

and the specific characteristics have been defined.

[Create]

This button appears when the all the characteristics of the line have been defined in the

panel, i.e. the length, the center point and the direction. It will create a line feature with

these characteristics.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a line feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Line tool.

3. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using

the single Pick option or using the Lasso option.

4. Enter a name for the new feature. If no name is specified a default name is generated.

5. Enter a value for some of the line characteristics if required.

6. Select one or more edges in the solid using the chosen tool. The selected edges are

highlighted.

7. To detect the line feature:

EITHER


OR

Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.

The figure below shows a line detected from a single edge selected in the scene.

The pictures below show the line of a fixed length fitted to a selected edge.


80

The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.

To create a line feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Line tool.

3. Enter a name for the feature.

4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the line, i.e. its length, center point and direction.

5. Click [Create]


Fit All Check box

Fits all the features in the enclosing box

When this check box is switched on, all of the features in the enclosing box, i.e. circles,

round slots, rectangular slots, key slots and hexagonal slots will be detected

simultaneously.

Feature Name

The detected features are automatically named according to the convention Nom_{type of

feature} (number). For example Nom_Circle and Nom_Circle (2).

The application of the prefix Nom_ allows you to use the functionality to detect measured

feature dimensions from nominal ones in the Measured task.

[Detect]

This button will fit the features on the selected solid faces.

[Undo]

This undoes the previous operation, removing all of the feature detected with this

functionality. This can be repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when

the button becomes insensitive.

[Close]


To detect multiple feature types


2. Click on the All check button .

3. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose the solid face(s) on which the

features will be detected.

4. Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.

All features of the types listed above will be detected and appear in the respective Features

sections of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.


81

Fit Nominal Circle

Detects or creates a circle feature

This tool fits a circle to the selected points/edge in the model, or creates a circle with



Feature Name






82

Fixed Radius

When this option is checked ON, the circle feature will have a defined radius. The

required value can be entered in the input field.

Fixed Center

When this option is checked ON, the circle will have its center at a defined point.

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the center of the circle.

Fixed Direction

When this option is checked ON, the axis of the circle will be defined by a specific

vector.

I, J, K

The vector components defining the axis of the circle.

[Detect]

This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model,

and/or specific characteristics have been defined.

[Create]

This button appears when the all the characteristics of the circle have been defined in the

panel, i.e. the radius, the center point and the direction. It will create a circle feature with


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a circle feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Circle tool.

3. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using the

single Pick option or using the Lasso option.

4. Enter a name for the feature to be created. If no name is specified, the default name will

be used.

5. Enter a value for some of the circle characteristics if required.

6. Select one or more edges in the scene using the chosen tool. The selected edges are

highlighted.

7. To detect the circle feature:

EITHER



83

OR



To create a circle feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Circle tool.


4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the circle, i.e. its radius, center point and

direction.

5. Click [Create]


Fit Nominal Round Slot

Detects a round slot feature

The Fit Nominal Round Slot tool is used to fit a round slot to the selected points/edge in the

model.

The Feature Parameters are as shown below


84

Feature Name





Slot Type

The Slot Type parameter specifies at what ends the slot will be truly round. The choices

are between :

Both Ends: Fits a complete round slot to the selected points.

First End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the first end.

Second End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the second end.

[Detect]

This button is used to fit the feature once the required inputs (points/edges) are selected

on the model.


85

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a round slot feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Round Slot tool.


be used.

4. In the Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using


5. Select one or more edges in the scene using the chosen tool.

6. To detect the round slot feature:

EITHER


OR



Fit Nominal Rectangular Slot

Detects a rectangular slot feature

The Fit Nominal Rectangular Slot tool is used to fit a Rectangular Slot to the selected

points/edge in the model.



86

Feature Name





[Detect]

This button is used to fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the

model.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]



87

To detect a rectangular slot feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Rectangular Slot tool.


be used.

4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or

using the Lasso option

5. Select one the area on the model in which the slot will be detected.

6. To detect the rectangular slot feature:

EITHER


OR



Fit Nominal Key Slot

Detects a key slot feature

This tool is used to fit a key slot to the selected points/edge in the model. A key slot has two

component holes, a small one and a big one, that are used as the base for key slot

construction.



88

Feature Name





Slot

The Slot parameter defines the key slot shape. Two options are available:

Straight: The resulting key slot has a smaller circular hole component that is extended to

the bigger circular hole component as shown below.


89

Tangent: The resulting key slot has a smaller circular hole component that is

progressively enlarged to the bigger circular hole component as shown below.

[Detect]

This button is used to fit the feature once the required input have been selected on the

model.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a key slot feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Key Slot tool.


be used.



5. Select the area over which the key slot will be detected.

6. To detect the key slot feature:

EITHER


OR




90

Fit Nominal Hexagonal Slot

Detects and creates a hexagonal slot feature

The Fit Nominal Hexagonal Slot tool is used to fit a hexagonal slot to the selected

points/edge in the model.


Feature Name






91

[Detect]

This button is used to fit the feature once the required inputs have been selected on the

model.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a hexagonal slot feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Hexagonal Slot tool.


be used.

4. Enter any required value of tolerance and depth.



6. Select the area over which the hexagonal slot will be detected.

7. To detect the hexagonal slot feature:

EITHER


OR



Fit Nominal Plane

Detects or creates a plane feature.

This tool fits a plane to the selected points/face(s) in the model or creates a plane

according to specified features.



92

Feature Name





Fixed Size

When this option is checked, the side of the plane will be of a specified length. The value

of the length is specified in the input field. .

Fixed Center

When this option is checked, the center of the plane will be set in a specified position.

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the center of the plane.


93

Fixed Direction

When this option is checked, the direction of the normal to the plane will be defined by a

specified vector.

I, J, K

The components of the vector defining the direction of the normal to the plane.

[Detect]

This button will detect the feature once the required input has been selected on the model

and the specific characteristics have been defined.

[Create]

This button appears when the all the characteristics of the plane have been defined in the

panel, i.e. the length, the center point and the direction. It will create a plane feature with


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a plane feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Plane tool.


be used.

4. Enter a value for some of the plane characteristics if required.


using the Lasso option.

6. Select one or more faces in the scene using the chosen tool.

7. To detect the plane feature:

EITHER


OR



To create a plane feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Plane tool.


4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the plane, i.e. its size, center point and direction.


94

5. Click [Create]


Fit Nominal Cylinder

Detects and creates a cylinder feature.

The Fit Nominal Cylinder tool is used to fit a cylinder to the selected points/face(s) in the

model or to create a cylinder based on specified values.


Feature Name






95

Fixed Radius

When this option is checked ON, the cylinder feature will have a specified radius. The

radius is specified in the input field.

Fixed Height

When this option is checked ON, the cylinder feature will have a specified height. The

height is specified in the input field.

Fixed Center

When this option is checked ON, the center of the cylinder will be in a specified position.

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the center of the cylinder.

Fixed Direction

When this option is checked, the axis of the cylinder will be defined by a specified vector.

I, J, K

The components of the vector defining the axis of the cylinder.

[Detect]



[Create]

This button appears when the all the characteristics of the cylinder have been defined in

the panel, i.e. the radius, the height, the center point and the direction. It will create a

cylinder feature with these characteristics.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a cylinder feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Cylinder tool.


be used.

4. Enter a value for some of the cylinder characteristics if required.



6. Select a plane in the scene using the chosen tool.

7. To detect the cylinder feature:

EITHER


96


OR



To create a cylinder feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Cylinder tool.


4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the cylinder, i.e. its radius, height, center point

and direction.

5. Click [Create]


Fit Nominal Sphere

Detects and creates a sphere feature.

This tool fits a sphere to the selected points/faces in the model, or creates a sphere with




97

Feature Name





Fixed Radius

When this option is checked, the sphere feature will have a specified radius. The radius is

specified in the input field.

Fixed Center

When this option is checked, the center of the sphere will be set in a specified position.

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the center of the sphere.


98

[Detect]



[Create]

This button appears when the all the characteristics of the sphere have been defined in the

panel, i.e. the radius, and the center point. It will create a sphere feature with these

characteristics.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a sphere feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Sphere tool.


be used.

4. Enter a value for some of the sphere characteristics if required.

5. In the Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using


6. Select one or more points in the scene using the chosen tool. The selected edges are

highlighted.

7. To detect the sphere feature:

EITHER


OR



To create a sphere feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Sphere tool.


4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the circle, i.e. its radius and center point.

5. Click [Create]



99

Fit Nominal Cone

Detects a cone feature.

The Detect Nominal Cone tool is used to fit a cone frustum to the selected points/face(s) in

the model.


Feature Name






100

[Detect]

This button is used to fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the

model.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a cone feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Cone tool.




be used.

5. Enter the required tolerance value.

6. Select one or more points on the solid using the chosen tool.

7. To detect the cone feature:

EITHER


OR



Detect Nominal Line Profile

Detects a line profile feature

This tool creates a feature that characterises the profile of a section. It is used in GD&T

feature analysis which allows you to place a tolerance on the line profile.



101

Feature Name


the prefix Nom_LineProfile an the identification of the associated section.

[Detect]

This button will detect the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.

This must be a line section or a part of a line section.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]



102

To detect a line profile feature

1. Click on the Create section tool to create the sections required.


3. Click on the Detect Nominal Line Profile tool.


5. Select a single section, either in the Inspection Tree or the Scene.

The Lasso option in the Selection dialog allows you to select just a part of a section if

required.

6. EITHER click the MMB in the scene,

OR click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.

The Line Profile feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the

Inspection tree. A tolerance can be defined for the line profiles using the Create GD&T

Annotation tool .

Detect Nominal Surface Profile

Detects a surface profile feature

This tool creates a features that characterizes the profile of a surface. It is used in GD&T

feature analysis which allows you to place a tolerance on the surface profile. This feature

can only be detected on a solid or meshed surface.



103

Feature Name


the prefix Nom_SurfaceProfile and a number.

[Detect]

This button will detect the feature once a solid surface has been selected in the scene.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a surface profile feature


2. Click on the Fit Nominal Surface Profile tool.


104




5. Select surface areas on the solid or the mesh using the chosen tool.

6. EITHER click the MMB in the scene,

OR click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.

The Surface Profile feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the

Inspection tree. A tolerance can be defined for the surface profiles using the Create GD&T

Annotation tool .

Import Features

Imports features that have been exported using the Export features tool.

This tool enables you to import features that have been exported using the Export Features

tool. It schedules the Import Metris Focus Files dialog in which you can browse for the file

that contains the exported features.

The file types supported are:

- .TXT (client feature files)

- .MFF (Metris feature files)

- CSV (CSV feature files - Audiplan)

- INS (INS feature files - Audiplan)

The imported features appear in the nominal tree list and can be seen on the structure.

To import nominal features

1. Click on the Import Nominal Features tool.

2. In the "Import Metris Focus files" dialog browse for the file in which features have been

exported using the Export Features tool.

3. Click [Import].

Surface Point from Point

Creates Surface points from Feature points and Nominal Model.

The Create Surface Points from Feature Points tool creates the surface point(s) from the

selected feature point(s) and the nominal model. At least one nominal model and one

feature point must be visible to create surface points.

This tool can be opened with a nominal model and pre-selecting a point cloud.


105

The Create Surface Points from Feature Points dialog box

[ Reselect Points ]

The Reselect Points button selects the feature points that are selected in nominal features

tree to create surface point(s). If no feature point is selected, then all the feature points

will be selected.

[ Reselect Nominal ]

The Reselect Nominal button selects the nominal models that are selected in nominal

models tree to create surface points. If no nominal model is selected, then all the nominal

models will be selected.

Warning tolerance

Warning tolerance specifies the normal distance from the feature point to the nominal

model. If the feature point is located beyond the Warning tolerance, then warning

message will be appeared in the Warning message box and however, surface point(s) will

be created.

To tree

When checked, the surface point(s) are added under nominal features tree.

To file

When checked, the surface point(s) are saved into the file specified. These saved surface

point(s) can be used for Directional Compare.

[ Create ]

Click on the Create button to create the surface point(s). The surface point(s) get added

under the nominal features tree as shown below.


106

[ Delete ]

This button deletes all the surface points that appear in the nominal features tree

irrespective of their visibility. This button is active only after creating the surface point(s)

(i.e. after clicking on the Create button).

[ Close ]

This closes the Create Surface Points dialog box.

To create surface points

1. Import any nominal model and create feature point(s) on the model.

2. Click the Create Surface Points tool.

3. Select the feature point(s) and the nominal model to create surface point(s).

4. Click on the buttons Reselect Points and Reselect Nominal.

5. Set the warning tolerance as required.

6. Check the to tree and to file check boxes if want to add the surface point(s) in the nominal

features tree and save the surface point(s) to the file specified respectively.

7. Click [Create ] to create surface point(s). If to tree check box is checked then surface

point(s) will be added under the nominal features tree.

Intersection

Creates a intersection feature between two existing features

The Intersection tool creates intersection object (point/line) that can be used afterwards for

dimensioning.

Intersections can be made with following objects:

Apparent Intersection Closest intersection

Object Result Object Result

2 planes line 2 planes line

1 plane and 1

line

point 1 plane and 1

line

point

2 lines and the

current view

direction

point 1 plane and 1

cylinder

point

2 cylinders

(cylinders

should behave a

lines) and the

current view

direction

point 1 Line and 1

Cylinder

point (closest to

both axes)


107

1 line and 1

cylinder

point 1 point and 1

line

1 point (middle

between point

and line)

1 point and 1

line

point (closest

distance)

2 Cylinders point (closest to

both axes)

1 plane and 1

cylinder axis

point 2 lines point (closest to

both axes)

These objects must be selected before the tool becomes available.

The Intersection property sheet

[Compute Apparent/Closest Intersection]

This button will generate the feature according to the parameters set.

Apparent

When this option is checked, a feature will be generated if the objects appear to intersect.

Closest

When this option is checked, if the objects do not intersect, then the mid point of the

closest distance between them is defined as the intersection point.

To create an Intersection

1. Click on the Mixed Object Selection tool.

2. Select two valid objects as given in the table. Use the <Ctrl> key to select the second

item.

3. Click on the arrow to open the property sheet.

If you click directly on the tool the intersection will be created using the last used

settings.

4. Choose whether to generate an Apparent or a Closest intersection.

5. Click the [Compute Apparent/Closest Intersection] button to generate the required

intersection.

Note: Intersection objects are added to the Inspection tree; in the Nominal panel when both

source objects are nominal, in the Measured panel when any of the objects is measured.


108

Project Object

Projects features and sections to the XY, YZ or XZ plane at a given location, or a feature plane or a solid/mesh.

This tool can be used as preparation for dimensioning. It allows you to project point

features, line features or sections onto planes or the model.

Project dialog box

[Select to project]

This button updates the field alongside to indicate the number of features or sections that

have been selected to project.

Target

The Target onto which the feature/section will be projected. This can be:

The XY/ YZ/ XZ planes

The plane associated with a feature.

The CAD model, a Point Cloud or a Mesh

Unbounded

When checked ON, the projection will be made to the infinite 3D plane.

Location

The location represents the (3rd) coordinate position for the XY, YZ and XZ plane.

Direction

This option only applies when the target is a CAD model, a Point Cloud or a Mesh. It

allows you to select the direction in which the projection towards the target will be made.

When only 1 direction is checked, the projection is in the selected direction.

When 2 directions are checked, the direction of the projection is to a point found at the

intersection of the specified plane going through the original point, and the target object.

When 3 directions are checked, the direction of the projection is that of the closed

distance between the point and the target object.


109

Keep original

When this option is checked, a copy of the original object is created before the projection

takes place .

[Project]

The Project button projects the selected objects to the target.

To project a point, line or section

1. Select the object to be projected.

2. Click on the Project Object tool.

3. Select the Target from the drop down list.

4. Enter any other parameters associated with the target.

5. Choose whether to keep the original or not. (It can be deleted afterwards.)

6. Click [Project].

A new object will appear in the Inspection tree labelled {object}_Projected.

Detect Edge

Detects edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles on sections

This tool is used to detect Edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles using calipers.

It allows you to define, load and save caliper definitions and to choose the type of output

feature required. The features types are selected on sections that have been created on the

object.

An Edge (Corner) is defined as:

The projection of point ‘c’ onto a line ‘ab’ in the direction of caliper angle ‘1’

Directions: normal of line ‘ab’ and normal of caliper angle ‘1’

Edge detection

A Combi-Hem is defined as:

First point: connection point ‘b’

Second point: projection of ‘c’ onto line ‘ab’ in direction of caliper angle ‘1’

Directions:

First point: normal of line ‘ab’


110

Second point: normal of line ‘ab’ AND normal of caliper angle ‘1’

Combi-Hem detection

An Combi-Profile is defined as:

First and second points: connection point ‘b’

Third point: connection point ‘c’

Directions:

First and second point: normal of line ‘ab’.

Third point: normal of caliper angle ‘1’

Combi-Profile detection

The Detect Edge - Combi Hem - Combi Profile dialog

This dialog has two tabs; the Caliper tab enables you to define and select calipers, and the Detect

tab enables you to select the caliper to be used and detect the required feature.


111

The Detect tab

Nominal

The number of nominal sections selected.

Measured

The number of measured sections selected.

Caliper

This allows you to select a caliper from the list of available calipers. Calipers are defined

in the Caliper tab.

Use on Rail

When checked, the caliper will be used on all sections in a rail.

Output

Select the required feature output - Edge, Combi-hem or Combi-Profile.


112

Section healing tolerance

This tolerance value allows you to ignore small gaps in the sections.

The Caliper tab

Caliper

[Save]

This opens a Save As dialog and saved the current caliper to disc and renames the

‘current’ caliper with the file name (without extension).

[Load]

This opens a File Import dialog and allows you to select an existing caliper file. The

selected caliper file and the caliper is added to the drop down list.

Dimension

Each distance represents a dimension of the caliper as shown in the picture.


113

Angles

Each angle represents an angle of the caliper as shown in the picture.

[Detect]

Click this button to detect the required feature type on the selected sections.

To detect an Edge, Combi hem or Combi Profile

This tool detects feature types on sections that have already been created.

1. Select the sections on which the features are to be detected.

2. Click on the Detect Edge-Combi Hem - Combi Profile feature(s) tool.

3. Choose a caliper from those that have already been defined, or click on the Caliper tab

and define one.

4. If the sections are on a rail check the 'Use on Rail' button and then select the rail.

5. Choose the type of feature required.

6. Click [Detect].

Export Features

Exports features to a file

This tool enables you to export features to MFF (Metris Feature Files) or TXT (Delimited

ASCII Files) or IGS, IGES (Interop) files. Features that have been exported to an MFF file

can then be imported using the Import Features tool.

It schedules the "Export features as" dialog in which you can specify the file in which the

features will be exported.

If you select to export the features to a Delimited ASCII file, you will be presented with

the Export Features dialog in which you can select the specific feature data to be exported

and the Delimiter (Tab or Comma) to be used.

Note that Failed features can be exported using the specific Failed Features tool in the Export

ribbon group in the Report tab.

To export features

1. Select the Features to be exported (in the tree).


3. In the "Export features as" dialog enter a name for the file in which the features are to

stored.

4. If the output format you have chosen is ASCII delimited, select the feature information to

be exported and the delimiter to be used.

5. Click [Save].


114

Flip Feature

Switches the direction of the normal of selected features

The Flip Feature tool flips the directions of the normals of selected features.

Flip Feature property sheet

[Flip Normals]

Switches the normal direction of the selected features.

Two-sided lighting

The Two-sided lighting checkbox controls the lighting of the model faces. If checked ON,

the model has both sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has the faces lit on the

positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the Face Normals. This

parameter is also available in the property tree.

To flip a feature Direction

1. Click the Flip Feature icon. It enables the tool and shows the normals of all features

present.

2. Select the feature using LMB for which you want to flip the normal.

3. Click [Flip Normals] on the property sheet or click on the arrow tip to flip the normal

direction for the selected feature.

GDT Dimensions

The GD&T Dimensions Ribbon Group enables you to create dimensions that can be used

for GD&T evaluations.

The dimensions that are detected using these tools can only be based on features

Create GD&T

Creates a GD&T tolerance

This tool enables you to define GD&T tolerances that are based on the ASME 914.5M

Standard on defined features and dimensions. These tolerances are displayed as flyouts on

the features or updates on the dimensions and can be used as a basis for evaluation.


115

Note that this manual does not describe in detail all the GD&T parameters, it is assumed that the

user is familiar with these.

The Create GD&T Annotation dialog

Selection

This field shows the currently selected feature for which a GD&T tolerance will be

defined. If no feature is pre-selected you will be prompted to select one. This can be done

either in the scene or in the Inspection tree, or from the Selection drop down list.

The Datum tab

Datum

Enter the letter used to define the datum in this field.

You can define either:

A single datum

This is the only option available if there is only one instance of the selected feature type.

No "Additional features" will be presented in the Datum tab.

A composite datum.

This option is available if you have more than one instance of a particular feature type


116

created and visible in the Inspection tree. A composite datum allows you to define a

datum relative to the a collection of features of the same type.

Normal vector

This field is used only in the case of a nominal line feature being selected as a datum. It

displays the values of the normal to this line (relative to the scene) which will be used to

create the datum plane.

The [Update ] button will update these values by taking over the current IJK value of the

scene camera.

Additional Features

Additional features appear if more than one instance of the selected feature type exists.

This field lists all the visible features that are of the same type as that selected in the

Selection field. Check the box next to those that you wish to include in the composite

datum

Use middle plane / separate planes

This choice is only available when two features are included in the composite datum. It

allows you define the datum as the plane located in the middle of two features or on

separate planes related to the separate features.

Tolerance tabs

A series of tabs are presented in which you can define the type of tolerance to be applied

to the feature. The contents of the field in the tab will depend on the selected feature. For

some of the characteristics (Orientation and Location) you can define either a local or

composite tolerance.

A composite tolerance will assess the location or the orientation of the feature based not

only on the characteristics of the individual feature, but on its relationship to other

features. Thus you can define a tolerance that dictates the position of a row of three holes

for example.

The Location and Orientation tabs allow you to define primary, secondary and tertiary

datums.


117

Tolerance

When using a Composite tolerance, you can set an overall tolerance on the

location/orientation of the group as well as the same tolerance on each of the members of

the group.

The group tolerance is defined in the upper row. The individual tolerance is defined in the

lower row.

The first field contains a drop down list that only applies to certain feature types and does

not need to be set otherwise.


118

The second field contains the tolerance value.

The third field contains a drop down list that defines a material condition and which does

not need to be set.

Projected Tolerance Zone

You can use this field to extend the tolerance zone around a feature by the specified

amount.

Planar Tolerance Direction

The three fields contain the components of the normal vector to the tolerance plane. The

[Update] button will update these values by taking over the current IJK value of the scene

camera.

Datum Compartment

The Datum compartment allows you to specify a combination of datums that will be used

in the evaluation of the tolerance, a set of orthogonal planes for example. The required

datums must have been defined in the Datum tab and can be selected from the drop down

list.

If the Repeat button is checked the single feature tolerance will also take into account the

selected datums .

Drawing Display

This provides an indiction of the information that will be presented in the flyout. The

upper row represents the composite tolerance value and the lower value the individual

tolerance value.

Additional Features

This is list of the additional features that match the selected feature type. The items

selected will be included in the composite tolerance

[Apply]

When all the required tolerances have been defined for a feature, this button applies the

tolerances. The tolerance will appear in a flyout in the scene and be listed in the Inspect

section of the Inspection Tree. Once this button has been used, the [Close] button is

changed to [OK].

[Close]

This closes the Create GD&T dialog. If unsaved tolerances have been defined you will

first be prompted to Apply them.


119

Using the Create GD&T annotation functions

The following procedures are described

General procedure to define and evaluate GD&T tolerances

To define and evaluate line and surface profiles

To define and evaluate GD&T tolerances on dimensions

To define a composite datum

To define a composite tolerance

General procedure to define and evaluate GD&T tolerances

The steps below give a general outline on how to use the GD&T functionality in Focus

Inspection.

1. In the Nominal task create the required nominal features by clicking on the Feature fitting

tool.

2. Click on the Create GD&T Annotation tool.

3. Define a Datum if required in the Datum tab.

4. Select the features to which the required tolerance will be assigned.

The same tolerance can be assigned to multiple features of the same type. These features

can be selected in tree or in the scene.

If you wish to assign the tolerance to just a single feature you can select the required

feature from the Selection drop down list (if not already pre-selected).

5. Click on the tabs to define all the various tolerances that are required for this feature.

6. Click [Apply] to define the tolerances.

7. Select another feature (or feature types) and repeat the procedure.

8. When all the feature tolerances are defined click [OK].

9. The flyouts indicating the tolerances will appear in the screen. Their position can be

changed by dragging it to an appropriate place.

10. Go to the Measured task and create the measured features to which the tolerances will

apply by clicking on the Measured feature fitting tool .

11. Make sure the statistics option is ON. These are required in the GD&T evaluation

process.

12. When the corresponding measured features have been created go the Compare task and

click on the Evaluate GD&T tool

To define and evaluate line and surface profiles

1. Create the required Line profile and Surface profiles using the Feature fitting tools in the

Nominal task.


120

- Line profiles must be created on Sections

- Surface profiles must be created on soid or meshed surface.


3. Define a Datum if required in the Datum tab.

4. Select the feature for which the tolerance is to be defined from the Selection drop down

list.

The Form tab and the appropriate feature tab will be automatically selected.

5. Define the required tolerances (and datums if necessary).

6. Click [Apply] to define the tolerances.

7. Click [OK] when all the tolerances have been defined.

8. You do not need to create corresponding profiles in the Measured tab, but if you have

defined datum features then you will need to create the corresponding measured ones.

The Measured model must be a mesh or solid.

9. Go to the Compare tab and click on the Evaluate GD&T tool

To define and evaluate GD&T tolerances on dimensions

1. In the Nominal task create the required nominal features.

2. Define the required dimensions of the features by clicking on the appropriate tool from

the GDT Dimensions toolbar.

3. Click on the required feature points to define the dimensions of either a single feature or

the dimensions between features.

The dimensions flyout will appear in the scene and in the Inspection tree.


5. Click on the Dimensions tab.

6. Select the required dimension from the Selection drop down list.

7. Click on the appropriate sub tab and enter the upper and lower tolerance to be applied to

this dimension.

8. Click [Apply].

The dimension flyout will be adapted to show the defined tolerance.

9. In the Measured task detect the required measured features.

10. In the Compare task click on the Evaluate GD&T tool.

11. The Dimension flyouts will be adapted to show the results of the evaluation.


121

To define a composite datum

1. In the Nominal task create the features that wish to use for the datums. These would

typically be planes.


3. Select one of the group of features from the Selection drop down list.

4. Enter the (number) to define the datum.

5. In the additional features field select those features that are to be included in the

composite datum.

6. If the group contains just two items choose whether you wish to use the separate or the

middle plane.

7. Click [Apply]

To define a composite tolerance

1. In the Nominal task create the features that wish to group together for the composite

tolerance. These must be of the same type, e.g. circles or round slots.


3. Select one of the group of features from the Selection drop down list.

4. Enter the (number) to define the datum.

5. Click on the Location or Orientation tab, then click on the Composite tab.

6. From the Additional features list at the bottom of the tab, select the features to be

included in the group.

7. In the upper row in the tolerance field define the tolerance for the group of features.

8. In the lower field define the individual tolerance that will be applied to each of the

features in the group.

9. Click [Apply].

Linear Perpendicular

Determines the true linear dimension between two points or between a point and defined direction

This tool determines and displays the true 3D (linear) distance between two points or

between the point and a line/axis or the origin of the axis system. The distance can be

determined between any two points on the measured model or two points on nominal

features.

Options are provided to allow you to select a point on that section that lies within a radius

of a user-selected point.


122

The Linear Perpendicular property sheet

Towards

The options provided here allow you to choose how the second point will be defined. The

options provided are:

Second click

in this case the dimension will be determined between any two points defined by mouse

clicks. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled "Dim2pt".

Origin

in this case the linear dimension between a selected point and the origin of the coordinate

system will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled

"Dim2pt".

X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis,

in this case the perpendicular dimension between the selected point and the selected axis

will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled

"DimPerpendicular".

List of features

in this case the dimension will be determined between the selected point and the

perpendicular direction towards the selected feature. The dimension will appear in the

Inspection tree labelled "DimPerpendicular".

Find Extreme

Check this option ON to determine the dimension of a point that lies within a defined

radius around the selected point.

Note that this option is only effective if you are measuring the dimension on a section.

Search Radius

This value determines the radius of the circle around the user-selected point used to

define the dimension.

Target

This can be Closest Distance or Furthest Distance. This determines which point on the

search circle will be used to define the dimension. These options are illustrated in the

figure below.


123

To determine the true 3D distance between two points

1. Click on the Linear/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.

2. Select the option "Second Click" from the Towards menu.

3. If you are measuring a section, you can use the Find Extreme option described above.

4. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB select a point in the measured model or

on nominal/measured feature

A small yellow square appears.

5. Move the pointer and click with LMB to select a second location.

A second yellow square is created with a bi-directional arrow connecting the two yellow

squares with the labeled distance.

6. Drag the pointer to position the displayed dimension as required.

7. Click with LMB to fix the measurement labels.

The dimension remains on the scene and appears in the Inspection tree.

8. Click on a new point to create another dimension measurement.

To determine the true 3D distance between a point and a line


2. Select the required option from the Towards menu. This can be one of the coordinate axes

or a feature.










124

Note: The Bi-directional arrow labeling the measurement would relocate and stick to their axes

when the scene view is tumbled.

Aligned Parallel

Creates dimensions that are aligned with an axis or a feature

This tool determines the distance between two points in a specified direction. The points

can be any two selected point in the measured model, or selected points on features in the

nominal model. The direction in which the dimension is measured can be selected and

includes the model and the screen axes as well as parallel to defined features.

Specific options are available for measuring the dimension of a section that allow you to

select a point that lies within a radius of the user-selected point.

The Aligned Parallel property sheet

Parallel To

The options in this drop down list allow to select the direction in which the dimension

will be measured. The following options are provided:

Automatic XYZ

this option enables you to interactively select the direction for the dimension to match the

screen axes.


the dimension will be aligned with the X, Y or Z axis and the name of the axis will be

indicated on the flyout.

List of defined features

in these cases, the dimension will be determined in a direction that is parallel to the

selected feature.

Find Extreme

Check this option on to determine the dimension of a point that lies within a defined



Search Radius



Target



figure below.


125

To measure the distance between two points

1. Click on the Aligned/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.

2. Select the direction in which the dimension will be measured from the list available in the

Parallel To drop down list.







5. Drag the pointer to position the distance measurement along the required axis.

If you have selected the option Automatic XYZ, you can adjust the dimension presented

as you drag.



7. Click on a new point to create another dimension.

Radius

Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs

This tool measures the radius of the circle and arc features that were created in the

Nominal or Measured task.

The method whereby the dimension is determined depends in the method used to select the

feature in the scene. When the lasso tool is used to select the feature then a Least Squares

Fit is used to fit a circle over all the points.

To determine the radius of a circular feature

1. Click on the Radius tool.


126

2. Click on the center point of a circle. A line arrow passing through the center of the circle

with a single arrow on the circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.

3. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the line and click on the label to fix it.

To determine a radius using the Least Squares Fit


2. In the Selection dialog click on the Lasso Select option.

3. Use the LMB to trace a lasso around the required points.

4. Click with the MMB to define the lasso.

5. Click again with the MMB to determine the circle that passes through the points.

A line arrow passing through the center of the circle with a single arrow on the

circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.


To measure the radius between two points


2. In the Selection dialog click on the Pick Select option.

3. Use the LMB to click on the first point.

4. Use the LMB to select the second point.

A circle will appear that passes through the two points.

5. Adjust the position as required and click again with the LMB to define it.


Diameter

Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs

The Diameter tool measures the diameter of the circle and arc features that were created

on the Nominal or Measured models.



Fit is used to fit a circle over all the points. When the Pick tool is used, the circle will be

created through the picked points.

To determine the diameter of a circular feature

1. Click on the Diameter tool.


127

2. Click on the center point of a circle. A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and

connecting the circumference of the circle is created with a label showing the distance of

the diameter.

3. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the bi-directional arrow and click on

the label to fix it.

To determine a diameter using the Least Squares Fit






A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and connecting the circumference of the

circle is created with a label showing the distance of the diameter.



To measure the diameter between two points









Angle

Creates an angular dimension

This interactive tool is used to compute the angle between two lines created on the

measured object. The angle shown is always less than 90 deg. Lines are made longer if

necessary. Use this tool on planer points (intersecting lines/sections), otherwise end points

of the angle will not necessarily be on the line.

The Angle property sheet

Use LSQ Fit

This option works on sections. Instead of using the line connecting the first 2 points, a

least square fit line over all points in between these 2 points is used.


128

To create an Angular Dimension

1. Click on the Angular tool.

If you are measuring a section, you can click on the arrow to open the property sheet and

use the Use LSQ Fit option described above.

2. Pick a point on the measured object.

A dynamic preview of the line used for dimension will appear with one end anchored at

the selected point and the other end at the current cursor location. Any movement of the

cursor will immediately update the line preview.

3. Pick second point, which will define the first line.

4. Pick a third point. This will generate a new line starting at the second point and reveal the

angle between the two lines.

5. Move the cursor at this position to update the dimension.

6. Click on a fourth point to define the angle between 2 objects (lines).

7. Click on the label to fix the position of text.

Gap Flush Caliper

Use of predefined calipers to determine Gap and Step dimensions in a repeatable manner along a rail

Gap - Step measurements are common practice in applications such as Sheet metal and

Aeronautics. They are used to describe the relation of adjacent parts.

In almost all most cases, this is still a manual operation, where people use plastic

‘calipers’ to check the gap, while a hand-sweep checks for the step. Each measurement is

made on multiple sections along a rail. A rail consists of multiple sections and contains the

statistics of these Gap – Step measurements. This tool allows the use of predefined calipers

to determine Gap and Step dimensions in a repeatable manner along a rail.

It schedules the Gap-Flush Dimension dialog that contains three tabs.


129

Gap-Flush Dimension dialog

Dimension tab

Nominal


Measured


Manual

This option allows the user to manually indicate the Gap – Step dimension points.

Least Square Fit

When this option is checked all points between the first two points are used to fit a line

Caliper

This allows the user to select a caliper from the list of available calipers

Use on Rail



130


This tolerance value allows you to ignore small gaps in the sections when positioning the

caliper.

Gap Caliper Definition tab

Caliper

[Save]



[Load]



Dimension



131

Angles


Flush Caliper Definition

Caliper

[Save]

This opens a Save As dialog and saves the current caliper to disc and renames the


[Load]



Dimension


Angles



132

Reverse dimension sign

When this option is checked, it reverses the sign of the flush dimensions used during the

detection of the dimension.

To create a gap / flush using a caliper

1. Use the Create Section tool, in the FeatureFitting or the Compare toolbars to create

sections and add them to a rail.

2. Click on the Create Gap / Flush using Calipers tool.

3. Define the Caliper required by clicking on the Gap Caliper Definition tab or the Gap

Caliper Definition tab, or click [Load] to load a previously saved caliper.

4. Click [Save] to save the defined caliper.


6. Click Calipers.

7. Check the 'Use on Rail' then select the rail that the rail on which the caliper will be

placed.

8. Click [Dimension].

The caliper is automatically positioned on the rail/section(s) and computes the distances defined

by the caliper.

When used on Gap or Step dimensions, the caliper information is stored and visible in the

Information dialog.

Modify Nominal

The Modify Nominal Ribbon Group contains commands to modify the nominal solid

models.

Align Normals

Aligns the Surface Normal orientations of all (selected) solids

The surface normals of the nominal model need to point in the same relative direction to

obtain valid comparison results (i.e. outside points have positive deviations and inside

points have negative deviations). The Align Normals tools unifies and aligns Normals of all

the faces of the selected Solid model to a marked face.


133

The Align Normals property sheet

[Select Reference]

This button is used to mark a reference face in a solid to align other selected faces with.

Only one surface can serve as reference, this is always the last selected one.

[Select To Align]

This button is used to mark a limited set of faces for aligning with the reference surface.

Tolerance

The Tolerance parameter sets the tolerance distance between two surfaces that is used by

the search algorithm to find the neighboring surfaces.

Two-sided lighting


the model has both sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has their faces lit on

the positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the Face Normals. This

parameter is also available in the Property tree.

Note: When using Align Normals on a selected number of faces only, the faces are marked in red

upon selection. If Two-sided lighting is turned off, the dark faces show the red color in a deep red

close to black.

[Align]

This button activates the aligning process of the normals, based on the parameters set in

the property sheet.

To align normals

1. Click on the Align Normals tool.

2. The Select dialog appears. This allows you to choose whether you wish to select

individual faces with the Pick option, or select multiple faces within a lasso. Since only

one surface can be selected as the reference, select the Pick option in this dialog.

3. Click the small black triangle next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet. This

is necessary if you wish to adapt the parameters, or if you wish to align just a few surface.

4. Click with the LMB on the model to select the reference surface. This will be colored red.

5. If you just want to align all normals to this surface, simply click the MMB.

6. If you have the property sheet open click [Select Reference]. It will change to [Selected]

to indicate that the selection is made.

7. If you wish to align the normals of specific surfaces select them. This can be done using

the Pick option in the Select dialog with the key to add to the selection and the key to


134

subtract from selection. Alternatively you can to switch to the Lasso mode in the Select

dialog and create a lasso to enclose the required surfaces. The selected faces are colored

in red. The faces turn deep red on selection if the faces are black due to single side

lighting.

8. Click [Select to Align] to mark the selected faces as the faces to be aligned. The button

changes to [Selected] to indicate that the selection is made.

9. Set the Tolerance parameter if needed.

10. Click [Align] button to align all the marked faces with the Reference face.

Flip Normal

Changes the direction of the Normal of selected surfaces

The surface normals of the nominal model need to point in the same relative direction to

obtain valid comparison results (i.e. outside points get positive deviations and inside points

get negative deviations). The Flip Normal tool flips one or more faces of the selected model

to achieve the correct orientation.

The Flip Normal property sheet

[Flip Normals]

This button switches the direction of the normals of the selected faces.

Two-sided lighting





All Faces

The All Faces checkbox allows you to switch the normal direction of all faces on the

model.

To change the direction of normals of surfaces

1. Click the Flip Normal tool.


individual faces with the Pick option, or select multiple faces within a lasso.

3. Click on the arrow next to tool if you wish to open the property sheet. You need to open

the property sheet if you wish to adjust the lighting or to switch the direction of all the

faces.

4. Select the faces to switch using the selected tool. The faces will be colored red.

5. To select all the faces check the All Faces button in the property sheet.


135

6. To switch the normals of the selected faces either click with the MMB on the model or

click [Flip Normals] in the property sheet.

Note: If no results appear after the flip normal command, check if the Two-sided lighting option is

enabled. In that case, both sides are lit and there is no visual difference.

Remove Duplicate Faces

Removes duplicated faces from the imported model

This tool removes duplicate faces in the imported Solid models. Duplicate faces can give

undesirable results during comparison.

The Remove Duplicate Face(s) property sheet

[Highlight Duplicate Face(s)]

This button highlights the duplicate face(s) in selected solid(s).

Duplicate Face(s)

This field shows the total number of duplicate faces highlighted after the Highlight

Duplicate Face(s) button is clicked. It shows the total number of duplicate faces removed

after Remove Duplicate Face(s) command is executed.

[Remove Duplicate Face(s)]

This button removes the highlighted face(s).

To remove Duplicate Face(s)

1. Click on a non-selected Model to see the bounding box.

2. Click on the Remove Duplicate Face(s) tool.

3. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to use the single Pick

option or the lasso option.

4. If you wish to work with the property sheet, click on the small arrow next to the Remove

Duplicate Face(s) tool.

5. Highlight the duplicated surfaces. This can be done either:

- by clicking [Highlight Duplicate Face(s) button] or

- by clicking with the MMB on the model.

6. The number of duplicated faces is shown in the Duplicate Face(s) field or in the status

bar.

7. (Optional) Using the Shift and Ctrl buttons, you can select more faces or deselect

unwanted face(s) highlighted in the previous step.

8. Remove the duplicated faces either by clicking [Remove Duplicate Face(s)] in the

property sheet, or by clicking with the MMB on the model.


136

9. The number of removed faces is indicated in the Duplicate Face(s) field and in the status

bar.

Remove Faces

Removes selected faces from the model

This tool removes selected faces from an imported solid model.

The Remove Faces property sheet

[Remove Selected Face(s)]

This button removes the selected face(s) from one or more solids.

To remove a face

1. Click on the Remove Faces tool.

2. The Select dialog appears. Choose whether you wish to select individual faces with the

Pick option, or select faces within a lasso.

3. Click on the small arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet.

4. Select the face(s) from one or more solids, using the selected tool.

5. Click MMB on the model or click [Remove Selected Face(s)] in the property sheet to

remove the selected faces.

The faces will be removed from the model. This operation can be undone if necessary using the

Undo tool from the Quick Access Toolbar or the from the File -> Edit menu.

Hide Faces

Hides or shows the solid faces

This tool hides selected faces or shows all faces in solid.

The Hide Faces property sheet

[Hide Selected Face(s) ]

This button hides the selected faces from one or more solids.

[Show All Faces]

This button shows all the faces, hidden by Hide Selected Face(s) command from one or

more solids.


137

To hide faces

1. Click on the Hide Face(s) tool.

2. The Select dialog appears. Choose whether you wish to select individual faces with the

Pick option, or select multiple faces within a lasso.

3. Click on the arrow next to tool if you wish to open the property sheet.

4. Select the face(s) from one or more solids using the selected tool.

5. Click MMB on the model or [Hide Selected Face(s)] in the property sheet to hide the

selected face(s).

To show all faces

1. Click on the Hide Face(s) tool.

2. Click on the arrow next to tool to open the property sheet.

3. Select one or more solids for which you want to show all the faces hidden by Hide

Face(s) command.

4. Click [Show All Faces] in the property sheet to show all the faces for selected solids.

Select Single Side

Creates a new solid from selected surfaces

This tool selects surfaces connected to a reference surface within a given tolerance and

extracts them into a new separate solid. The separated solid can be used as a stand-alone

solid to compare to the measured models.

The Select Single Side property sheet

New Name

Enter a name for the extracted solid.

Angle (degrees)

This parameter specifies the angle deviation tolerance of the surfaces being searched. Any

surface whose slope is equal or below than the tolerance angle value with respect to the

Reference surface can be marked and isolated.

Tolerance

The Tolerance parameter specifies the tolerance distance between adjacent or neighboring

surfaces while the function is searching for surfaces.


138

[Run]

The run button initiates the search process according to the Angle and Tolerance values

set in the property sheet.

[Separate Solid(s)]

The Separate Solid(s) button isolates the surfaces detected by the Run process into a new

independent solid. The newly extracted Solid will have the name as defined in the “New

Name” edit box of the property sheet. The original solid’s name remains unchanged.

To isolate a single side solid

1. Click the “Select Single Side” tool.


individual faces with the Pick option, or select multiple faces within a lasso. Since only

one surface can be taken as the reference, then the Pick option is the easiest to use.

3. Click on the arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet. You need to

open the property sheet if you wish to adjust the command parameters.

4. Select the reference face in the Solid using the selected tool. The selected surfaces are

highlighted in red.

5. Adjust the Angle and Tolerance values if necessary.

6. Search for the surfaces that match the parameters either by clicking the MMB or [Run] in

the property sheet.

The number of surfaces that match the criteria is indicated in the status bar at the bottom

of the window.

7. Enter the name of the new solid.

8. Create the new solid either by clicking MMB or [Separate solids] in the property sheet.

A new solid will appear in the Inspection tree with the specified name.

Merge Solids

Merges selected solids into one

This tool merges selected solids into one solid. This tool is only available if more than one

solid is selected.

To merge selected solids

1. Select more than one solid. Use the <Ctrl> key to make multiple selection in the

inspection tree.

2. Click the Merge Selected Solids tool.

The selected solids will be merged into one solid with -Merged as suffix.

Mirror Objects

Mirrors objects around a plane

The Mirror Objects command mirrors selected objects across a specified plane.


139

Mirror Objects Property Sheet

Plane

This field defines the mirroring plane of the current coordinate system. This has three

predefined planes: XY, YZ and XZ.

Position

The Position field specifies the position of the plane (rendered as translucent gray circular

disc) on the normal axis, e.g. when the XY plane is selected, the Position defines the

plane’s position on the Z-axis.

The current position is indicated in the bottom right hand corner of the screen to aid you

find the required position.

Keep Original

If this option is checked ON, a copy is made when the original object is mirrored. If it is

not checked the object is simply moved to new position on the other side of the mirror

plane.

[Mirror]

This starts the mirror process.

To mirror an object

1. Select a the object to be mirrored on the scene or the Inspection tree.

2. Click the Mirror Objects tool.

The current default plane will appear in the scene, with a rectangular handle to

manipulate it.

Click on the View all tool if necessary if the plane is not visible.

3. Click on the arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet to adjust the

parameters.

4. Drag the rectangular handle to adjust the position of the plane, or enter the required value

in the Position field.



5. Either click the MMB in the scene or click [Mirror] in the property sheet to mirror the

object.

A mirrored version of the solid will appear in the scene and in the Nominal inspection Tree.


140

Handheld Measurement task

The Handheld Measurement task provides all the tools required for making a Handheld scan

measurement.

Details about the scanners and localizers supported and their configuration are contained in the

Handheld API manual.

When first selected, Focus attempts to connect to the Localizer (Arm) and the Scanner to be used.

If no Localizer or Scanner have yet been configured, the Connection dialog will appear in which

you can select the correct hardware.

If a Localizer and a Scanner have been specified, Focus attempts to connect to them. This will be

indicated by the message "Connecting" appearing in the Status bar. If all is well then the message

will switch to "Ready" and you can proceed with the Handheld Measurement.

If there is a problem, this will be indicated in the Message area

Click on [Details] to find out more about the cause of the problem.

Click on [Retry] when the problem has been corrected.

Previews


141

The Previews Ribbon Group tools present panels in which the current characteristics of the

scan are presented.

Scanner Image

Displays the Scanner Image panel

This tool toggles the presence of the Scanner Image panel in which a 2D view of the scan

line and the intensity level is presented.

This provides you with a view of the scan line and the intensity level thus enabling you to judge

their quality.

When performing a hand held scan, you should try to ensure that the laser line and the laser spot

stay close together as possible. This ensures that the optimum number of points are captured.

The Intensity level should always be as high as possible while remaining green.

Digital Readout

Displays the Digital Readout panel

This tool toggles the presence of the Digital Readout panel in which messages and the

coordinates of the centre of the Field of View of the scanner are displayed.


142

The X,Y and Z coordinates are shown in the currently selected coordinate system that has been

selected using the Coordinate System tool from the Measure ERROR: Variable (Ribbon-Group)

is undefined..

The message area displays the current measurement status, indicating whether some adjustment

needs to be made or whether the system is "OK" to make the measurement.

Measure

The Measure Ribbon Group contains all the tools required to make a Handheld scan

measurement.

Prescan

Sets the scene display area to match the scanning region

This tool enables you to make some preliminary scan movements that will define the

extremities of the scanning region and then to set the view shown in the scene to match the

scanning region.

When the Handheld Measurement task is first scheduled, the view shown by the scene camera, is

usually centered on the origin of the Localizer arm. This is invariably some distance from the


143

space containing the part to be scanned. This tool ensures that the space shown in the display

coincides with that occupied by the scanned part.

To set the scene display

1. Click on the Prescan tool.

2. Holding the scanner at the required angle, move the scanner over the part making sure to

include all extremities and so encompass the complete bounding box around the object.

3. Press the main trigger button.

The displayed view will be adapted to set the complete part in the centre of the screen.

Handheld Scan

Enables handheld measurements

This tool starts the scanning process of the part. When the scanning process is completed it

initializes the generation of a mesh.

To make a handheld scan measurement

1. Click on the Handheld Scan tool.

2. You may receive warning bleeps and messages if the Localizer is not in a suitable

position.

3. Position the scanner so that it is at the correct height and angle to scan the object.

Try to ensure that the dot and the laser line are as close together as possible.

4. Press the trigger button to start the scan and press it again to stop the first scan pass.

5. Repeat this for as many passes over the object as are required.

6. To adjust the view of the scanned object, press and hold the trigger button. Rotate and

zoom the image as required, then press the trigger button again to set the new view.

7. Press the Stop / End button to halt the scanning processing.

The processing of each of the point clouds created will be initiated. The result will be a single

mesh object representing a fused combination of all the point clouds.

(This automatic processing of the point clouds is set using the Processing Settings tool.)

Tactile Measurement

Schedules the Tactile Measurement module

This tool schedules the Tactile Measurement module in which you can make tactile

measurements to combine with the current handheld scanned measurements. The Tactile

Measurement module includes all the tools required to make measurements and define

features.

The different parts of the interface are shown below.


144

Features Ribbon Band

The Features Ribbon Band contains all the tools for measuring, constructing and managing

features.

Focus Return

The Return button returns you to the Focus Handheld Measurement task. All the measurements

and constructions defined in the Tactile Measurement module will be saved and incorporated into

the current Inspection document.

Teach

Teach ERROR: Variable (Ribbon-Group) is undefined.


145

The Teach Ribbon Group contains a set of tools to measure features.

Point

Creates a measured point feature

This tool enables you to create a measured point feature that will be added to the Feature

Database.

The Measure POINT dialog

Measurement counter

The number of points required to measure the chosen feature is displayed in the green

counter. Each time a point is measured this number decreases. A default number of points

is displayed when the dialog is first scheduled. The number of points required can be

adjusted using the buttons described below.

By 5

Increases or decreases the number of required points by 5.

By 1


[Default]

Resets the number of required points to the default value.


146

[Key in]

When this button is clicked you can enter the number of points you wish to use from the

keyboard.

Pts Collected

Shows in red, the number of points already measured for the creation of the feature.

The [Delete] button enable you to delete a collected point.

Name

The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.

To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]

button.

Probe Comp.

Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known

center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and

the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors

must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.

Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the

shape of a part, rather than dimensions.

Compensation Direction

This determines the direction of the vector used for the probe compensation.

The following options are available:

Auto Axis Direction

the direction is determined from the nearest part reference frame axis and one of the six

standard axes (±X,±Y,± Z).

Touch Vector Dir (direction)

the direction is calculated from the approach vector taken by the probe during the

measurement of the part surface. This type of probe compensation can have larger

measurement cosine errors since the approach vector is not guaranteed to be normal to the

part surface.

Micro Plane

the direction is normal to a micro plane measured on the part. When this option is

selected, the software automatically switches to the measurement of three points that will

determine the micro plane close to the feature. Once the micro plane has been

determined, the measurement of the required feature can be made. -

Polar XY, Polar YZ, or Polar ZX

the direction is defined by projecting a line from the part reference frame origin into the

specified plane

Polar 3D

the direction corresponds to a temporary line from the part reference frame origin to the

measured point.

X, Y or Z axis of the part reference frame.


147

Projection

A measured point feature may be placed at the exact X, Y, Z position where it was

measured, or it may be mathematically moved to a standard working plane or axis termed

the "projection".


None

no projection is performed; the measured point is placed at the X, Y, Z position where it

was measured.

An existing plane

this must be dragged from the Feature Database and dropped onto the list.

XY, YZ, ZX Plane

the planes formed by the X, Y and Z axes of the current part reference frame.

X, Y Z axis

one of the axes of the current part reference frame.

To create a measured Point feature

It is recommended that you use the default settings for measuring a point feature.

1. Enter a name for the feature if you wish to use a name other than the default name

presented.

Then click the [Update] button.

2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use an average to determine the

point feature.

3. Choose whether you wish to apply Probe Compensation and if so choose the

Compensation Direction.

4. Select a Projection plane if you wish to project the measured point onto a plane. If you

select "None" the point will be located at the exact coordinates where it was measured.

5. Place the probe in the required position and take the required number of tactile

measurements.

The newly measured point appears in the Feature Database.

Line

Creates a measured line feature

This tool enables you to create measured line features that will be added to the Feature

Database.

The measurement of a line feature requires the specification of a plane on to which the

measured points can be projected in order to determine the line.


148

The Measure LINE dialog

Measurement counter





By 5


By 1


[Default]


[Key in]


keyboard.

Pts Collected



Name



149


button.

Probe Comp.







Orientation Plane/Axis

Any measured feature that has 2D geometry requires the specification of an Orientation

Plane/Axis and selection of the 2D Feature Location. Both options must be enabled and

specified together.

The Orientation Plane/Axis (commonly referred to as the "working plane") is the plane in

which the feature lies. It is used to determine both the probe compensation vector and

projection of the measured points to calculate the feature geometry.


An existing plane


Auto

one of the XY, YZ, or ZX planes of current part reference frame. The Tactile

Measurement module automatically selects the closest orthogonal plane as determined

from the measurement points describing the feature.

XY, YZ, ZX

one of the current part reference planes.

Bestfit Plane

the Tactile Measurement module will create a bestfit plane to the measurement points.

2D Feature Location

The 2D Feature Location option determine the location of the orientation plane, selected

from the dropdown list shown above, relative to the active reference frame. The choice

establishes which 3rd axis point will be used to set the feature location.

Projection

projects the measured feature to the 3rd axis origin point on the selected orientation plane.

Average Height

calculates the mathematical average of the 3rd axis locations of the individual measured

points.

Measurement Mode

Trigger

the Tactile Measurement module will collect a point each time a trigger is detected.

Scan

this method is not supported in the Tactile Measurement module.


150

Relative Measurement

When this option is checked then the orientation plane used to determine the feature

geometry will be determined by sampling a plane aound the feature to be measured. The

software automatically switches to the Measure Plane tool. When the required number of

points to determine the plane have been measured you are returned to the measure the

required feature.

To create a measured Line feature


presented.


2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use more than the minimum

suggested.

3. It is recommended that you use the Relative Measurement function.

Check the option ON.

You will be switched to the Measure Plane functionality.

Measure at least three point to determine the local relative plane.

4. Set any other parameters required.


measurements.

The newly measured line will appear in the Feature Database.

Circle

Creates a measured circle feature

This tool enables you to create measured circle features that will be added to the Feature

Database.

The measurement of a circle feature requires the specification of a plane on to which the

measured points can be projected in order to determine the circle.


151

The Measure CIRCLE dialog

Measurement counter





By 5


By 1


[Default]


[Key in]


keyboard.

Pts Collected



Name



152


button.

Probe Comp.










specified together.





An existing plane


Auto




XY, YZ, ZX


Bestfit Plane


Range

When the Full Circle option is checked ON, a complete circle will be measured. When

this option is checked OFF, an arc will be measured.

2D Feature Location




Projection


Average Height


points.

Measurement Mode

Trigger



153

Scan


Guided Plane

A guided plane allows you to restrict the

measurement of points to a specific zone that will

aid in determining the feature being measured.

The guided plane is defined relative to the selected

Orientation Plane / Axis. This may NOT be Auto

or Bestfit Plane.

Offset

the distance between the guiding plane and the Orientation Plane/Axis.

Trigger zone

the zone around the guiding plane in which points will be automatically collected. The

trigger zone is centered around the plane. The current point will be collected if it lies

within the trigger zone and when the previous point was on the opposite side of the

guiding plane.

Advanced Options

This enables you to choose the algorithm to use for feature fitting. The following options

are available:

Least Squares : fits a feature that minimizes the average squared error of all the data

points.

Max Inscribed : fits the biggest feature that fits inside all the data points.

Min Circumscribed : fits the smallest feature that fits inside all the data points.

Min/Max : fits a feature halfway between two features, with a common center, that have a

minimum distance between them to enclose all data points. This algorithm minimizes the

maximum error. Note that the two features are not the same as those produced using Max

Inscribed and Min Circumscribed.






required feature.

To create a measured Circle feature


presented.



suggested.




154





measurements.

The newly measured circle will appear in the Feature Database.

Plane

Creates a measured plane feature

This tool enables you to create measured plane features that will be added to the Feature

Database.

The Measure PLANE dialog

Measurement counter





By 5


By 1



155

[Default]


[Key in]


keyboard.

Pts Collected



Name



button.

Probe Comp.







Measurement Mode

Trigger


Scan


To create a measured Plane feature


presented.


2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use more than the proposed

minimum.

3. Choose whether you wish to apply Probe Compensation.


measurements.

The newly measured plane appears in the Feature Database.

Cylinder

Creates a measured cylinder feature

This tool enables you to create measured cylinder features that will be added to the

Feature Database.


156

The Measure CYLNDR dialog

Measurement counter





By 5


By 1


[Default]



157

[Key in]


keyboard.

Pts Collected



Name



button.

Probe Comp.







Measurement Mode

Trigger


Scan



are available:


points.







To create a measured Cylinder feature


presented.



minimum.


4. Click on Advanced options if you need to modify the fitting algorithm.


158


measurements.

The newly measured cylinder appears in the Feature Database.

Cone

Creates a measured cone feature

This tool enables you to create measured cone features that will be added to the Feature

Database.

The Measure CONE dialog

Measurement counter




159



By 5


By 1


[Default]


[Key in]


keyboard.

Pts Collected



Name



button.

Probe Comp.







Measurement Mode

Trigger


Scan



are available:


points.






160



To create a measured Cone feature


presented.



minimum.




measurements.

The newly measured Cone appears in the Feature database

Sphere

Creates a measured sphere feature

This tool enables you to create measured sphere features that will be added to the Feature

Database.

The Measure SPHERE dialog


161

Measurement counter





By 5


By 1


[Default]


[Key in]


keyboard.

Pts Collected



Name



button.

Probe Comp.







Measurement Mode

Trigger


Scan



are available:


points.




162





To create a measured Sphere feature


presented.



minimum.




measurements.

The newly measured Sphere appears in the Feature database

Slot

Creates a measured square or round slot feature

This tool enables you to create measured square or round slot features that will be added

to the Feature database.

The type of slot is selected by clicking on the arrow below the tool button.


163

The Measure SQSLT and RNDSLT dialog

Measurement counter





By 5


By 1


[Default]


[Key in]


keyboard.

Pts Collected




164

Name



button.

Probe Comp.










specified together.





An existing plane


Auto




XY, YZ, ZX


Bestfit Plane


2D Feature Location




Projection


Average Height


points.

Measurement Mode

Trigger



165

Scan







required feature.

To create a measured slot feature


presented.



suggested.







measurements.

The newly measured slot will appear in the Feature Database.

Auto Feature

The Auto Feature tools allow you to measure features without having to specify the type of

feature beforehand : the Tactile Measurement module automatically determines the feature type.

2D Auto Feature

Automatically determines the type of 2D feature that fits measured points

This tool automatically determines the type of 2D feature (line, circle) that fits your

measured points, and creates a feature of this type. By limiting itself to 2D features only,

the Tactile Measurement module provides an Auto End capability to Auto Feature 2D -

when a new point cannot fit the currently-determined 2D feature, the Tactile Measurement

module creates that feature and begins new 2D feature detection starting with the new

point.


166

The Measure Unknown dialog

Name

The name to be assigned to the feature. This will be filled in by the Tactile Measurement

module as it determines the type of feature that is being measured.

If you enter your own name click the [Update] button to accept it.

Type

Set the Auto Type check box ON, to automatically determine the feature.

Probe Comp.










specified together.





An existing plane


Auto



167



XY, YZ, ZX


Bestfit Plane


2D Feature Location




Projection


Average Height


points.

Collection Points

The number of points that have already been measured in order to measure the feature.

[Delete point]

Deletes the last point that was measured.

[End Collection]

Ends the current collection of measured points.

To measure an automatically determined feature type

1. Click on the 2D Auto Feature tool.

2. Set the Auto Type option ON.

3. Define the Probe Compensation, Orientation Plane/Axis and 2D Feature Location

parameters as required.

4. Start measuring points.

3D Auto Feature

Automatically determines the type of 3D feature that fits measured points

This tool automatically determines the type of 3D feature (cylinder, cone) that fits your

measured points, and creates a feature of this type. By limiting itself to 3D features only,

the Tactile Measurement module provides an Auto End capability. When a new point

cannot fit the currently-determined feature, the Tactile Measurement module creates that

feature and begins new feature detection starting with the new point.


168

The Measure Unknown dialog

Name

The name to be assigned to the feature. This will be filled in by the Tactile Measurement

module as it determines the type of feature that is being measured.

If you enter your own name click the [Update] button to accept it.

Type

Set the Auto Type check box ON, to automatically determine the feature.

Probe Comp.










specified together.





An existing plane


Auto



169



XY, YZ, ZX


Bestfit Plane


2D Feature Location




Projection


Average Height


points.

Collection Points

The number of points that have already been measured in order to measure the feature.

[Delete point]

Deletes the last point that was measured.

[End Collection]

Ends the current collection of measured points.

To measure an automatically determined feature type

1. Click on the 3D Auto Feature tool.

2. Set the Auto Type option ON.

3. Define the Probe Compensation, Orientation Plane/Axis and 2D Feature Location

parameters as required.

4. Start measuring points.

Advanced

The Advanced toolbar provides tool that allows you to make specific measurement types.

Single Point Circle


170

Creates a circle feature from a single point measurement

This tool enables you to detect a circle feature by measuring a single point that is at the

centre of the circle. The circle is created at the intersection of a reference plane and the

probe tip.

The circle measured has a smaller diameter than the probe tip. The probe tip must have a

non-zero diameter and a reference plane is necessary for the calculation.

The Single Point Circle dialog

Measurement counter





By 5


By 1


[Default]



171

[Key in]


keyboard.

Pts Collected



Name



button.

Reference Plane

This is the plane in which the circle lies and which is used to calculate the circle. The

following options are available:

An existing measured plane which can be selected in the display or dragged from the

Feature Database into the drop down list.

One of the reference planes (XY, YZ, XZ)

A Sampling plane that will be determined by the measurement of three points.

When this option is selected the software automatically switches to the Measurement

Plane function.

To create a circle from a single point measurement

1. Click on the Single Point Circle tool.


presented.


3. It is recommended that you use the Sampling Plane option to determine the reference

plane.


Measure at least three point to determine the local sampling plane.

4. Place the probe in the required position and measure the point.

Construct Feature


172

The Construct Feature Ribbon Group provides the following commands to construct new features

from existing measured or previously constructed features:

Point

Constructs a new Point feature based on existing features

This tool enables you to construct new point features that are located at intersections and

specified distances from other features, or in defined positions.

The Construct POINT dialog

Name



173


button.

Construct Methods

A selection of methods to construct the feature are provided, each of which are described

below. The parameter selection fields will adapt to the match the selected construction

method.

There are several means whereby you can specify the features to be used for the

construction method:

Clicking on the required feature in the display.

Dragging the required feature from the Feature Database into the input field.

By clicking on the ellipsis button .

This schedules a dialog in which you can select the required reference axis or plane.

Midpoint of two points

This method creates a new Point at the midpoint between two selected Point features. The

Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere

feature.

Intersection of Two Lines

This method constructs a point at the intersection of two selected Line features. The Line

feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one

of the reference frame axes.

If the selected lines are coplanar, the intersection point is constructed at the intersection of

the two lines (which may require that they be extended). If the lines are not coplanar, the

point is constructed at the midpoint of the single line that joins the selected line features

and which is perpendicular to both.

Intersection of Line and Plane

This method constructs a point at the intersection of selected Line and Plane features. The

Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or

one of the reference frame axes.

The plane can be either a measured plane or one of the three working planes coincident

with the current origin. The point feature is constructed where the extended line

intersects the plane.


174

Projection Point onto Line

This method constructs a new Point feature by projecting an existing Point onto a Line.

The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone

feature or one of the reference frame axes.

Projection Point onto Plane

This method constructs a new point feature by projecting an existing Point onto a Plane.

The plane can be either a measured plane or one of the three working planes coincident

with the current origin.

Intersection of a Line and a Circle

This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Circle. If

necessary the line will be extended to intersect with the circle. If two intersections occur,

the user chooses which point to use. If the line and circle do not intersect, the point will

be constructed at the location where the line is closest to the circle.

Intersection of Two Circles

This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a two circles. These

circles must be co-planar and intersect. If two intersections occur, the user chooses which

point to use.

Offset Point

This method constructs a new Point feature that is offset by a specified distance from an

existing Point feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre

of a Circle or Sphere feature.

Move Point along Vector

This method constructs a new Point feature located at a specified distance along the

direction of a Line feature. The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis

of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.

Intersection of Line and Sphere

This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Sphere. The


one of the reference frame axes. If two intersections occur, the user chooses which point

to use.

Centroid of a Feature

This method constructs a new Point feature at the centroid (centre of mass) of a 2D or 3D

feature.


175

Intersection of Line and Cylinder

This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Cylinder.


feature or one of the reference frame axes. If two intersections occur, the user chooses

which point to use.

Intersection of Line and Cylinder

This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Cone. The


one of the reference frame axes. If two intersections occur, the user chooses which point

to use.

Define

This method constructs a new Point feature at a defined location.

To define a Point:

1. Enter the 3 coordinate positions of the point in the X, Y and Z fields.

Click [Apply all] to view the feature in the display.

2. Select the direction of the outward normal from the options in the drop-down list.

3. Click [Flip] to change the normal direction by 180 degrees.

High / Low Point

This method constructs a new Point feature that corresponds to the maximum or

minimum distance of a point cloud from a reference feature. The reference feature can be

either an existing Point, Line or Plane feature.

A Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere

feature.

A Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, or the axis of a Cylinder or Cone

feature.

When a Plane feature is selected as a reference, the constructed high or low point can be

calculated either through an absolute distance, or with respect to the plane's normal to

allow for negative distances.

Points from Cloud

This method constructs a new Point features at the same location as selected points within

a cloud.

Line

Constructs new Line features based on existing features

This tool enables you to construct new Line features that are located at intersections and

specified distances from other features or in defined positions.


176

The Construct LINE dialog

Name



button.

Construct Methods



method.








177

Line through two points

This method constructs a new Line feature that joins two selected Point features. The


feature.

Line through a point normal to a line

This method constructs a new Line feature that passes through a selected Point feature

and is perpendicular to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an

existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined

by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame

axes.

Line through a point parallel to a line


and is parallel to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing

Point, or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined by an

existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.

Line through a point normal to a plane


and is perpendicular to a selected Plane feature. The Point feature can be defined by an

existing Point, or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Plane feature can be

selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the three working planes coincident

with the current origin. The plane is extended to intersect with the constructed Line.

Intersection of two planes

This method constructs a new Line feature that forms the intersection of two selected

Plane features. The Planes will be extended if necessary so that they intersect. The Plane

feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the three working

planes coincident with the current origin.

Projection of a line on a plane

This method constructs a new Line feature that is formed by the projecting a selected

Line feature onto a selected Plane feature in a direction normal to the Plane. The Plane

will be extended if necessary to enable the projection to be made.


feature or one of the reference frame axes. The Plane feature can be selected from an

existing measured Plane or one of the three working planes coincident with the current

origin.


178

Line through a point tangent to a circle


and is tangent to a selected Circle feature. The selected Point and Circle must be coplanar.

The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point, or the centre of a Circle or Sphere

feature.

Line tangent to two circles

This method constructs a new Line feature that is tangent to two Circle features. The two

Circles must be coplanar. The user chooses which tangent to use.

From slot axis

This method constructs a new Line feature that corresponds to the axis of a selected Slot

feature. The selected Slot can be open, round or square.

Mid-line of two lines

This method constructs a new Line feature that lies midway between two selected Line

features. The selected Lines do not have to intersect. The Line feature can be defined by

an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame

axes.

Through a point at an angle to a line


and is at a specified angle to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by

an existing Point, or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be

defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference

frame axes.

Define

This method constructs a new Line feature with a defined length at a defined location.

To define a Line:

1. Enter the required length.

2. Enter the 3 coordinate positions of the start point of the line in the X, Y and Z fields.

Click [Apply all] to update the feature in the display.

3. Select the direction of the line from the options in the drop-down list.


Click [Flip] to change the direction by 180 degrees.

4. Select the Orientation plane from the options in the drop-down list.

(The Orientation Plane is used to determine vector touch directions, probe compensation

vectors, and the projection plane for the 2D feature).



179

5. Click [OK] to create the new Line feature.

Circle

Constructs new Circle features based on existing features

This tool enables you to construct new Circle features that are located at intersections and


The Construct CIRCLE dialog

Name



button.

Construct Methods



method.






180



Circle through three points

This method constructs a new Circle feature that passes through three selected Point

features. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or

Sphere feature.

Arc through three points

This method constructs a new circular arc feature that passes through three selected Point

features. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or

Sphere feature.

Projection of a circle onto a plane

This method constructs a new Circle feature by projecting an existing circle feature onto a

selected Plane feature. The Plane feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane

or one of the three working planes coincident with the current origin.

Intersection of a cylinder and a plane

This method constructs a new Circle feature that corresponds to the intersection of

selected Cylinder feature and a selected Plane feature. The circle will be constructed at

the true intersection, or can be projected onto the Plane feature if required. The Plane

feature can be extended to enable the intersection if necessary.

The Plane feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the three

working planes coincident with the current origin.

Intersection of a cone and a plane


selected Cone feature and a selected Plane feature. The circle will be constructed at the

true intersection, or can be projected onto the Plane feature if required. The Plane feature

can be extended to enable the intersection if necessary.




181

Intersection of a sphere and a plane


selected Sphere feature and a selected Plane feature. The circle will be constructed on the

selected Plane. The Plane feature can be extended to enable the intersection if necessary.



Intersection of two spheres

This method constructs a new Circle feature that corresponds to the intersection of two

selected Sphere features. The two Spheres must intersect.

Tangent to two lines

This method constructs a new Circle feature whose circumference is tangent to two

selected Line features. The selected Line features must be coplanar and they must

intersect.

Circle on cone with diameter

This method constructs a new Circle feature at a specified diameter of an existing Cone

feature. The center of the constructed Circle lies on the axis of the cone and its normal

corresponds to the cone axis.

Intersection of a cone and a cylinder

This method constructs a new Circle feature at the intersection of a selected Cone feature

and a selected Cylinder feature. The selected Cone and Cylinder must be coaxial.

Circle through two circles

This method constructs a new Circle feature whose circumference passes through the

center of two selected existing Circle features. The selected Circles must be coplanar.

Intersection of a two cones

This method constructs a new Circle feature at the intersection of two selected Cone

feature. The selected Cones must intersect.

Intersection of a cylinder and a sphere

This method constructs a new Circle feature at the intersection of a selected Cylinder and

Sphere feature. The selected Cylinder and Cone must intersect.


182

Define

This method constructs a new Circle feature with a defined diameter at a defined location.

To define a Circle:

1. Enter the required Diameter.

2. Select the required Type.

Inner - creates an internal feature (hole).

Outer - creates an external feature (boss)

3. Enter the 3 coordinate positions to define the centre of the circle in the X, Y and Z fields.


4. Select the Orientation plane from the options in the drop-down list.

(The Orientation Plane is used to determine vector touch directions, probe compensation

vectors, and the projection plane for the 2D feature).


Click [Flip] to change the orientation by 180 degrees

5. Click [OK] to create the new Circle feature.

Plane

Constructs new Plane features based on existing features

This tool enables you to construct new Plane features that are located at intersections and


The Construct PLANE dialog


183

Name



button.

Construct Methods



method.







Plane through a point and a line

This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through a selected Point feature

and Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a

Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of

a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.

Plane parallel to a line


and is parallel to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing

Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined by an

existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.

Plane normal to a line


and is perpendicular to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an

existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined

by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame

axes.


184

Plane parallel to a plane


and is parallel to a selected Plane feature. The plane will be mathematically extended to

allow coincidence with the point, but the constructed plane has the same dimensions as

the selected plane.

The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere

feature. The Plane feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the

three working planes coincident with the current origin.

Plane through a line and parallel to another line

This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through one Line feature and is

parallel to a second Line feature. The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the

axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.

Mid-plane of two points

This method constructs a new Plane feature that is perpendicular (normal) to the line

joining two selected Point features. The plane is positioned on the mid-point of the line.

The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere

feature.

Mid-plane of two lines

This method constructs a new Plane feature that is based on two selected Line features.


feature or one of the reference frame axes. The resulting constructed plane depends on the

relative orientation of the selected Line features:

Parallel and coplanar- the lines are in

the same plane and are parallel to each

other.

The constructed plane is perpendicular

to the plane connecting the two lines.

Intersecting and coplanar - the lines

are in the same plane and intersect.



It bisects the angle of intersection

between the two lines, so two planes are

possible.

The user chooses which plane is

required.


185

Skewed - the lines lie in two different

planes.


to the planes containing the line features.

Mid-plane of two planes

This method constructs a new Plane feature that lies on the plane between two selected

Plane Features. It bisects the angle of intersection between the two planes so two new

planes are possible. The user chooses which plane is required.

Offset plane

This method constructs a new Plane feature that is parallel to an existing Plane feature. It

is located a specified distance along the normal to the selected Plane. If a negative offset

is specified the constructed Plane is located on the opposite side of the selected Plane.

Center plane of two lines

This method constructs a new Plane feature that is based on two selected Line features.


feature or one of the reference frame axes. The resulting constructed plane depends on the

relative orientation of the selected Line features:

Parallel and coplanar- the lines are in

the same plane and are parallel to each

other.



Intersecting and coplanar - the lines

are in the same plane and intersect.



It bisects the angle of intersection

between the two lines, so two planes are

possible.

The user chooses which plane is

required.


186

Skewed - the lines lie in two different

planes.

The constructed plane is parallel to the

planes containing the line features.

Define

This method constructs a new Plane feature with a defined size at a defined location.

To define a Plane:

1. Enter the required Length and Width.

The length is defined relative to a specified length vector.

2. Enter the 3 coordinate positions to define the centre of the circle in the X, Y and Z fields.


3. Select the direction of the outward normal from the options in the drop-down list.



4. Select the direction of the length from the options in the drop-down list.



5. Click [OK] to create the new Plane feature.

Best Fit - Feature

Creates a prismatic geometric feature that best fits selected point features.

This tool creates a prismatic geometric feature that best fits selected point features. The

point features are based on existing features.

A number of feature types can be constructed. The number of points and the specific

parameter values required depend on the feature to be constructed.


187

The Construct (FEATURE) dialog

According to the type of feature to be constructed, this dialog can contain the following fields.

Name



button.

Probe Comp.








188




specified together.





An existing plane


Auto




XY, YZ, ZX


Bestfit Plane


2D Feature Location




Projection


Average Height


points.

Fitting Algorithm


are available:


points.







Type

The Type parameter determines the direction of the boundary vectors for an enclosed

geometric feature:


189

Inner - All vectors point inward to each other creating an internal feature (hole, slot).

Outer - All vectors point outward away from the feature surface creating an external

feature (boss, web, rib).

List of selected points

Points to be used to best fit the feature can be selected by :

Clicking on them directly in the display.

Dragging from the Feature Database and dropping them into the list.

Point can be deleted from the list by:

Selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key.

Features that can be constructed from best fitting points

Line

This tool constructs a new Line feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point

features can be selected on an existing Point, Circle or Sphere feature.

A minimum of two Points must be selected.

Circle

This tool constructs a new Circle feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point


A minimum of three Points must be selected.

Plane

This tool constructs a new Plane feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point



Sphere

This tool constructs a new Sphere feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point


A minimum of four Points must be selected.

Cylinder

This tool constructs a new Cylinder feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point

feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.

A minimum of five Points must be selected.

Cone

This tool constructs a new Cone feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point




190

Point

This tool constructs a new Point feature mid way between selected Point features. The


feature.

A minimum of two Points must be selected.

Ellipse

This tool constructs a new Ellipse feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point


A minimum of five Points must be selected.

Best Fit - Offset Line

Constructs a new Line feature that is a specified distance from selected point features

The Construct Bestfit Offset Line command creates a new Line that is a specified distance

from selected point features. A Bestfit Offset Line is useful if you have a datum line that

cannot be measured, or a theoretical center-line / axis that is not directly measurable. It

allows you to use nominal dimensions of a part to define where a line is to be constructed

relative to existing points.

The Bestfit Offset LINE dialog

Name



button.


191

Offset Direction

Choose the direction in which offset values will be defined.

List of points

This contains a list of points that will be used to best-fit the new line. At least two points

must be specified.

Points - the name of the selected feature containing the point. This can be selected in the

display or dragged from the Feature Database. Point features can be defined by an

existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.

Distance : the distance between the feature point and the line. Enter values in the Offset

Direction. Values can be positive or negative.

Probe Comp : use these check boxes to apply Probe Compensation to any non-

compensated measured point(s).

Working Plane

Choose the plane in which the new Line feature lies.

[Preview]

Click [Preview] to see a preview of the line.

[OK]

Click [OK] to accept and create the new feature.

Best Fit - Offset Plane

Constructs a new plane that is a specified distance from selected point features

The Construct Bestfit Offset Plane command creates a new plane that is a specified

distance from selected point features through which the best fit is made. A Bestfit Offset

Plane is useful if you have a datum plane that cannot be measured, or is too small to get an

accurate measurement due to the extremely tight point spacing that would result.

The Bestfit Offset PLANE dialog


192

Name



button.

Plane Normal

Choose the direction in which the normal to the plane will lie.

List of points

This contains a list of points that will be used to best-fit the new plane. At least three

points must be specified.

Points - the name of the selected feature containing the point. This can be selected in the

display or dragged from the Feature Database. Point features can be defined by an

existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.

Distance : the distance between the feature point and the line. Values can be positive or

negative. Positive values are in the same direction as the Plane Normal.

Probe Comp : use these check boxes to apply Probe Compensation to any non-

compensated measured point(s).

[Preview]

Click [Preview] to see a preview of the plane.

[OK]

Click [OK] to accept and create the new feature.

Define Cylinder

Defines a Cylinder feature

The Define to Construct Cylinder tool allows you to construct a cylinder feature by

defining its nominal position, geometric properties, and dimensions.


193

The Construct Cylinder dialog

Label

The Label field enables you to define a unique identification for the constructed feature.

A default one is presented by default. You can enter a user-defined label in the input field.

Type

These options set the direction of the boundary vectors for an enclosed geometric feature:




Size

These fields enable you to define the dimensions of the Cylinder.

The Height is defined along the axis (see below).

Dimensions must be defined in the measuring system units.

Base Center

Enter the 3D coordinate of the centre of the base of the cylinder relative to the defined

coordinate system.

Axis

The Axis of the cylinder defines the direction in which the height is defined.

You can enter vector components to define a direction or select a coordinate axis.


194

The Flip button reverses the defined direction by180 degrees.

Define Cone

Defines a Cone feature

The Define to Construct Cone tool allows you to construct a cone feature by defining its

nominal position, geometric properties, and dimensions.

The Construct Cone dialog

Label



Type





Size

These fields enable you to define the dimensions of the cone as shown in the figure

below.


195

The Height is defined along the cone axis (see below) and can allow a truncated cone to

be defined.

Dimensions must be defined in the measuring system units.

Cone Apex

Enter the 3D coordinate of the apex (top) of a cone relative to the defined coordinate

system.

Axis

The Axis of the cone defines the direction in which the height is defined.

You can enter vector components to define a direction or select a coordinate axis.

The Flip button reverses the defined direction by180 degrees.

Define Sphere

Defines a Sphere feature

The Define to Construct Sphere tool allows you to construct a sphere feature by defining its

nominal position, geometric properties, and dimensions.


196

The Construct Sphere dialog

Label



Type





Size

This field enables you to define the diameter of the sphere. The dimension must be

defined in the measuring system units.

Center

Enter the 3D coordinate of the centre of the sphere relative to the defined coordinate

system.

Window

The Window ERROR: Variable (Ribbon-Group) is undefined. allows you to choose the interface

panels that are displayed.


197

Clicking on the small arrow on the Window tool reveals the following menu:

Feature Database

Switches the Feature Database panel on or off.

DRO Window

Switches the Digital Read Out panel on or off.

Status Bar Window

Switches the Status bar panel on or off.

View Tools Window

Switches the View Tools bar on or off.

View Tools bar

The View tools allow you to modify the displayed part.

Zooms in

Each click zooms in by 25%.

Zooms out

Each click zooms out by 25%.

Zoom all

Adjusts the zoom so that all features fit within the graphical scene.

Zoom slide

Use the scroll bars to zoom.


198

Zoom box

Zooms in on a user defined area.

1. Click on the zoom box tool.

2. Place the mouse cursor on one corner of the box.

3. Press the LMB and drag the cursor to the opposite corner.

4. Release the mouse button.

The area within the box will fill the scene.

Translate

Moves the part over the scene.


2. Drag with the left mouse button.

3. Press Esc to stop the translate function

Rotate

Rotates the part around the current center of rotation.


2. Drag with the left mouse button to rotate the object

3. press Esc to end the rotation.

Set rotation center

Sets the center of rotation which can either be a point on in the display, or the center of a

selected feature.

1. Click on the tool

2. Either click anywhere in the scene to set the centre of rotation there

3. Or select a feature.

Set View port

Allows you to set the angle from which you view the part in the graphical display.


2. A menu appears

3. Select your view.

View Feature Label

Displays a label with the name of a selected feature.


2. Click on the feature (in the display) whose label is required.


199

Status bar

The Status Bar runs along the bottom of the window.

It shows the current status of the measurement, and displays instructional messages to guide you

through operations.

The Status bar can be shown or hidden using the Window menu.

Feature Database

The Feature Database lists features that have been measured or constructed.

The Features Database can be shown or hidden using the Window menu.

Right-clicking on the Feature Database produces a pop-up menu that provides a number of

operations that can be performed on the items in the database.

Show

Shows a feature which has been previously hidden.

Hide

Hides the selected feature.

Find...

Schedules a dialog in which you can search for a particular item in the Feature database.


200

1. Enter the name of the item required.

2. Select the direction in which the search is to be made.

3. Check the Match Case box if the search is to be case sensitive.

4. Click [Find next].

Feature Data

This opens a dialog in which the properties of the selected item are displayed.

Show Label

This displays the name of the feature in the display.

Hide Label

Hides the label that has been displayed using the Show Label function.

Delete

Deletes the selected feature.

Rename

Allows you to rename the selected feature.

Change ID/OD Property

This allows you to change the properties of a selected feature that has an inner/outer

property. This can be especially useful for an arm measurement of a circle or other feature

in which the property was set incorrectly based on the first vector. This operation can be

performed on a circle, cylinder, cone and sphere.

The Change ID/OD Feature Property dialog appears. The current property setting is

selected.

Check the "Update nominal to reflect property change" option to update the nominal

values (such as diameter, center, etc.) along with changing the inner/outer property.

Click [OK] to change the feature property.


201

Digital Read Out

The DRO (Digital Read Out) window shows the current position of the stylus center. In the

current selected coordinate system.

The DRO (Digital Read Out) can be shown or hidden using the Window menu.

Coordinate System

Sets the coordinate system

This tool enables you to choose the coordinate system in which the scanned measurements

will be made. By default the coordinate system used is that of the localizer arm. Other

coordinate systems can be selected based on alignments that are currently listed under the

Alignments node in the Inspect section of the Inspection tree.

Alignments can be made using a number of tool in the Align Ribbon Group in the Align task.

To set the coordinate system

1. Click on the arrow next to the Coordinate System tool.

2. A list of available coordinate systems will appear.

The Machine Coordinates system will always be available.

Other entries correspond to existing alignments.

3. Click on the Coordinate system required.

The display will adapt to show the origin of the coordinate system.

The values displayed in the Digital Readout will be based on the newly selected coordinate

system.


202

Settings

The Settings Ribbon Group contains a set of tools to configure your hardware settings.

Connection

Sets the scanner and the localizer to be used for the scan

This tool enables you to choose the localiser and the scanner to be used in the

measurements. If no localiser and scanner have been previously specified then this

operation will be scheduled as soon as the Handheld Measurement task is selected.

Scanners and Localizers must have been configured using the Hardware Configuration

tool.

The Connection dialog

Localizer

A list of currently configured localizers.

Scanner

A list of currently configured Scanners.

[OK]

Selects the Localizer and Scanner and starts the connection process.

Hardware Configuration

Configures the Scanner, the Localizer and performs a Qualification procedure

This tool schedules the Hardware Configuration dialog.

All aspects of configuring hardware for handheld scanning operations are described in the

HandHeld API manual.


203

Processing Settings

Sets the mesh processing parameters

Measured point clouds are automatically converted to a mesh at the end of the scanning

process. The default processing parameters are designed to obtain an optimum mesh. This

tool enables you to set the filtering level to be used in the mesh generation process and to

disable it if necessary.

The automatically generated mesh replaces the point clouds and appears in the Measured panel in


The Processing Settings dialog


204

Fuse scan when finished

When this option is checked, all point clouds will be automatically and optimally

processed to obtain a single mesh at the end of the scanning process. The point clouds are

removed.

If you wish to perform all the processing yourself using the tools in the Filter/Mesh

Ribbon Group in the Measured task then you should uncheck this option.

Keep original patches

When this option is checked the original point cloud patches will be retained when the

single mesh is created.

Filter

When the Automatic option is checked then the level of filtering will be determined

automatically. If you wish to apply more or less filtering, uncheck this option then set the

required level using the slider below.

Measured task

The Measured task is primarily used for preparing the measured data for alignment and

comparison.

The Preparation of Measured data include:

Importing the Measured datasets and managing their membership in the scene.

Manipulating the Measured dataset by merging, splitting and cleaning up point clouds or

meshes as well as removing unwanted areas (such as clamping handles or the scanning

bed for example).

Creating, filtering and managing meshes.

Using Feature Fitting tools to detector fit a variety of shaped features (such as circles,

planes slots) as well as other objects such as edge, borders and intersections. These can be

used for feature-based comparison with measured models.

Detected measured features can also be renamed to match corresponding ones in the

nominal model and have their dimensions determined.

Modifying the Measured model objects by scaling, smoothing and reversing the normals

as well as selecting, duplicating and offsetting the model.


205

Creating sections and adding them to a rail.

Some advanced tools enable you to refine, remove, add quick shading and determine the

volume of a mesh. In addition model objects can be mirrored and a golden template

determined.

The Measured task includes the following Ribbon Groups:

o Import Measured

o Cut / Merge

o Filter / Mesh

o Feature fitting

o Modify Measured

o Sections : all the tools in this ribbon group are described in the Solid Workflow.

o Advanced

Import Measured

The Import Measured Ribbon Group contains commands to import the Measured data and

to add measured objects to the data set.

Import

Imports a point cloud / mesh

This tool imports a new point cloud or a mesh from a variety of file types and places the

object in the measured section of the Inspection data tree.


206

The Import dialog

Files of type

You can import files of the following types:

Delimited ASCII: any ASCII file where the X, Y and Z values are separated by a

delimiting character ISO: a file with ISO codes (such as G00, G01, ...)

STL: an ASCII or binary STL (stereo lithography) file

IGES: points in an IGES file

RIS: a Range Image Standard file.

Hyscan: a Hyscan measurement file.

Metris Base file (mbf-format).

Kube files (sab2 format)

Metris Focus files (*.mfi)

The options available depend on the type of file being imported.

Import as a single point cloud

You can import several files at the same time. All files you select must be of the same

type. If you check the Import as a single point cloud checkbox, a single point cloud will


207

be created from the selected files. If you leave this checkbox unchecked, each file will be

imported as a separate point cloud.

Import as Feature points

This option allows you to import cloud points directly as features.

Use prefilter 1 out of

During import you can filter the point cloud by checking the Use prefilter 1 out of

checkbox. Enter the Prefilter step in the Prefilter’s edit box. Only one out of Prefilter step

points of the point cloud(s) in the file will be visible in static display.

Note: If you use a prefilter when importing a STL file, the mesh will be discarded.

Merge all point clouds

If the Merge all point clouds option is checked ON, all the selected point clouds are

merged into one point cloud and only one object is added into the Measured tree. If

Merge all point clouds option is checked OFF, all the point clouds are imported one by

one, and a separate object is created for each point cloud in the Measured tree.

When the importation is started, ISO, STL, IGES, RIS Hyscan, Metris Base and Kube files are

directly imported. For Delimited ASCII files, the Import Delimited ASCII dialog appears. This

dialog has three tabs that must be stepped through in order to complete the importation.

The General tab

The General tab shows a preview of your file. Each line in the preview is preceded between

brackets by its line number in the file. By default the preview only shows you the beginning

and end of the file. If you press the Show full preview button, the preview will expand to

show the whole file.

Note that it may take some time to view a large file.

You can also set the following options in the General tab:

Skip first lines

Inspection will not read the first lines in the file (for example the file header)

Skip last lines

Skip last lines: Inspection will not read the last lines in the file (for example the file

footer)


208

The Delimiters tab

The columns for the X, Y and Z values in a delimited ASCII file are separated by one or

more delimiting characters.

Delimiters

Selection of delimiters indicating the columns in the file.

The Treat consecutive delimiters as one

This checkbox, allows you to collapse consecutive delimiters into one.

Data preview

View if the contents of the file, with columns separated by ‘|’ characters.

The Columns tab

The Columns tab allows you to set what columns in your file will be used for the X, Y and Z

coordinates. For each coordinate you can choose to read it from a column in the file, or to

keep it fixed at a certain value.

To import a point cloud / mesh

1. Click the Import Point cloud tool to open the Import dialog box.

2. Select the File Type in the drop down box at the bottom of the dialog.

3. Select one or more files and click the [Open] button.

4. If the Import delimited ASCII dialog box pops up, modify the parameters under General,

Delimiters or Columns tabs if needed and click the OK button when done.

The point cloud(s)/ meshes are imported and automatically placed under the "Data" node of the

Measured section of the Inspection tree.


209

Add to Measured

Adds a selected object to the measured data

This tool adds an object (point cloud, mesh or feature ) to the Measured section of the

Inspection Tree. This tool is only active when an object (Point cloud / mesh / feature) is

ready to be added to the Measured section and has been selected. Since Focus

automatically adds the object to the Data node of in the Measured section of the tree, the

tool is typically grayed out after import.

Note: This operation can only be applied to "'Operable objects". These can be modified by

selecting the Configure Workflow option from the Workflow menu.

To add objects to the Measured section of the Inspection tree

1. Click the Mixed Object Select tool.

2. Click on the point cloud(s)/mesh(s) or features to be added to the Measured section of the

Inspection tree.

3. Click on the Add to Measured too.

The object will be added to the "Data" node in the Measured section of the Inspection tree.

Cut/Merge

The Cut / Merge Ribbon Group contains commands to cut and merge point cloud data.

Merge

Merge point clouds/meshes into a single object

The Merge tool merges a number of point clouds or meshes into a single object.

To merge point clouds or meshes

1. Select multiple point clouds or meshes either in the scene or the Inspection tree

2. Click the Merge tool.

The point clouds/mesh(s) are merged into one.

Subtract

Subtracts a selected cloud or mesh from a reference to remove overlap errors

This tool corrects small overlap errors that can occur when objects have been scanned

from multiple angles. These overlap errors become visible when point clouds are merged


210

and meshed. It allows you to subtract a pointcloud / mesh from a reference pointcloud, or it

allows you to subtract meshes from a solid.

The Subtract property sheet

Pointcloud/Mesh

When this button is checked, the tool will subtract a pointcloud or mesh from a reference

pointcloud/mesh.

Select Reference

Click this button to define the point cloud/mesh that is currently selected as the reference.

If a point cloud / mesh was selected before the tool is activated, this is taken to be the

reference.

Select to Subtract

Click this button to define the point cloud/mesh that is currently selected as the point

cloud/ mesh to subtract from the reference.

Subtract distance

Enter a value to be used as the distance to determine the overlap area.

Blend

If this option is selected, the points that lie within the user defined overlap area are moved

together gradually, masking a potential step remaining between the point clouds/meshes.

Solid

When this button is checked, the tool allows you to keep parts of a mesh that are close to

Solid faces, and have a local normal direction that is within a user defined angle

tolerance. All parts of the mesh that satisfy both conditions will be retained. All parts of

the mesh that are outside these parameters will be subtracted.

Subtract distance

Enter the value used to define the overlap or proximity distance between the solid face

and the mesh.

Subtract distance

Enter the value used to define the angular deviation between the local normal directions.


211

Remove small areas

When this option is checked, then isolated areas that match the above criteria but which

are smaller than the value defined below will be removed.

Minimum area size

This value determines the area size that will be removed when the Remove small areas

option is used.

Subtract

Click this button to start the subtraction process. After the subtraction, the subtracted item

is indicated as such in the Inspection tree.

To subtract a cloud from a reference pointcloud

1. Click on the small arrow next to the Subtract tool.

2. Check the button next to Pointcloud/Mesh.

3. Select the point cloud/mesh to be used as the reference either in the scene or the tree.

4. Click on the [Select Reference] button. This will adapt to indicate that one has been

selected.

5. Select the point cloud/mesh to be subtracted in either the scene or the Inspection tree.

6. Click on the [Select to Subtract] button. This will adapt to indicate that one has been

selected.

7. Enter a value for the Subtract distance to define the overlap.

8. Check the Blend option if you want to blend the points in the overlap area, to remove a

distinct step between the two clouds.

9. Click [Subtract].

The subtracted pointcloud/mesh will appear in the Measured section of the Inspection tree with

the suffix _Subtracted added to its name.

To subtract a mesh from a reference solid

This procedure requires that you have a solid and a mesh available. The solid must be visible in

the scene (in the Nominal task).

1. Click on the small arrow next to the Subtract tool.

2. Check the button next to Solid.

3. Select the solid to be used as the reference in the tree.

4. Click on the [Select Reference Solid from Tree] button. This will adapt to indicate that

one has been selected.

5. Select the mesh to be subtracted in either the scene or the Inspection tree.

6. Click on the [Select Meshes to Subtract] button. This will adapt to indicate that one has

been selected.

If no mesh is selected, the subtraction will be performed on all the meshes in the

Inspection tree.


212

7. Enter a value for the Subtract distance to define the proximity distance between the solid

and the mesh.

8. Enter a value for the Subtract angle to define the angular tolerance between the normals

of the solid and the mesh.

9. If you wish to remove small areas that match the above criteria check the Remove small

areas button and then enter a value for the minimum area to be defined as "small".

10. Click [Subtract].

The subtracted mesh will appear in the Measured section of the Inspection tree with the suffix

_Subtracted added to its name.

To use the Subtract tool without opening the property sheet

1. Select the object to be used as the reference in the tree.


3. If you wish to subtract a specific object in the tree, select it.

4. Click the MMB.

The (selected) object will be subtracted from the reference according to the settings in the

property sheet. If no pre-selected object is available, all pointclouds or meshes in the tree will be

subtracted.

Separate

Separates selected areas of point clouds, meshes, compare objects and borders into distinct objects

The Separate tool is used to create separate point cloud (s) or mesh(s) from a single

original object. This tool can operate on point clouds, meshes, 3D compare objects and

borders.

Separate property sheet

Visible Parts

When checked ON, only those points that are visible in the scene will be selected. Points

or mesh parts that are behind the plane in of the scene will not be selected.

When this option is checked OFF, then all points / meshes that lie in the direct line into

the scene will be selected.


213

Keep copy of original

When checked ON, the parent object is retained. The results of the command are put into

a new object.

Extra Points

When checked ON, extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the

line defined by the lasso. In the case of a mesh additional triangles will be generated in

order to create a straight cut edge. This is illustrated in the figure below.

Cut effect with and without extra points

Plane

When this option is selected then the separation will be made along a specified plane.

Method

You can select the required plane from the drop down menu.

Value

This displays the value of the currently selected position of the plane. The value can be

entered manually or by clicking an object in the scene.

Direction

This determines whether the part that extends in the positive or negative direction will be

highlighted and termed the inner part.

To separate a pointcloud or mesh with a lasso

This method allows you to manually select the part of the point cloud or mesh.

1. Click on the arrow next to the Separate point clouds/meshes tool to open the property

sheet.

2. Check the Visible Parts option if required.

3. Check the Keep copy of original option if required.(The original can always be deleted

afterwards if necessary.)


214

4. Check the Extra Points option if required.

5. Make sure that the Plane option is OFF.

6. In the scene create a lasso to define the area to be kept, clicking with the MMB to end the

definition.

7. The selected part will be highlighted in red.

To change the selection make a new lasso and click once again with the MMB.

8. When the selected portion is as required, click with the MMB again to execute the cut

operation, or click on the Separate point clouds/meshes icon in the property sheet.

Two new objects will appear in the Measured panel of the inspection tree. The highlighted

section will be termed the "_Inner" part.

To separate a part of pointcloud or mesh relative to the coordinate system

1. Click on the arrow next to the Separate point clouds/meshes tool to open the property

sheet.


3. Check the Keep copy of original option if required. (The original can always be deleted



5. Make sure that the Plane option is ON.

6. Choose the plane to be used as the cutting plane.

7. Click with the LMB in the scene to determine the required position of the plane.

8. Click the MMB.

One part that will be separated will be highlighted in red.

9. To change the position click with the LMB again and then with the MMB.


operation, or click on the Separate point clouds/meshes icon in the property sheet.

Two new objects will appear in the Measured panel of the inspection. The part that extended in

the positive direction will be termed the "_Inner" part.

Note: To view the lasso selection for the recorded script, click on the Cut command in the

Automation window.

Keep Selected

Retains a selected part of a point cloud or mesh

The Keep Selected tool is used to isolate a selected region of point cloud(s) or mesh(s) by

deleting the rest of the point cloud(s) or mesh(s). This tool is the complement of the Delete

Selected tool. This tool can operate on point clouds, meshes, 3D compare objects and

borders.


215

Keep Selected property sheet

Visible parts






When checked ON, the original point cloud or mesh is retained and the kept part of the

point cloud or mesh will appear as a new object in the Inspection tree.

Extra points

When checked ON extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the line

defined by the lasso. In the case of a mesh additional triangles will be generated in order

to create a straight cut edge. This is illustrated in the figure below.

Keep cut effect with and without extra points

Plane

When this option is selected then the cut will be made along a specified plane.

Method


Value




216

Direction


kept.

To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be kept with a lasso

This method manually selects the part of the point cloud or mesh relative to the screen.

1. Click on the arrow next to the Keep Selected tool to open the property sheet.






6. In the scene create a lasso to define the area to be kept, clicking with the MMB to end the

definition.

7. The part to be kept will be highlighted in red.



operation, or click on the Keep Selected icon in the property sheet.

The kept selection of the point cloud or mesh will appear as a new entry in the Inspection tree.

To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be kept relative to the coordinate system

1. Click on the arrow next to the Keep Selected tool to open the property sheet.





5. Make sure that the Plane option is ON.


7. Click with the LMB in the scene to determine the required position of the plane.

8. Click the MMB.

The part to be kept will be highlighted in red.


10. To change the side that is to be kept, switch the Direction parameter.


operation, or click on the Keep Selected icon in the property sheet.


Automation window.


217

Delete Selected

Deletes selected regions of a point cloud or mesh

The Delete Selected tool is used to delete the selected region, maintaining the non-selected

regions. This tool is the complement of the Keep Selected tool. This tool can operate on

point clouds, meshes, 3D compare objects and borders.

Delete Selected property sheet

Visible Parts






When checked ON, the original point cloud or mesh is kept unchanged; the result of the

command appears as a new object.

Extra points

When checked ON extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the line

defined by the lasso. In the case of a mesh additional triangles will be generated in order

to create a straight cut edge. This is illustrated in the figure below.

Delete effect with and without extra points

Plane

When this option is selected then the cut will be made along a specified plane.


218

Method


Value



Direction


deleted.

To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be deleted with a lasso

This method manually selects the part of the point cloud or mesh relative to the screen.

1. Click on the arrow next to the Delete Selected tool to open the property sheet.






6. In the scene create a lasso to define the area to be deleted, clicking with the MMB to end

the definition.

7. The part to be deleted will be highlighted in red.



operation, or click on the Delete Selected icon in the property sheet.

The deleted selection of the point cloud or mesh will appear as a new entry in the Inspection tree.

To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be deleted relative to the coordinate system

1. Click on the arrow next to the Delete Selected tool to open the property sheet.





5. Make sure that thePlane option is ON.


7. Click with the LMB in the scene to determine the required position on the axis or of the

plane.

8. Click the MMB.

The part to be deleted will be highlighted in red.


10. To change the side that is to be deleted, switch the Direction parameter.


219


operation, or click on the Delete Selected icon in the property sheet.


Automation window.

Filter/Mesh

The Filter / Mesh Ribbon Group contains commands to filter and triangulate the measured

cloud/mesh data.

Note that the Refine mesh tool has been moved to Advanced ribbon group.

Fuse

Fuses multiple clouds or meshes

This tool fuses multiple point clouds and produces a single mesh. This tool provides a

convenient means of performing a number of Filter /Mesh operations into a single efficient

method of creating an optimal mesh from a number of point clouds.

The Fuse Clouds and Meshes property sheet

Selection

The number of point clouds / meshes selected to be fused together.


220

Keep original

Check this option to keep a copy of the original point clouds or meshes after the Fuse

operation.

Localizer type

Select the type of localizer that was used to create the point clouds.

Scanner type

Select the type of scanner that was used to create the point clouds.

Filtering

Automatic

When this option is checked ON, Focus determines the optimum filtering level to be

applied when creating the mesh.

When this option is checked OFF you can set the level of filtering required. If small holes

are being lost for example, you can set the filtering level to be Less by moving the slider.

If you wish to adapt the filtering you should make sure that the original point clouds are

kept.

To fuse multiple point clouds or meshes

1. Select the point clouds to be fused.

2. To create an optimal single mesh simply click on the Fuse tool.

3. To adapt the Fuse process, click on the arrow to open the property sheet.

Check the Keep original button on,

Click [OK].

If the filtering is not exactly as required, uncheck the Automatic option and adjust the

filtering level.

Reselect the point clouds and repeat the process.

To apply specific conditions to the mesh generation process, use the separate tools in the Filter /

Mesh ribbon group.

Filter

Filters a point cloud using the scatter, grid and/or curvature filter

The Filter Point Cloud tool decimates the points in a point cloud using scatter, grid or

curvature filters.


221

The Filter point cloud dialog

Scatter

The scatter filter is the first filter that can be used when working on a point cloud that

contains scatter points. The scatter filter uses the Radius and # of Points parameters.

Note: The scatter filter is a good tool to remove the scattered, island points.

Radius

The scatter filter will remove those points that have less than a specified number of points

in their surrounding sphere with a radius set by the Radius parameter.

# of Points

The scatter filter will remove those points that have less than this number of points in

their surrounding sphere with a radius set by the Radius parameter.

Grid

The grid filter will construct a set of cubes in space. The filter keeps one point in each

cube. So, the bigger the size of the cubes, the more points will be filtered out. The result

of this filter is a point cloud with a homogeneous point density. The size of the cube is set

by the Distance parameter.

Note: The grid filter is a good tool to use to obtain a uniformly distributed point cloud.

Distance

The Distance parameter specifies the length of the cubes used by the grid filter. A

distance of 1 drawing unit yields cubes of 1 x 1 x 1 drawing units in size.


222

Curvature

The Curvature filter is the smartest of all the filters. The Curvature filter will filter out

many points in the flat areas and will keep many points in areas with high curvature. In

order to do this, the curvature filter classifies the points into several curvature classes

using following parameters. On every curvature class, a grid filter is applied.

Contrast

The Contrast parameter defines how the points are classified. A contrast of 0 filters all

points with the Max. Grid parameter. A contrast of 50 filters points in the class with

medium curvature with the average of the Min. and Max. Grid parameter. A higher

contrast will tend to filter more point classes with small grid parameter.

Max Grid

The class with the lowest curvature is filtered with the Max. Grid parameter.

Min Grid

The class with the highest curvature is filtered with the Min. grid parameter.

Smallest Detail

The highest curvature to take into account is determined by the Smallest Detail parameter.

If this parameter is set 0, the smallest detail will be determined automatically. Otherwise,

this parameter represents the size of the smallest detail in your drawing. You can click the

Suggest button and request the application to suggest the right value to be used as the

smallest detail to compute the curvature. You can set this parameter to be larger than the

noisy areas in your drawing so as to discard noise from the point cloud.

Hide Quick Shading

The Hide Quick Shading check box can be checked ON to hide the quick shading and

checked OFF to retain the quick shading.

Anti-Aliasing

The Anti-Aliasing check box can be checked ON to avoid filter artifacts.

[Filter]

Filter the point cloud according to the defined parameters.

[Undo]

Undoes the last filter operation.

Points

Provides a summary of the filter operation.

[Apply]

Applies the filter and closes the dialog.

[Close]

Closes the dialog without applying the filter.

To filter a point cloud

1. Select the point cloud to be filtered.


223

2. Click the Filter Point Cloud tool.

3. Choose the preferred method of filtering.

4. Set the appropriate parameters.

5. Click [Filter].

6. Apply other filters if necessary.

7. Click [Apply] to accept the filtered point cloud.

Optimize

Optimizes a point cloud

The Optimize tool optimizes the quality of a point cloud or mesh by removing noise from

the measurement data.

To Optimize a Mesh

1. Select a point cloud or mesh.

2. Click the Optimize tool.

Mesh

Triangulates a point cloud to a mesh

The Mesh Point cloud command triangulates point cloud(s), to create a new mesh object.

Mesh point cloud property sheet

Max Edge Length

Triangles with an edge larger than this value will be removed to avoid that the mesh will

close holes. If the Max Edge Length parameter has a zero value, no triangles will be

removed.

To mesh a point cloud

1. Select one or more point clouds.

2. Click on the arrow next to the Mesh tool to open the property sheet.

3. Enter the Max Edge Length value.

4. Click the Mesh Point cloud icon to create the mesh

The mesh will appear in the Inspection tree.


224

Remove mesh

Converts a mesh to point cloud

The Remove Mesh command removes the faces of a mesh. As a result, a new point cloud

object is created.

To Remove a mesh

1. Select a mesh.

2. Click the Remove mesh tool.

Feature Fitting

Features are geometrical entities, definable in both the Nominal and Measured data. The purpose

of detecting features is to extract the geometrical entities and obtain specific parameters such as a

center point, axis direction, radius etc. for use in alignment, comparison and/or dimension

verification.

Features in the Nominal CAD are well-defined geometries. Detection of these features is easy

because of the clean input.

Features in the measured data are approximated geometries. Their position and parameters are

extracted using a specific algorithm on a point cloud or mesh. In this calculation, the user can fix

some parameters, such as the radius of a circle to get a different approximation of its center.

Because of the above fundamental differences between nominal and measured feature detections,

different methods are used:

Mesh : features are detected from vertices within a given tolerance, starting from user-

specified vertices.

Point cloud : features are detected from points within a given tolerance, starting from

user-specified points.

Feature fitting is supported for:

Point clouds

Meshes

Borders

Focus Inspection offers several feature fitting tools. All these feature-fitting tools support the

rapid MMB option to fit the selected feature.

Detect/Fit Feature

Opens up the Feature Detection panel in which you can select the feature(s) to be fitted.

This tool opens the feature detection panel in which you can select the type of feature to be

detected and set the parameters to detect it. Certain features (circles, slots and points) can


225

be detected either from existing nominal features or by manual selection of the start

points. Some of the options in this panel may be insensitive due to the context in which you

are working.

Method

The fields in this panel determine whether features will be detected manually from start

points, or from existing nominal features.

Detect from Nominal

When this option is selected, measured features that correspond to existing nominal

features will be searched for. This method can only be used to detect certain features

(circles, points, surface points, points created using the Combi Hem/Profile/Edge tool or

slots)

Detection offset

The value entered in this field determines the 'offset' that will be used to detect points that

can be included in the feature.

Verify start points

The Nominal Circle/Slot features automatically generate start points using the Detection

offset value. These start points are used to detect the Measured features. Checking this

option enables a verification of the generated start points: only start points that are in a

plane will be used.

All Nominal

When this button is checked, measured features based on all the nominal features of the

applicable type will be searched for.

Manually selected from tree

When this button is checked, measured features based on selected nominal features of the

applicable type will be searched for.

Detect from manually clicked start points

When this option is selected, all types of measured features can be detected.

To detect measured features from nominal features

Before starting this procedure, nominal features (circles, points, surface points, points created

using the Combi Hem/Profile/Edge tool or slots) must have been defined on the nominal model

and be available in the Inspection tree.

1. Click on the Feature fitting tool.

2. Click the option Detect from Nominal.

3. Enter a Detection offset value.

4. Check the Verify start points option if required.

5. To search for measured features that correspond to all nominal features check the "All

Nominal" option.

6. To search for measured features based on particular nominal features check the

"Manually detected from tree" option, then select the required nominal features in the

tree.


226

7. Click [Detect] button at the bottom of the Feature Detection panel.

The feature detection process will begin. The message line will indicate the total number of

nominal features involved, the number of corresponding measured features that were detected

and the number that were not (failed). Those features that were detected will appear in the

Measured panel in the Inspection tree.

To detect measured features by manual selection of start points.

1. Click on the Feature fitting tool.

2. Click the option "Detect from manually clicked start points".

3. Click on the required feature tool. The fields in the panel will be adjusted as required.

4. Follow the instructions given on the corresponding page.

Create Measured Feature Point

Creates a feature point at a specified location

The Create Measured Feature Point tool creates a feature point at the given coordinates.



227

Feature Name

This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name

contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.

Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the Auto Rename

Features tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the measured feature point.

[Create]

This button creates the point with the defined name at the specified position.

[Undo]



insensitive.


228

[Close]


To create a measured feature point

1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.

2. Click the Create Measured Feature Point tool.

3. Enter a name for the feature if required.

4. There are two means to define the position of the feature point:

EITHER

Click with the LMB in the scene where you want to create the feature point.

OR

Enter the required XYZ coordinates in the corresponding fields in the panel.

5. To create the point

EITHER


OR

Click [Create] in the definition panel.

6. Click [Close] when all the required features have been defined.

The feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.

Note: Measured feature points can be created even there is no model available.

Detect /Fit Measured Line

Detects or creates a Line feature.

This tool fits a straight line to the selected points in the data, or creates a line according to




229

Feature Name





Statistics

The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit

on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.

It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds

the statistics object under the detected feature.

It is recommended that you keep this option ON.

Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation

Detect

When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.


230

Theoretical mesh

When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.

Fit

When this option is checked, then some or all of the feature characteristics can be defined

in the fields below.

Fixed Length

When this option is checked, the line feature will have a specified length. This length is


Fixed Center

When this option is checked, the center of the line will be set in a specified location.

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the center of the line.

Fixed Direction

When this option is checked, the direction of the line will be defined by a specified

vector.

I, J, K

The components of the vector defining the direction of the line.

[Detect]

This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model. If

any characteristics have been defined they will be fitted to the feature.

[Create]

This button appears when the all the characteristics of the line have been defined in the

panel, i.e. the length, the center point and the direction. It will create a line feature with


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a line feature


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Line tool.



4. Enter a name for the new feature if required.

5. Enter a value for some of the line characteristics if required.

6. Select one or more points in the model using the chosen tool.


231

7. To detect the line feature:

EITHER


OR


The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.

To create a line feature


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Line tool.


4. Check the Fit button ON.

5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the line, i.e. its length, center point and direction.

6. Click [Create]


Detect / Fit Measured Circle

Detects or creates a measured circle feature.

This tool fits a circle to the selected points in the data, or allows you to create a circle

based on specified characteristics.

Note that this type of feature can also be detected directly from a corresponding nominal feature.



232

Feature Name





Statistics







Plane

This option is only available when the Statistics option is checked ON. It provides

additional statistical information on the


233

Detect


Theoretical mesh


Tolerance

The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the

user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the

tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.

Depth

Since features are determined in a plane, the depth determines the length of the rays of the

projection of each point to this plane. The image below shows the difference between a

low and high Depth parameter indicated in red.

Fit



Fixed Radius

When this option is checked, the circle feature will have a specified radius. This radius is


Fixed Center

When this option is checked, the center of the circle will be set in a specified position.

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the center of the circle.

Fixed Direction

When this option is checked, the axis of the circle will be defined by a specified vector.

I, J, K

The components of the vector defining the direction of the circle.

[Detect]




234

[Create]

This button appears when the all the characteristics of the circle have been defined in the

panel, i.e. the radius, the center point and the direction. It will create a circle feature with


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a circle feature


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Circle tool.

3. Enter a name for the new feature if required

4. If you want to detect the circle entirely from the measured model, then click the Detect

option ON.

Then enter a value for the tolerance and any other parameters if required.

5. If you wish to detect a circle on the model that has some defined characteristics, then

click the Fit option ON.

Then enter a value for some of the circle characteristics.



7. Select the required points in the model using the chosen tool.

8. To detect the circle feature:

EITHER


OR


The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the Inspection tree.

To create a circle feature


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Circle tool.


4. Check the Fit option ON.

5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the circle, i.e. its radius, center point and

direction.

6. Click [Create]



235

Detect Measured Round Slot

Detects a Round Slot feature.

The Detect Measured Round Slot tool fits a round slot to the selected points in the

Measured data.



Feature Name






236

Statistics







Plane



Detect


Theoretical mesh


Tolerance




Depth


projection of each point to this plane.

The figure below shows the difference between a low and high Depth parameter indicated

in red.

Slot Type

The Slot Type parameter specifies at which ends the slot will be truly round. The choices

are between :

Both Ends: Fits a complete round slot to the selected points.

First End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the first end.

Second End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the second end.


237

[Detect]

This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a round slot feature


2. Click on the Detect Measured Round Slot tool.




5. Select the points in the model using the chosen tool.

6. To detect the round slot feature:

EITHER


OR



Detect Measured Rectangular Slot

Detects a Rectangular Slot feature.

This tool fits a Rectangular Slot to the selected points in the data.

Note that this type of feature can also be detected directly from a corresponding nominal

feature.



238

Feature Name





Statistics







Plane




239

Detect


Theoretical mesh


Tolerance




Depth




in red.

[Detect]


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a rectangular slot feature


2. Click on the Detect Measured Rectangular Slot tool.




5. Select the points in the model using the chosen tool.


240

6. To detect the rectangular slot feature:

EITHER


OR



Detect Measured Key Slot

Detects a Key Slot feature

The Detect Measured Key Slot tool fits a key slot to the selected points in the data. A key

slot has two component holes, a small one and a big one, which are used as the base for

key slot construction.



241

Feature Name





Statistics








242

Plane



Detect


Theoretical mesh


Tolerance




Depth




in red.

Slot

The Slot parameter defines the key slot shape. Two options are available:

Straight: The resulting key slot has a smaller circular hole component that is extended to

the bigger circular hole component as shown below.

Tangent: The resulting key slot has a smaller circular hole component that is

progressively enlarged to the bigger circular hole component as shown below.


243

[Detect]


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a key slot feature


2. Click on the Detect Measured Key Slot tool.


4. Define the tolerance and the type of slot.




7. To detect the key slot feature:

EITHER


OR



Detect Measured Hexagon Slot

Detects a Hexagonal Slot feature

The Detect Measured Hexagonal Slot tool fits a hexagonal slot to the measured model.




244

Feature Name





Statistics







Plane




245

Detect


Theoretical mesh


Tolerance




Depth




in red.

[Detect]


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a hexagon slot feature


2. Click on the Detect Measured Hexagon tool.






246

6. To detect the hexagon slot feature:

EITHER


OR



Detect / Fit Measured Plane

Detects or creates a plane feature.

This tool fits a plane to the selected points in the data, or allows you to create a plane

based on specified parameters.



247

Feature Name





Statistics







Detect


Theoretical mesh


Tolerance




Fit



Fixed Size

When this option is checked, the each side of the plane feature will have a specified

length. This length is specified in the input field.

Fixed Center

When this option is checked, the center of the plane will be set in a specified position.

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the center of the plane.

Fixed Direction

When this option is checked, the normal of the plane will be defined by a specified

vector.

I, J, K

The components of the vector defining the direction of the normal to the plane.

[Detect]




248

[Create]

This button appears when the all the characteristics of the plane have been defined in the

panel, i.e. the size, the center point and the direction. It will create a plane feature with


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect plane feature


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Plane tool.


4. If you want to detect the plane entirely from the measured model, then click the Detect

option ON.


5. If you wish to detect a plane on the model that has some defined characteristics, then


Then enter a value for some of the plane characteristics.




8. To detect the plane feature:

EITHER


OR



To create a plane feature


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Plane tool.



5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the plane, i.e. its size, center point and direction.

6. Click [Create].



249

Detect/Fit Measured Cylinder

Detects or creates a Cylinder feature

This tool detects or fits a cylinder to the selected points in the data or creates a cylinder

according to defined parameters.


Feature Name






250

Statistics







Detect


Theoretical mesh


Tolerance




Fixed Radius

When this option is checked, the cylinder feature will have a specified radius. This radius

is specified in the input field.

Fixed Radius

When this option is checked, the cylinder feature will have a specified height. This radius

is specified in the input field

Fixed Center

When this option is checked, the center of the cylinder will be set in a specified position.

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the center of the cylinder.

Fixed Direction

When this option is checked, the axis of the cylinder will be defined by a specified vector.

I, J, K

The components of the vector defining the direction of the line.

[Detect]



[Create]

This button appears when the all the characteristics of the cylinder have been defined in

the panel, i.e. the radius, the height, the center point and the direction. It will create a

cylinder feature with these characteristics.


251

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a cylinder feature


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Cylinder tool.


4. If you want to detect the cylinder entirely from the measured model, click the Detect

option ON.


5. If you wish to detect a cylinder on the model that has some defined characteristics, then


Then enter a value for some of the cylinder characteristics.




8. To detect the cylinder feature:

EITHER


OR



To create a cylinder feature


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Cylinder tool.



5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the cylinder, i.e. its radius, height, center point

and direction.

6. Click [Create].



252

Detect / Fit Measured Sphere

Detects or creates a sphere feature.

This tool fits a sphere to the selected points in the Measured data, or creates a sphere

based on defined parameters.


Feature Name






253

Statistics







Detect


Theoretical mesh


Tolerance




Fit



Fixed Radius

When this option is checked, the radius of the sphere feature will have a specified length.

This length is specified in the input field.

Fixed Center

When this option is checked, the center of the sphere will be set in a specified position.

X, Y, Z

The coordinates of the center of the sphere.

[Detect]



[Create]

This button appears when the all the characteristics of the sphere have been defined in the

panel, i.e. the radius and the center point. It will create a sphere feature with these

characteristics.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]



254

To detect sphere feature


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Sphere tool.


4. If you want to detect the sphere entirely from the measured model, then click the Detect

option ON.


5. If you wish to detect a plane on the model that has some defined characteristics, then


Then enter a value for some of the sphere characteristics.




8. To detect the sphere feature:

EITHER


OR



To create a sphere feature


2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Sphere tool.



5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the sphere, i.e. its radius and center point.

6. Click [Create].


Detect / Fit Measured Cone

Detects or creates a cone feature on existing objects

This tool fits a cone frustum to the selected points in the data.



255

Feature Name



Statistics







Detect

When this option is checked, the feature will be detected based on the starting points

defined on an existing selected object.


256

Theoretical mesh


Tolerance




Fit

When this option is checked, the feature will be fitted through the selected points / faces

[Detect]

This button will detect or fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the

model.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a cone feature


2. Click on the Detect Measured Cone tool.


4. Click the Detect radio button and adjust the tolerance if required.

5. Select the starting points in the model on which the cone will be detected.

6. To detect the cone feature:

EITHER


OR


Feature detection will be attempted and the new feature will appear in the Features section of the

Measured panel in the inspection tree.

To fit a cone feature


2. Click on the Detect Measured Cone tool.


4. Click the Fit radio button.




257

The Pick select option selects complete objects. The Lasso option can be used to select

specific regions. Click with the MMB to confirm the lasso selection.

6. Click on the [Detect] button.

A cone will be fitted to the defined area.

Create Measured Point cloud/Mesh-Area

Creates a Point cloud / Mesh-area feature

This tool duplicates and converts a set of polygon lasso selected points into a feature

object.


Feature Name


contains the prefix Meas_, and indication of the feature type and a number.


258

[Detect]

This button will fit the detect the area once it has been defined on the model.

[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To create a point cloud feature


2. Click the Create Measured Point cloud/Mesh-Area tool.

3. Enter a name for the feature if required.

4. Click with the Lasso tool to define the required area on the model.

5. To create the area

EITHER


OR

Click [ Detect] in the definition panel.

The area will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.

Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin

Detects a measured cylindrical pin

This tool enables you to detect a measured cylindrical pin. A cylindrical pin is defined by a

cylinder of specific height, and radius on a base.



259

Feature Name



Statistics







Detect



260

Tolerance




[Detect]


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a Measured Cylindrical Pin


2. Click on the Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin tool.




5. Select three points on the base of the cylindrical pin, then three points on the contour of

the pin.

6. To detect the feature:

EITHER


OR


The feature detection process will begin. If the feature could not be detected, this will be

indicated in the message line at the bottom of the user interface. If the feature detection was

successful, the feature with the defined name will appear in the Features section of Measured

data tree. A shape representing the detected feature will be drawn on the point cloud.

Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin with Cone Guiding

Detects a measured cylindrical pin with conical guiding

This tool enables you to detect a measured cylindrical pin with conical guiding. A

cylindrical pin is defined by a cylinder of specific height, and radius on a base, with a

chamfered edge.



261

Feature Name



Statistics







Detect



262

Tolerance




[Detect]


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a measured cylindrical pin with conical guide


2. Click on the Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin with Cone Guiding tool.




5. Select three points on the base of the cylindrical pin, then three points on the contour of

the pin.


EITHER


OR






Detect Measured Diamond Pin

Detects a measured diamond pin

This tool enables you to detect a measured diamond pin. A diamond pin is defined by a pin

of specific height, with a cross shaped section.



263

Feature Name



Statistics







Detect



264

Tolerance




[Detect]


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a measured diamond pin


2. Click on the Detect Measured Diamond Pin tool.




5. Select three points on the base of the diamond pin, then three points on the contour of the

pin.


EITHER


OR






Detect Measured T-Stud

Detects a measured T stud

This tool enables you to detect a measured T-stud. A T-stud is defined by a cylindrical pin

with a larger radius head on a base.



265

Feature Name



Statistics







Detect



266

Tolerance




[Detect]


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a measured T-Stud


2. Click on the Detect Measured T-Stud tool.




5. Select three points on the base of the stud, then three points on the upper surface of the T-

stud.


EITHER


OR






Detect Measured Welded Bolt

Detects a measured welded bolt

This tool enables you to detect a measured welded bolt. A welded bolt is defined by a

threaded pin on a base.



267

Feature Name



Statistics







Detect



268

Tolerance




[Detect]


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a measured welded bolt


2. Click on the Detect Measured Welded Bolt tool.




5. Select three points on the base of the stud, then three points on the threaded contour of the

bolt.


EITHER


OR






Detect Measured Christmas Tree

Detects a measured Christmas tree

This tool enables you to detect a measured Christmas tree. A Christmas tree something you

hang decorations on but is also defined by a threaded stud with a pointed end on a base.



269

Feature Name



Statistics







Detect



270

Tolerance




[Detect]


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a measured Christmas tree


2. Click on the Detect Measured Christmas Tree tool.




5. Select three points on the base of the object then three points on the contour.


EITHER


OR






Detect Measured Welded Nut

Detects a measured welded nut

This tool enables you to detect a measured welded nut. A welded nut is defined by a

threaded nut on a base.



271

Feature Name



Statistics







Detect



272

Tolerance




Depth

The depth of the nut.

[Detect]


[Undo]



insensitive.

[Close]


To detect a measured welded nut


2. Click on the Detect Measured Welded Nut tool.




5. Select three points on the base of the welded nut.


EITHER


OR






Intersection

Creates a intersection feature between two existing features

The Intersection tool creates intersection object (point/line) that can be used afterwards for

dimensioning.

Intersections can be made with following objects:

Apparent Intersection Closest intersection

Object Result Object Result


273

2 planes line 2 planes line

1 plane and 1

line

point 1 plane and 1

line

point

2 lines and the

current view

direction

point 1 plane and 1

cylinder

point

2 cylinders

(cylinders

should behave a

lines) and the

current view

direction

point 1 Line and 1

Cylinder

point (closest to

both axes)

1 line and 1

cylinder

point 1 point and 1

line

1 point (middle

between point

and line)

1 point and 1

line

point (closest

distance)

2 Cylinders point (closest to

both axes)

1 plane and 1

cylinder axis

point 2 lines point (closest to

both axes)

These objects must be selected before the tool becomes available.

The Intersection property sheet

[Compute Apparent/Closest Intersection]

This button will generate the feature according to the parameters set.

Apparent

When this option is checked, a feature will be generated if the objects appear to intersect.

Closest

When this option is checked, if the objects do not intersect, then the mid point of the

closest distance between them is defined as the intersection point.

To create an Intersection

1. Click on the Mixed Object Selection tool.

2. Select two valid objects as given in the table. Use the <Ctrl> key to select the second

item.


274

3. Click on the arrow to open the property sheet.

If you click directly on the tool the intersection will be created using the last used

settings.

4. Choose whether to generate an Apparent or a Closest intersection.

5. Click the [Compute Apparent/Closest Intersection] button to generate the required

intersection.

Note: Intersection objects are added to the Inspection tree; in the Nominal panel when both

source objects are nominal, in the Measured panel when any of the objects is measured.

Project Object

Projects features and sections to the XY, YZ or XZ plane at a given location, or a feature plane or a solid/mesh.

This tool can be used as preparation for dimensioning. It allows you to project point

features, line features or sections onto planes or the model.

Project dialog box

[Select to project]

This button updates the field alongside to indicate the number of features or sections that

have been selected to project.

Target

The Target onto which the feature/section will be projected. This can be:

The XY/ YZ/ XZ planes

The plane associated with a feature.

The CAD model, a Point Cloud or a Mesh

Unbounded

When checked ON, the projection will be made to the infinite 3D plane.

Location

The location represents the (3rd) coordinate position for the XY, YZ and XZ plane.


275

Direction

This option only applies when the target is a CAD model, a Point Cloud or a Mesh. It

allows you to select the direction in which the projection towards the target will be made.

When only 1 direction is checked, the projection is in the selected direction.

When 2 directions are checked, the direction of the projection is to a point found at the

intersection of the specified plane going through the original point, and the target object.

When 3 directions are checked, the direction of the projection is that of the closed

distance between the point and the target object.

Keep original

When this option is checked, a copy of the original object is created before the projection

takes place .

[Project]

The Project button projects the selected objects to the target.

To project a point, line or section

1. Select the object to be projected.

2. Click on the Project Object tool.

3. Select the Target from the drop down list.

4. Enter any other parameters associated with the target.

5. Choose whether to keep the original or not. (It can be deleted afterwards.)

6. Click [Project].

A new object will appear in the Inspection tree labelled {object}_Projected.

Detect Edge

Detects edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles on sections

This tool is used to detect Edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles using calipers.

It allows you to define, load and save caliper definitions and to choose the type of output

feature required. The features types are selected on sections that have been created on the

object.

An Edge (Corner) is defined as:

The projection of point ‘c’ onto a line ‘ab’ in the direction of caliper angle ‘1’

Directions: normal of line ‘ab’ and normal of caliper angle ‘1’


276

Edge detection

A Combi-Hem is defined as:

First point: connection point ‘b’

Second point: projection of ‘c’ onto line ‘ab’ in direction of caliper angle ‘1’

Directions:

First point: normal of line ‘ab’

Second point: normal of line ‘ab’ AND normal of caliper angle ‘1’

Combi-Hem detection

An Combi-Profile is defined as:

First and second points: connection point ‘b’

Third point: connection point ‘c’

Directions:

First and second point: normal of line ‘ab’.

Third point: normal of caliper angle ‘1’

Combi-Profile detection


277

The Detect Edge - Combi Hem - Combi Profile dialog

This dialog has two tabs; the Caliper tab enables you to define and select calipers, and the Detect

tab enables you to select the caliper to be used and detect the required feature.

The Detect tab

Nominal


Measured


Caliper

This allows you to select a caliper from the list of available calipers. Calipers are defined

in the Caliper tab.

Use on Rail



278

Output

Select the required feature output - Edge, Combi-hem or Combi-Profile.


This tolerance value allows you to ignore small gaps in the sections.

The Caliper tab

Caliper

[Save]



[Load]




279

Dimension


Angles


[Detect]

Click this button to detect the required feature type on the selected sections.

To detect an Edge, Combi hem or Combi Profile

This tool detects feature types on sections that have already been created.

1. Select the sections on which the features are to be detected.

2. Click on the Detect Edge-Combi Hem - Combi Profile feature(s) tool.

3. Choose a caliper from those that have already been defined, or click on the Caliper tab

and define one.

4. If the sections are on a rail check the 'Use on Rail' button and then select the rail.

5. Choose the type of feature required.

6. Click [Detect].

Auto Dimension

Detects measured dimensions from nominal dimensions

This tool can be used to detect measured feature dimensions on and between dimensions

defined on nominal features.

In order for this function to work, the pairs of nominal / measured features must have names

with the required prefix. The dimension of the measured feature named Meas_{feature} can only

be determined if the corresponding nominal feature is called Nom_{feature}.

Auto Dimension property sheet

All Dimensions

When this option is checked, then dimensions of, or between, measured features that

correspond to all the existing nominal feature dimensions will be searched for. If not

checked, then dimensions need to be selected in the Inspection tree.

To detect measured feature dimensions from nominal feature dimensions

Before starting this procedure the following pre-requisites are necessary :


280

Nominal features (circles, surface

points, round slots and square slots)

must have been defined on the nominal

model using the Feature Fitting tool in

the Nominal Task.

Dimensions must have been determined

for these features using the tools in the

"GD&T Dimensions" ribbon group in

the Nominal Task.

Corresponding features must be defined

on the Measured Model.

These corresponding Measurement

features must have the same name as the

Nominal feature with the prefixes Meas_

instead of Nom_.

By default measured dimensions will be determined for All existing nominal dimensions.

1. To detect measured feature dimensions that correspond to particular nominal feature

dimensions, select the required nominal feature dimensions in the tree.

2. Click on the tool directly.

The detection process will start. Corresponding measured feature dimensions will appear in the

Inspect section of the tree.


281

The message area will show the number of dimensions found and the number not matched

(failed).

Failed dimensions can be exported using the Failed Features tool in the Export ribbon group in

the Reporting task.

Auto Rename

Re-names measured features to match the corresponding nominal features.

This tool enables you to re-name measured features so that their identification matches that

of the nominal features to which they are closest. The tool initiates a search of the

measured features within a specified distance and renames all of them that it finds within

this distance of the corresponding nominal feature.

The Auto Rename property sheet

Search Distance

This specifies the distance (in mm) over which the tool will search for a corresponding

Nominal feature. Measured features that have no corresponding Nominal feature within

this specified distance will not be renamed.

To automatically rename measured features

This procedure assumes that you have a set of Nominal and Measured features available in the

Inspection tree. An example of two such sets are shown below.


282

1. Select the features to be renamed in the Measured panel in the Inspection tree.

2. Click on the Auto Rename Features tool.

3. In the Property sheet set the required search distance.

(This assumes that the nominal and the measured objects are aligned).

4. Click on the icon at the top of the property sheet.

The search will be initiated and the status bar indicate the progress.

The features for which a corresponding nominal feature was found within the search distance will

be renamed as shown in the example below.


283

Mesh Border

Generates the borders of a mesh

This tool generates the Outside and/or Inside border of a mesh. The resulting object can be

exported in IGES format.

The Mesh Border dialog

Outer border

When this button is checked an outer border for the mesh will be generated.

Inner border

When this button is checked an inner border for the mesh will be generated.

[OK]

Generates the specified borders.

[Close]

Closes the Generate Border dialog without creating the borders.


284

To generate borders on a mesh

1. Select the mesh


3. Select the borders to be generated

4. Click [OK].

Flip Feature

Switches the direction of the normal of selected features

The Flip Feature tool flips the directions of the normals of selected features.

Flip Feature property sheet

[Flip Normals]

Switches the normal direction of the selected features.

Two-sided lighting


the model has both sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has the faces lit on the

positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the Face Normals. This

parameter is also available in the property tree.

To flip a feature Direction

1. Click the Flip Feature icon. It enables the tool and shows the normals of all features

present.

2. Select the feature using LMB for which you want to flip the normal.

3. Click [Flip Normals] on the property sheet or click on the arrow tip to flip the normal

direction for the selected feature.

Compare Info

Provides information on compared point cloud (s)/mesh(es)

This option schedules the Comparison Information dialog.


285

Modified Measured

The Modify Measured Ribbon Group contains a number of tools to modify selected point

clouds and meshes.

Assembly Match

Joins multiple point cloud /meshes together

The Assembly Match tool aligns multiple point cloud s point clouds or meshes together.

This tool is used to remove overlap error that may have arisen after scanning with an

inaccurate system, or if the object was moved between scans. It schedules the Assembly

Match dialog.


286

The Assembly match dialog

Selection

The Selection fields enable you to select the reference and the moveable cloud / meshes.

When the dialog is dialog is first scheduled, the Moveable selection field is filled in with

all available point cloud/meshes, and the Reference field is empty.

No reference

When this option is checked, then no specific reference clouds/meshes will be used as

reference. None will remain fixed.

[Reselect Reference]

This button defines the current selection of clouds/meshes as the reference clouds/meshes,

i.e. those that will remain fixed during the matching process.


287

[Reselect Moveable]

This button defines the current selection of clouds/meshes as the moveable

clouds/meshes, i.e. those that will be moved during the matching process. By default all

available clouds/meshes are selected.

Search distance

Points of different point cloud(s)/mesh(es) that are closer than this distance can be

selected as overlapping points.

Min. Improvement

This parameter defines the stopping criteria. When the improvement between successive

iterations is smaller that this value, the assembly match stops.

Points in overlap

This parameter defines the number of points in overlap that will be matched during the

process.

Improvement

These fields are updated during the assembly matching process to provide information.

Number of iterations

The number of the last iteration.

Average distance

The average distance moved by all overlap points of the last iteration.

Improvement

The average improvement of the last iteration.

Number of points

The total of overlap points after the previous iteration.

Cloud

The name of each point cloud/mesh

Improvement

The improvement of this point cloud/mesh after the previous iteration.

Distance

The average distance of all overlap points of this point cloud/mesh to the others, after the

previous iteration.

# of points

The number of points of this point cloud/mesh still in the overlap, after the previous

iteration.

[Start]

This starts the assembly matching process between the defined moveable and reference

cloud/ meshes according to the defined settings. The Information fields are filled in to

monitor progress. Once the process is started, this button is renamed [Stop]. If the process

continues until the required improvement is made, this button is named [Restore].


288

[Stop]

Once the assembly matching process has been started, this button stops the process at the

end of the current iteration.

[Restore]

This button appears at the end of the assembly matching process. It will restore the

moveable clouds/meshes to their original location. The button is renamed [Start] and a

new matching process can be started.

[Close]

This button closes the Assembly Match dialog.

To match multiple point cloud/meshes

1. Click on the tool. The dialog opens, all clouds/ meshes are selected as moveable.

2. Select the ones required – if necessary, click [Reselect moveable]

3. Select the reference clouds/meshes (those that will not be moved).

4. Click [Reselect Reference].

5. Set the required process settings.

6. Click [Start]

Information is updated in the Improvement fields.

7. Click [Stop ] if necessary.

8. At the end of the process click [Restore] or [Close].

Select Single Side

Creates a new mesh based on a selected surface

This tool selects surfaces connected to a reference surface within a given angle deviation

tolerance and isolates them into a new separate mesh. The separated mesh can be used as

a stand-alone mesh to compare to the measured models.

This tool is only available when a mesh has been created or imported.

The Select Single Side property sheet

New Name

This field can be used to enter a name for the extracted mesh.


289

Angle (degrees)

This field specifies the angle deviation tolerance of the surfaces being searched. Any

surface whose slope is equal to or below than the tolerance angle value with respect to the

reference surface can be marked and isolated.

Tolerance

This defines a tolerance on the detection of the surface.

[Run]

The run button initiates the search process according to the Angle value set in the

property sheet.

[Separate Meshes]

This button isolates the surfaces detected and marked by the Run operation into a new

independent mesh.

To isolate a single side mesh

1. Click the Select Single Side tool.

The selection mode is activated.

2. Click the arrow next to the tool to open the property sheet.

3. Select the face in the mesh that you want to be the reference surface. The selected surface

turns red.

Note: If multiple faces from one mesh are selected as reference faces, then only last

selected face is taken as the reference face

4. Set the required Angle.

5. Click with MMB or [Run] in the property sheet to identify the surfaces.

6. Edit the name in the New name field if necessary.

7. Once the surfaces are identified and marked in red, use the MMB in the scene or click the

[Separate Meshes] button to separate the selected faces into an individual mesh.

This new mesh will appear in the Inspection tree with the specified name.

Offset Mesh

Applies an offset to a selected mesh

This tool is available for meshes. It applies an specified offset to the selected mesh.

The Offset Mesh property sheet


When checked ON a copy of the original mesh will be retained.


290

Offset Distance

Defines the offset to be applied to the object in the normal direction. Enter a negative

value to apply the offset in the opposite direction

To apply an offset to a mesh

1. Select the mesh object.

2. Click on the arrow next to the tool to open the property sheet.

3. Enter the required offset. A positive value offsets the mesh in the normal direction.

4. Click the tool to apply the offset.

A new mesh appears in the Inspection tree with a name and the suffix _Offset.

Scale

Scales a selected Point cloud / Mesh / Feature

The tool scales the selected point cloud, mesh or feature according to a defined scale

factor in the X, Y and Z directions. It also enables you change the dimensions of the

pointcloud / mesh / feature from mm to inches and vice versa.

The Scale dialog

Free

When this option is checked then a user defined scaling factor can be entered in the X

field. By default the same scale factor will be applied to in the Y and Z directions unless

the Isotropic scale option is checked off.

Inch-> mm

When this option is checked, a scaling factor of 25.4 will be applied in all directions. A

length of 1 inch will become 25.4mm. This factor can not be edited.

mm-> Inch

When this option is checked, a scaling factor of 1/25.4 (0.03937) will be applied in all

directions. A length of 1 mm will become 0.03937inches..This factor can not be edited.

Isotropic scale

This option is available when a Free scaling factor is selected. When checked 'off' it

enables you to define different scaling factors for the X, Y and Z directions.


291

To scale the dimensions of a point cloud, mesh or feature

1. Select one or more point cloud, mesh or feature.

2. Click on the Scale tool.

3. Check the Free option.

4. Enter the required scaling factor in the X field.

5. To apply different factors in the Y and Z directions, check the Isotropic scale option off.

6. Enter the required scaling factors.

7. Click [Apply] to apply the scaling factor.

The point cloud/mesh/feature will be a scaled. In the Measured data tree it will appear with the

indication _Scaled.

To convert the dimension units of a point cloud, mesh or feature

1. Select one or more point cloud, mesh or feature.

2. Click on the Scale tool.

3. Select the required conversion option, (inch-mm or mm-inch).

4. Click [Apply] to change the units.

The dimensions of the point cloud/mesh/feature will be adapted. In the Measured data tree it will

appear with the indication _Scaled.

Smooth

Smooths selected clouds or meshes

This tool smooths selected point cloud/mesh. It schedules the Smooth dialog.

The Smooth dialog


292

Selection

The Selection field displays the current selection. This selection can be modified using

the [Reselect] button.

[Reselect]

Clicking this button, defines the current selection as the target of the operation.

Settings

The parameters set in these fields define the smoothing process.

Maximum displacement.

This field defines the maximum displacement that can be applied to a point during the

smoothing process.

Number of iterations

This field defines the maximum number of iterations that should be used during the

smoothing process.

Statistics

This area displays information relating to the smoothing process:

- Number of points that have been moved.

- Mean distance moved by the points.

- Standard deviation for the movement.

-The minimum distance moved.

- The maximum distance moved.

[Start]

Clicking on this button starts the smoothing process. During the process the button is

renamed to [Stop]. If the [Stop] button is clicked, the smoothing process is terminated at

the end of the current iteration. When the smoothing process has been stopped this button

is renamed [Undo] and allows you to undo the smoothing process and return the points to

their original positions.

[Close]

This closes the Smooth dialog.

To smooth a point cloud/mesh

1. Select the point clouds/meshes to be smoothed.


3. Check the selection, [Reselect] if necessary.

4. Enter the smoothing settings.

5. Click [Start].

6. Click [Stop].

7. When the process is complete, click [Restore], to remove the effect of the smoothing or

[Close].


293

Reverse Mesh Normals

Switches the direction of selected normals

This tool changes the normals of a mesh

The Reverse Mesh Normals property sheet

[Flip normals]

This changes the direction of the selected normals.

Area

When this options is selected, you can select a number of normals.

Two-sided lighting





To change the direction of normals


2. Open the property sheet.

3. Click on mesh surface.

4. Click with the MMB or click on [Flip normals] in the property sheet.

Duplicate

Duplicates selected point cloud (s) / mesh(s)

The tool copies the selected point clouds or meshes or extracts a point cloud from

comparison information generated in the Compare task.

Note: This operation does not duplicate comparison information.

The Duplicate Property sheet


294

Keep copy of Compare object

The copy of Compare object option is only available when comparison information is

selected. If the option is checked ON, the comparison information is maintained and a

point cloud is extracted from this object. If the option is checked OFF, the comparison

information is replaced by a point cloud extracted from this object.

To duplicate a point cloud or mesh

1. Select one or more point cloud or mesh.

2. Click on the arrow next to the tool to open the property sheet.

3. Set the Keep copy of Compare object to the required setting.

4. Click the Duplicate tool.

The point cloud(s)/mesh(s) are duplicated.

Advanced

The Advanced Ribbon Group contains a number of advanced functionalities.

Mirror Objects

Mirror objects around a plane

The Mirror Objects command mirrors selected objects across a specified plane.

Mirror Objects Property Sheet

Plane

This field defines the mirroring plane of the current coordinate system. This has three

predefined planes: XY, YZ and XZ.

Position

The Position field specifies the position of the plane (rendered as translucent gray circular

disc) on the normal axis, e.g. when the XY plane is selected, the Position defines the

plane’s position on the Z-axis.


295



Keep Original

If this option is checked ON, a copy is made when the original object is mirrored. If it is

not checked the object is simply moved to new position on the other side of the mirror

plane.

[Mirror]

This starts the mirror process.

To mirror an object

1. Select a the object to be mirrored on the scene or the Inspection tree.

2. Click the Mirror Objects tool.

The current default plane will appear in the scene, with a rectangular handle to

manipulate it.

Click on the View all tool if necessary if the plane is not visible.

3. Click on the arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet to adjust the

parameters.

4. Drag the rectangular handle to adjust the position of the plane, or enter the required value

in the Position field.



5. Either click the MMB in the scene or click [Mirror] in the property sheet to mirror the

object.

A mirrored version of the solid will appear in the scene and in the Nominal inspection Tree.

Quick Shading

Rapidly generates quick shading

The Compute Quick shading command quickly visualizes a point cloud with shading. This

tool prefers dense and uniformly distributed point cloud(s).

Quick Shading property sheet

Smallest Detail

The Small Detail parameter represents the size of the smallest detail in the point cloud

and also determines the size of the disc that is placed on each point in the point cloud.


296

[Suggest]

In the case of smooth point clouds, the [Suggest] button finds the size of the smallest

detail available in the point cloud. Respecting this number in the Small Detail data box

ensures good approximation of the underlying form.

Note: This small detail parameter is saved after any modification and is available when the

command is revisited.

To compute quick shading

1. Select the point cloud.

2. Open the Compute Quick Shading Property sheet.

3. Enter a value for Small Detail, or click the Suggest button to update the smallest detail

parameter.

4. Click the Compute Quick Shading icon to see the Quick shading of the point cloud.

Remove Shading

Removes quick shading

Remove Quick Shading command removes the Quick shading mode that was used to

visualize a point cloud with the Quick Shading tool.

To remove quick shading

1. Select the point cloud.

2. Click the Remove tool.

Refine Mesh

Refines a mesh to make smaller triangles

This command subdivides an existing mesh. It divides triangles until their edge length is

smaller than the specified maximum edge length. This allows the smoothing operation to be

less intrusive on highly curved areas, such as leading/trailing edge of turbine blades.

The Refine Mesh property sheet

Maximum Edge Length

The maximum length of any edge in the mesh triangles.

Maximum Number of Iterations

This represents the maximum number of iterations that will be performed in order to achieve the

required triangle edge length. If this maximum number of iterations is reached the mesh is

refined to the length that is achieved at the last iteration.


297

To refine a mesh

1. Select the mesh that is to be refined.

2. Click on the Refine Mesh tool.

3. Enter the maximum length of the triangle required in the new mesh.

4. Enter the Maximum Number of Iterations

5. Click the icon in the top left corner of the property sheet.

Mesh Volume

Calculates the volume of a mesh

The Mesh Volume command calculates the volume of a mesh.

Note: When the mesh is closed, the enclosed volume is calculated. When the mesh is open, the

volume to the XY-plane is calculated.

To compute the volume of a mesh Volume

1. Select a mesh.

2. Click the Mesh Volume command to calculate the volume. The volume will be displayed

in a dialog box as shown below.

Golden template

Provides an average model of the multiple, similar shape objects

A Golden Template is an average model of the multiple, similar shape objects. Typical

objects are those that can not accurately be produced, e.g. car seats that are composed of

foam on the inside and covered with cloth or leather. This tool enables an average to be

constructed from acceptable objects thus enabling a suitable mold to be constructed. It also

provides some statistical information.


298

The Golden Template dialog

[Reselect]

This field displays the number of point clouds that are currently selected. When point

clouds are selected in the tree then you can use the [Reselect] button to select them for the

golden template computation.

Search Distance

The value entered in this field defines a range over which points will be included in the

averaging process.

Statistics

When this option is checked 'on', then a set of statistics are computed as well as the

average point cloud. These statistics are illustrated in the figure below.

The statistics provided are :

Max Deviation

max. distance for each point. In the drawing below this is -5

Min Deviation

representing min. distance for each point. In the drawing below this is +2

Range

representing the range of each point = 8 (3+5)

6Sigma

representing the 6Sigma variation of all distances of each point.

[Compute]

This calculates the average point cloud and statistics if requested. The average point cloud

appears in the Measured section of the data tree. The statistics appear in the Comparison


299

folder of the Inspect section of the data tree. The statistics can also be displayed in a

flyout.

To compute a golden template point cloud

1. Select the point clouds to be included in the averaging process.

(If no clouds are specifically selected, then all available will be included.)

2. Click on the Golden Template tool.

3. To change the original selection, select point clouds in the tree or the display and then

click [Reselect].

4. Enter a distance over which the points will be included in the average.

5. Check the Statistics button if you want to see a set of statistics relating to the collection of

point clouds.

6. Click [Compute].

7. The Average point cloud will appear in the Measured section of the tree.

8. The statistics will appear in the Comparison folder of the Inspect section of the data tree.

They will also appear in the "Golden Template Statistics" dialog.

This dialog can be re-opened by selecting the statistics in the tree and clicking on the

Colors tool in the Info toolbar.

9. The statistics can be visualized for any point as a flyout.

Align task

The Align task is used to align the measured data set to the nominal dataset. It includes tools to:

Align models using a variety of methods.

Align section, using 2D Best Fit.

Manage the models using the Alignment Manager.

Orient the models by translating or rotating them.

Ribbon groups

The Align task includes the following Ribbon Groups:


300

Align

Orient

Note that Feature Flyout tools are available from the general toolbar.

Align

The Align Ribbon Group contains commands to align the measured data to the nominal model or

a measured section to the nominal section.

Align N Points

Moves and rotates objects to align them using multiple points

The Align N Points tool is used to align a measured data to a nominal model or specific

locations using N source and N target points. Constraints can be defined for each

individual couple resulting in a constrained alignment. An alignment will minimize the

distance for each set of corresponding points. This tool enables you to create a new

alignment or combine the alignment with an existing one.

Note: The Align N Points tool only is active when there is at least one measured object available in

the scene.

The Align N Points dialog box

This dialog contains two tabs that list the selected pairs of points as well as the constraints

applied to their movement and the results of their alignment.

Create new

When this option is checked, this field shows the name that will be assigned to a new alignment.

A default name is proposed. A user-defined name can be entered.

Update existing

When this option is selected, the new alignment will be combined with the existing alignment

that is selected from the drop-down list.


301

The Points tab

On/Off light switch

The green light button indicates that the corresponding couple is complete and therefore

available for the alignment process. Clicking the green light toggles to red light button

and vice versa. The red light button indicates that the couple is deactivated: it will not

take part in the alignment calculation and its display is also temporarily removed from the

scene.

Measured point (Actuals)

Measured point – Actuals lists the coordinates of the picked source point. Points can be

selected either on the point cloud or on a section.

Model point (Nominals)

Model point – Nominals lists the coordinates of the target point. This can be either a point

that has been picked on a nominal model, or manually entered coordinates. Points can be

selected point clouds / meshes / features or sections.

Constraints

The Constraints check boxes offer the option for the alignment to use movement/rotation

relative to the X, Y and Z axes of the current coordinate system.

[Pick Points]

The Pick Points button allows picking additional couples of points for the N point

alignment. Clicking the Pick Points button will hide the dialog box from the scene. Once

the points are created or edited, apply the MMB to bring back the hidden dialog box.


302

[Align]

The [Align] button initiates the alignment process using the active (green light) couples.

The Points tab switches to the Results tab as soon as the Alignment process is finished.

Apart from the alignment process, clicking the [Align] button also creates an Alignment

node with the Alignment name added under the Alignments of the Inspection tree.

[Restore]

The [Restore] button restores the applied alignment process to the state before alignment.

This button is grayed out as long as the alignment is not calculated.

[Close]

The [Close] button quits the Align N Points tool. The couples are removed from the

scene.

The Results tab

The results tab in the Align N Points dialog box becomes active and available when the Apply

button is clicked. The results tab displays the deviations between each set of corresponding

points and the constraints set. The constraints are not editable, but are only displayed as

information to evaluate the resulting deviations.

dX, dY, dZ

These columns represent the remaining distance in the various directions between the

source and target point.

d 3D

The d 3D column represents the remaining distance in 3 dimensions between the source

and target point.


303

Constraints

The Constraints check boxes display the applied constraints, as information to evaluate

the resulting deviations. The Constraint check boxes are not editable and are grayed out.

[Align]

If the alignment process has not been applied or has been restored, the Apply button

applies the alignment process.

Note: While in the Results tab, the user can switch back to the Points tab manually. After switching

to the Points tab the green/red lights, coordinates and constraints can be edited. The [Align] button

in this case starts aligning from the original location of the point cloud/mesh i.e. the location prior

to starting the Align N Points tool.

[Restore]

The Restore button resets the process. Clicking the Restore button restores the scene to

the original state with the models in their original location and the tab switches to Points

tab.

[Close]

This quits the Align N Points tool. The couples are removed from the scene.

To align measured data to a nominal model

In order to perform this operation, there needs to be at least one nominal and one measured object

in the Nominal and Measured panels of the Inspection tree.

1. The two objects need to be available in the scene. Click on the View all icon in the tool

bar to zoom the view to include the two.

Or create a dual window layout from the Views menu.

2. Click the Align N Points tool to schedule the Align N Points dialog box.

3. To create a new alignment, check the "Create new" options and enter a name for the

Alignment, if this is to be different to the default one.

To combine this alignment with an existing one, check the "Update existing" option and

select the existing alignment to be updated.

4. Place the mouse over the measured data object and observe the pointer changing to a plus

sign (+, crosshair). LMB click to create a source point. You can select point on either the

point cloud or on a section that has been created on the measured model.

With a band line attached to the pointer, LMB click on a corresponding point on the

nominal model to define the target point of the couple. The target point can be on the

model or on a section.

Once a source point is selected, the colors of the numbers of the points on the measured

objects are colored red and the points on the nominal model are colored green.

Once the target point is picked, a line segment (couple) will appear from the selected

source point on the measured data to the current mouse position located at the target point

on the nominal model. The attributes of the couple are posted in the Align N points dialog

box.

5. Create more couples by picking corresponding points on the measured and nominal

model. Only one couple is required to create an alignment is one, but you can define

more. A row of data is added in the Align N Points dialog box for every couple.


304

6. Click [Align] to initiate the alignment process.

The corresponding point pairs are matched (aligned) by minimizing the sum of square

distances between them. An Align node with the Alignment name is added under the

Alignments section in the Inspection tree.

Note: The performance of the alignment varies with the size of the models and the number and

complexity of the pairs.

To Align Measured data to define locations

In order to perform this operation, there needs to be at least one measured object available.

1. Click the Align N Points tool to schedule the Align N Points dialog box.





3. Place the mouse over the measured data object and click on the required source point.

This can be either a point on the point cloud or a section.

The coordinates of this point will appear in the dialog under the Measured point (Actuals)

list.

4. In the corresponding fields for the Model point (Nominals) enter the coordinates of the

point to which the measured data must be aligned.

5. Press the <Enter> key and the couple will appear in the screen; the measured point

indicated in red and the defined point in green.

6. Create as many alignment couples as are required in the same way. .

7. Click [Align] to initiate the alignment process.

To change the position of points

1. Mouse over the source or target point until the cross hair changes to a small box.

2. With the small box displayed click and drag on the model to relocate the point’s end point

location.

To remove points

1. Mouse over the anchor until the couple is highlighted with a gray box. Press the Ctrl key

on the keyboard, and LMB click on the highlighted anchor to delete it.

2. Press the Ctrl key and mouse over a couple to see a crossed X display, indicating that the

couple is ready to be deleted. LMB click the couple to delete it. Once a couple is deleted,

the couple’s attributes in the dialog box are removed, and the number of the rest of the

couples is updated.

To delete all the points

1. Click the Close button to quit the Align N Points tool and restart.


305

Align 6 Points

Aligns two models using 6 points

This tool allows you to make an alignment between the measured and the nominal models

by selecting up to 6 pairs of matching points. It schedules the Align 6 points dialog.

The Align 6 points dialog

This dialog has two tabs. In the Points tab the pairs of points to be aligned are selected.

Once the alignment has been made, the Results tab is available to show the results of the

alignment.

The Points tab

Create new



Update existing

When this option is selected, the new alignment will be combined with the existing

alignment that is selected from the drop-down list.

Measured point (Actuals)

This table shows the coordinates of the points that are selected on the Measured model.


306

Model point (Nominals)

This table shows the coordinates of the corresponding points that are selected on the

Nominal model.

Constraints

These check boxes indicate whether movement is permitted relative to the X, Y and Z

axes of the coordinate system.

[Align]

This starts the alignment between the points on the Actual and the Nominal model. The

Points tab switches to the Results tab as soon as the Alignment process is finished. The

alignment will appear in the Inspection tree with the given name.

The Results tab

dX, dY, dZ d 3D

These fields indicate the remaining distance in the various directions between the source

and target point. The d 3D column represents the remaining distance in 3 dimensions.

Constraints

The Constraints check boxes display the constraints that were applied during the

alignment.


307

[Restore]

This button removes the effect of the alignment.

[Close]

This closes the Align 6 Points tool. The pairs are removed from the scene.

To make an alignment using 6 points

There must be at least one nominal and one measured object in the Nominal and Measured panels

of the Inspection tree.

1. Place the two objects in the scene. Click on the View all icon in the tool bar to zoom the

view to include the two. Alternatively select a view layout from the View menu that

includes two windows and then select a model, a window, then click on the View selected

tool.

2. Click the Align 6 Points tool to schedule the Align 6 Points dialog box.





4. Place the mouse over the measured data object, and observe the pointer changing to a plus

sign (+, crosshair). LMB click to create a source point.

With a band line attached to the pointer, LMB click on a corresponding point on the

nominal model to plant the target point of the pair.

Once the target point is picked, a line segment (couple) will appear from the selected

source point on the measured data to the current mouse position located at the target point

on the nominal model. The attributes of the couple is posted in the Align N points dialog

box.

5. Create more pairs by picking corresponding points on the measured and nominal model.

6. Click the Align button to initiate the alignment process.

The corresponding point pairs are matched (aligned) minimizing the sum of square

distances between them. Information is displayed in the Results tab. An Align node with

the Alignment name is added under the Alignments in the Inspection tree.

7. Click [Restore] to reject the alignment or [Close] to accept it.

Iterative N Points Alignment

Aligns a measured object to a number of defined nominal points by searching for the corresponding measured points in a nominal direction

This tool allows you to align a measured model to a number of defined points and

directions. The nominal alignment points are given and the corresponding measured points

are automatically searched for in a nominal direction.

This tool is available when you have

nominal 'points for directional compare',

OR nominal 'feature points and a nominal solid / mesh' and a measurement point cloud /

mesh,


308

AND an initial alignment has been made using Best Fit for example.

The Iterative N Points Alignment dialog

This dialog has two tabs. In the Points tab the pairs of points to be aligned are selected.

Once the alignment has been made, the Results tab is available to show the results of the

alignment.

The Points tab

Create new



Update existing



Selection

This area shows the current selection of Moveable (Measured) and Nominal objects.

Moveable

This field shows the number of measured points that have been pre-selected in the

Inspection tree. If objects are pre-selected, only those will be moved according to the

alignment. If no pre-selection is made all visible measured objects will be moved.

The current selection can be adapted by selecting the required items in the Inspection tree

and clicking [Reselect Moveable].


309

Nominal

It is not necessary to preselect a nominal model. Nominal points are required.

Minimal improvement

In aligning the measured model to fit to the defined nominal points, an iterative process is

used to find the optimum position of the measured object. This field enables you to set

limit on the improvement that will be searched for in successive iterations.

Points

Any number of nominal points can be selected for the alignment. These each have a

number. From the drop down list you can select from all the 2D features and feature

points that are present in the nominal model that will be used for the alignment. Each time

a feature point is selected, a new field appears

Items included in the list are feature points and surface points.

Points for which a direction has been defined are indicated with a green light. Those

which are selected but which do not have a direction defined are shown with an orange

light. Each time a point is selected a new field opens.

To exclude a point from the alignment, click on the green button to turn it red.

X, Y Z

For each point, these fields display the coordinates of the selected feature.

Search direction

For each point, these fields display the direction associated with the point or feature. This

is the direction in which the corresponding measured points will be searched for. These

values can be edited manually to define a specific direction.

If the direction is unknown you can use the [Detect IJK] button to determine it.

[Detect IJK]

Computes the (normal) search direction. It is available when XYZ points are entered and

a nominal solid/mesh is selected.

Constraints

These check boxes indicate whether movement is permitted relative to the X, Y and Z

axes of the coordinate system.

[Align]

This starts the alignment process. This button will only be available once points,

directions and the constraints have been defined. If successful then the Results tab will be

available in which the deviations (movements) will be listed.

The Results tab

The results tab shows the remaining deviations between each aligned point-pair, together with the

set Search direction and constraints. The remaining deviations, Search direction and constraints

are not editable, only displayed as information to evaluate the resulting deviations.


310

dX, dY, dZ

For each point, these fields list the remaining deviations between each aligned point-pair.

Search direction

For each point, these fields display the search direction used for the alignment. These

fields are for information only and can not be edited.

Constraints

The Constraints check boxes display the constraints that were applied during the

alignment.

[Restore]

This button removes the effect of the alignment.

[Close]

This closes the Iterative N Points Alignment tool. The pairs are removed from the scene.

To make an iterative N points alignment

1. You need to have nominal points for directional compare or points and a nominal solid

/mesh as well as and a measured point cloud / mesh. The nominal points should be

selected within the body of the nominal model, points that are on the edge will be

unlikely to find point cloud points in their normal direction.

2. To convert nominal point to surface points you can use the Surface Points from Points

tool in the Feature Fitting ribbon group.


311

3. Make an initial alignment using the Best Fit tool for example, which uses all the points.

The Iterative N Points alignment tool allows you to make a more accurate alignments

based on the selected points.

4. Click on the Iterative N Points Alignment tool.





6. Define the minimum improvement if different from the default.

7. For each of the six points, select the required nominal point / surface point from the drop

down list.

8. Define the direction to be used for the search. This can be either:

- filled automatically when a direction is associated with the surface point/feature,

- computed using [Detect IJK] in the case of nominal points and a nominal solid / mesh

- entered manually by the user.

9. Edit the Constraints if necessary.

10. When the [Align] button is available, click it to start the alignment.

11. If successful, the alignment appears in the tree, the objects are moved.

Use [Restore] if necessary.

12. When the alignment is complete, click [Close] to close the dialog.

Best Fit

Matches a point cloud to nominal objects using 6DOF best fit

The Best Fit tool aligns selected measured data to all visible or selected nominal models.

The result of the alignment operation appears as an entry in the Inspection tree. A Best Fit

alignment is an iterative process using the condition of minimizing the square of the

distance between the nominal and measured data to converge on a solution. it also

provides a mechanism to adapt the fit to attain positive deviations only between the

moveable and the fixed objects. The measured data can be a combination of meshes and

point clouds. The nominal models can be any combination of solids, meshes, and point

clouds.


312

The Best Fit dialog box

The Best Fit dialog box has following parameters:

Create new



Update existing



[Reselect Movable]

This field displays the number of objects selected in the Measured section of the data tree

when the dialog was opened. Only measured data can be moveable. To change the


313

selection of measured data, select or de-select the items in the data tree and then click

[Reselect Movable].

[Reselect Nominal]

This field displays the number of objects selected in the Nominal section of the data tree

when the dialog was opened. The selected nominal data will remain fixed during the

alignment process..To change the selection of nominal data, select or de-select the items

in the data tree and then click [Reselect Nominal].

Minimal Improvement

The Minimal Improvement parameter represents the criteria used to determine when the

best fit alignment is achieved. If the movement required during any one iteration is

greater than the value specified here, then further iterations will continue until the

movement is less than the specified value. The minimal improvement value is saved

during and in between sessions.

Auto Start Orientation

When this option is checked ON, the orientation (as well as the position) of the moveable

objects will adapted so that it matches that of the fixed objects at the start of the

alignment process. This makes the alignment more robust as it eliminates the importance

of the orientation of the Measured object prior to starting the Best Fit.

Positive Deviations Only

When this option is checked ON, then the best fit alignment will be optimised to

maximize the number of positive deviations. This means that every effort will be made to

ensure that the nominal object fits within the measure (point cloud) object. It is also

possible to apply constraints on the degrees of freedom used in the alignment as explained

below.

Degrees of Freedom

By default the best fit alignment process allows movement in 6 degrees of freedom (3

translational and 3 rotational). You can restrict the degrees of freedom used in the process

by clicking on the [Edit] button, and selecting the degrees of freedom required.

Click [OK] button to confirm the selected degrees of freedom and close the dialog box.

Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box without modifying the degrees of

freedom. The Options section in the Best Fit dialog box will display the selected degrees

of freedom.


314

Transformation Info

This field shows the translation and rotation applied to the moveable (measured) data

following the best fit alignment.

[Apply]

This button initiates the Best Fit alignment. During alignment, the status bar displays the

number of the iterations done, the average distance between the movable and nominal

models at that moment and the improvement compared to the previous iteration. The

scene is dynamically updated.

A Stop button is also provided that allows you to terminate the process.

When the matching has finished, the status bar shows the matching result.

On successful completion of the best fit alignment process, the alignment name is added

under the Alignments node in the Inspection tree.

[Restore]

The Restore button sets the movable entities back to their location prior to the opening of

the Best Fit dialog box. The Restore button is available when the fitting was manually

stopped or after the completion of the Best fit process.

[Close]

This closes the Best Fit dialog.

To make a best fit alignment between measured and nominal objects

This process requires that measured and nominal models exist in the Inspection tree.

1. Click on the Best fit tool.

2. If no objects were pre-selected, all the objects will be selected by default.

To change the selection, select the objects to be moved and click [Reselect moveable].

Select the objects to remain fixed and click [Reselect Nominal].

3. Define the alignment parameters.

4. Click [Apply] to start the best fit alignment process.

5. You may need to adjust the view to bring the model back into the scene. Click on the

View all tool in the main tool bar to do this.

6. If you are happy with the alignment that you can click the [Close] button. Otherwise click

[Restore] to remove the applied translations and rotations from the moveable object.


315

2D Best Fit

Matches a measured section to a nominal section using 6 DOF best fit

The 2D Best Fit aligns measured section objects and section compare objects to the

respective nominal sections, minimizing the average square distance. The measured objects

are measured 2D sections. The nominal objects are nominal 2D sections. For compared

sections, the measured and nominal sections are within the compare section object. The

result is an alignment that is added to the list of alignments and all involved measured

sections are re-positioned. 2D Best Fit alignment is an iterative process where each fitting

is attempted repeatedly over the previous state, with the condition of minimizing the square

of the distance between the nominal and measured sections.

Note: The 2D Best Fit tool is only active when there is at least one nominal and one measured

section or one compare section object available in the scene.

The 2D Best Fit dialog box

The 2D Best Fit dialog box has following parameters:


316

Create new



Update existing



[Reselect All]

The Movable data field in the Selection group lists the sections that will be aligned to the

nominal sections. The Nominal data box in the Selection group lists the sections to which

the movable sections are aligned. To modify the current selection, manually select the

movable sections, nominal sections & compare section objects and press the Reselect All

button. In the Movable text field, the “1 + 1” represents the “number of measured sections

in the Measured tree + number of measured sections in the compare section objects”. The

content of the Nominal text field is composed in the same way.

Independent Measured Objects

When this option is checked, all the entities are best fitted separately. When each best fit

is done, a new alignment is made with the name of the measured object.

When this option is unchecked, all measured sections are best fitted as one to all nominal.

Minimal Improvement

The Minimal Improvement data box displays the user defined stop criterion. At the end of

each best fit iteration, the improvement of the average distance is checked. If the average

distance has improved more than the Minimal Improvement value, then the best fit

alignment will continue with the next iteration to find a better fit. If the improvement of

the matching distance between two iterations is smaller than the indicated Minimal

Improvement value, the matching stops.

Note: The Minimal Improvement value is saved both during and in between sessions.

Degrees of Freedom

On clicking the [Edit] button, the Transformation Constraints dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box contains check boxes for the rotation and for the three translation

components X, Y, and Z. The degrees of freedom that are checked, will be used in the

best fit. The degrees of freedom that are unchecked will not be used in the best fit.

Click [OK] to confirm the selected degrees of freedom and close the Transformation

Constraints dialog box. Click the Cancel button to close the Transformation Constraints


317

dialog box without modifying the degrees of freedom. The Options section in the 2D Best

Fit dialog box will display the selected degrees of freedom.

Transformation Info

After completion of the Best Fit alignment, the Transformation Info section in the 2D

Best Fit dialog box is updated with the alignment result, i.e. the rotation and translation

components of measured data around XYZ.

[Apply]

The Apply button initiates the Best Fit alignment. During alignment, the status bar

displays the number of the iterations done, the average distance between the movable and

nominal models at that moment and the improvement compared to the previous iteration.

The scene is dynamically updated.

During matching, the status bar also contains a [Stop] button that allows the user to

terminate the matching at any time.

When the matching has finished, the status bar shows the matching result.

Note: If the matching is terminated before attaining the requested minimal improvement, the user

can restore the objects to the initial location while the dialog is still open.

On successful completion of the best fit alignment process, the alignment name is added

under the Alignments node in the Inspection tree.

Note: The 2D best fit is only possible if both the measured and nominal sections are parallel. If not,

the Transformation Info section in the 2D Best Fit dialog box will display a message.

[Restore]

The Restore button sets the movable entities back to their location prior to the opening of

the 2D Best Fit dialog box. The Restore button is enabled when the fitting was manually

stopped or after the completion of the 2D best fit process.

[Close]

The Close button quits the 2D Best Fit tool.

Note: Once the 2D Best Fit dialog box is closed, the transformation of the measured data cannot be

undone. 2D Best Fit workflows are based on selection. These selections can be edited at any

moment.

To make a 2D- best fit alignment between measured and nominal objects

Best fit alignment requires that measured and nominal sections exist in the Nominal and

Measured panels of the Inspection tree. You can select the sections to be aligned before the

operation if needed. If no models are pre-selected all models will be selected by default.

1. Click on the 2D Best fit tool.


318

2. If no objects were pre-selected, all the objects will be selected by default.

To change the selection, re-select the objects to be moved and click [Reselect All].

3. Define the alignment parameters.

4. Click [Apply] button to start the best fit alignment process.

Align 3-2-1

Aligns features based on planes lines and points

This tool enables you to align features using four methods based on the selection of Planes,

Points and Lines.

Align 3-2-1 dialog

Create new



Update existing



[Reselect Movable]

The field shows the current number of measured features selected. When different

features are selected in the tree, use the [Reselect Movable] button to select them for the

operation.

[Reselect Nominal]

The field shows the current number of nominal features selected. When different features

are selected in the tree, use the [Reselect Nominal] button to select them for the operation.


319

Method

A list containing the available alignment methods. Each of these methods is described in

more detail below.

Measured

The selection of the measured features to be aligned. The features selected depend on the

method selected.

Nominal

The selection of the nominal feature to be aligned. The features selected depend on the

method selected.

Offset

When an offset is defined, the nominal feature is offset with this value.

[Apply]

Applies the alignment as defined by the selection of measured and nominal features

defined by the method.

[Restore]

This button becomes sensitive after the [Apply] button has been used. It restores the

objects to their original positions.

[Close]

Closes the Align 3-2-1 dialog.

Plane-Line-Point

When this method is selected, the Measured plane will be aligned to the target plane. The

remaining degrees of freedom are translations inside the plane and rotations around the normal of

the plane. When an offset is entered, the Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.

The Measured line will be projected in the Measured plane and aligned to the Nominal target

line. The line indicates the main direction.

The remaining degree of freedom is a translation in the direction of the line.

The Measured point will be projected to the Measured plane and then to the projected Measured

line and will fix the last constraint.

To align features using the Plane-Line-Point method

This method requires that nominal and measured planes, lines and point features have been

detected.


320

1. Click on the Align 3-2-1 tool.

2. Select the Plane-Line-Point method from the drop down menu.





4. Click in the Measured column and select the measured plane to be aligned from those

available.

5. Click in the Nominal column and select the target plane to be aligned from those

available.

6. Define an offset if required.

7. Click in the Measured column and select the measured line to be aligned from those

available.

8. Click in the Nominal column and select the target line.

9. Click in the Measured column and select the measured point from those available.

10. Click in the Nominal column and select the target point from those available.

11. Click [Apply] to align the features..

12. Click [Restore] to restore the objects, or [Close] to close the dialog.

Plane-Line-Line

The Measured plane will be aligned to the target plane. The remaining degrees of freedom are

translations inside the plane and rotations around the normal of the plane. When an offset is

entered, the Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.

The Measured line will be projected in the Measured plane and aligned to the Nominal target

line. The projected line indicates the main direction.



321

The second Measured line will also be projected in the Measured plane and intersected with the

first projected line. The intersection point will fix the last constraint.

To align features using the Plane-Line-Line method

This method requires that nominal and measured planes and lines features have been detected.


2. Select the Plane-Line-Line method from the drop down menu.






available.


available.


7. Click in the Measured column and select the measured line to be aligned from those

available.

8. Click in the Nominal column and select the target line.

9. Click in the third Measured column and select the measured line from those available.

10. Click in the third Nominal column and select the target line from those available.



Plane-Plane-Point


322


translations inside the plane and rotations around the normal of the plane. When an offset is


The second Measured plane will be intersected with the first Measured plane and the intersection

line aligned to the target line. The line indicates the main direction.


The Measured point will be projected to the Measured plane and than to the intersection line and

will fix the last constraint.

To align features using the Plane-Plane-Point method

This method requires that nominal and measured planes and point features have been detected.


2. Select the Plane-Plane-Point method from the drop down menu.






available.


available.


7. Click in the Measured column and select the second measured plane to be aligned from

those available.

8. Click in the Nominal column and select the second target plane from those available



323

10. Click in the Measured column and select the measured point from those available.

11. Click in the Nominal column and select the target point from those available.



Plane-Plane-Plane


translations inside the plane and rotations around the normal of the plane.When an offset is


The second Measured plane will be intersected with the first plane and the intersection line

aligned to the target line. The line indicates the main direction. When an offset is entered, the

Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.


The third Measured plane will be intersected with the first plane and the intersection line

intersected with line created by the first two surfaces. The intersection point will fix the last

constraint. When an offset is entered, the Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.

To align features using the Plane-Plane-Plane method

This method requires that nominal and measured planes features have been detected.


2. Select the Plane-Plane-Plane method from the drop down menu.





4. Click in the Measured column and select the first measured plane to be aligned from

those available.


324


available.


7. Click in the Measured column and select the second measured plane to be aligned from

those available.

8. Click in the Nominal column and select the second target plane from those available


10. Click in the Measured column and select the third measured plane from those available.

11. Click in the Nominal column and select the third target plane from those available.



RPS alignment

Invokes RPS alignment

The RPS tool aligns objects and features by subsequently fixing the known degrees of

freedom to a reference position and matching the remaining degrees of freedom while

maintaining the fixed ones.

The RPS tool aligns measured features or objects to corresponding nominal features or

objects by specifying constraints between them. This fixes specific degrees of freedom and

the alignment is made by matching remaining degrees of freedom. The complete alignment

is made by defining a series of constraints.

The RPS alignment dialog box

This dialog allows you to define a series of constraint. Each constraint applies to a particular

feature of object. A constraint can be applied in a series of steps each of which can have a

different weighting.


325

Constraint Type

A constraint is applied to a pair of features or objects. The constraint can be defined in

two ways:

UCS When this button is checked, the constraint will be defined in a User Coordinate System

(UCS)

Feature

When this option is checked, the constraint will be defined in terms of the feature

characteristics.

Measured

This field enables you to choose the measured feature, area or a point to be picked. This

item will be moved during the alignment.

Nominal

This field enables you to select the nominal feature that corresponds to the selected

measured feature.

Editable fields will appear in which you can specify an offset to be applied to the feature,

that will be taken into account during the alignment.

Constraint

The Constraint drop down list, shows all the possible constraints that can be applied to the

selected measures/nominal features.


326

Multiple constraints can be applied to these features in different steps. Each step can carry

a different weighting.

If the measured feature is a point cloud area to match to the selected reference faces, the

matching will respect the constraints set in the previous steps. Since matching will

determine all remaining degrees of freedom, it is intended to be used as the last step of the

alignment.

Weight

The Weight parameter represents the relative importance of the constraints in a single

step.

Create new



Update existing



[Apply]

The Apply button starts the alignment. The measured objects are aligned according to the

constraints.

[Restore]

The Restore button restores the measured objects to their original positions.

[Close]

Closes the RPS alignment dialog box. On successful completion of the RPS alignment

process, the alignment appears under the Alignments node in the Inspection tree.

To make an RPS alignment

This function requires that features have been defined on the Measured and the Nominal model.

1. Click on the RPS tool.

2. Define the alignment constraints for the first step.

3. Click on either the UCS or the Feature button.

For details on the different types of feature constraints see the examples below.

4. From the Measured drop down list, select the measured feature to be aligned.

5. From the Nominal drop down list, select the corresponding nominal feature.

6. Define an offset if necessary if you require the measured item to be displaced from he

exact position of the nominal item.

7. From the Constraint drop down box, select the first constraint to be applied.

8. Enter a weighting to this constraint.

9. To define a second constraint on these features, increase the step number.

Choose a new constraint and define a weighting.

10. Select another feature or object and define a new stage in the alignment process.


327





12. Click [Apply] to start the alignment.

The measured model will be moved to align to the nominal one.

Example of defining an alignment using feature constraints

The example below shows an alignment based on a set of feature properties.

In the first stage a pair of circles are aligned so that their centres coincide.

In a second stage a pair of lines are made to coincided.

In a final stage two planes are aligned to be parallel.

Example of an alignment using UCS constraints

The example below shows an alignment based on coordinate system constraints

In the first stage a measured and nominal round slot are constrained to align in the X and the Y

direction. This is achieved through two steps, each of which have the same weighting. In each

case the coordinates of the centre of the slots are displayed.


328

In a second stage a measured and nominal plane are constrained to align in the Z direction. The

coordinates of the centre of the planes are displayed.

In a final stage selected points are constrained to align in the XYZ direction.

When selecting the option "Picked point" you can either pick corresponding points on the

measured or nominal models or enter the coordinates directly in the input fields.

Enter a matching UCS constraint in the RPS alignment dialog box

1. Check the UCS radio button. The next constraints field will appear in the RPS alignment

dialog box.

2. In the Measured drop down list, select a feature area/ feature point. A set of three edit

boxes shows the center of the area/point.

3. In the Nominal drop down list, select Picked reference/ 3D features. If it is a picked

reference two sets of edit boxes will appear: an empty box and a set of edit boxes to input

the offset to take into account during feature alignment.

4. If the nominal entity type is a Picked Reference, then pick the reference models to align

the feature area/ feature point to. The names of the picked reference faces are listed in the

text box.

5. Optionally enter the offset to take into account during alignment in the edit boxes. In the

right-most edit box, you can enter the offset to take into account for an individual


329

reference entity. You can set individual offset values for each reference entity or choose

to set the same offset value for all. In the latter case, enter the common offset value in the

leftmost edit box and press the Set button.

6. In the Constraint drop down list, select the constraint to fix. You can choose to fix a

single coordinate or to match the point cloud / mesh area to the picked reference objects.

In the latter case, the matching will respect the constraints set in the previous steps.

Note: Since matching will determine all remaining degrees of freedom, it is intended to be used as

the last step of alignment

Alignment Manager

Manages the application of alignments on models

This tool provides a number of operations allowing management of alignment

transformations. Every alignment operation creates a named transformation. The default

name consists of an alignment method-specific part and a suffix number. The suffix number

starts with (1) in case no specific alignment of its type already exists, e.g. Align (1), Align

(2), Best Fit (1), etc.

The Alignment Manager dialog


330

Transformations

A list of all existing transformations is presented. These can also be seen under the

Alignments node of the Inspection tree.

[Import]

The Import button imports a transformation from an .mtf file (Metris Transformation

File). The imported transformation is added to the list of the transformations in the

Transformations list. Its name is read from the file. In case of conflicts, a serial number is

added at the end of the imported name, e.g. if Best Fit(1) is available and if Best Fit (1)

imported, then Best Fit (1) is renamed as Best Fit (2).

[Export]

The Export button exports the pre-selected transformation to a file with extension .mtf

(Metris Transformation File).

[Invert]

The Invert transformation button inverts the pre-selected transformation from the

Transformations list. A new transformation with an inverted matrix of the selected

transformation will be created. This inverted transformation is available in the Alignment

Manager.

[Combine]

This button combines multiple transformations into a single one. Pressing the Combine

button opens the Group Transformations dialog box, see the chapter on combining

transformations for more information.

Sections

These buttons define how the alignment applies to sections.

2D When this option is selected, the alignment is applied in the section plane.

3D When this option is selected, the alignment is applied in 3D space.

[Apply]

This button applies a selected transformation to any measured data. The objects are

translated and rotated according to the selected transformation matrix.

To rename a transformation

1. Click the transformation name.

2. Type the new name.

To delete a transformation

1. Click the transformation name.

2. Hit the delete key on the keyboard. The transformation name is deleted.

To apply a transformation on a measured data

1. Select the Measured data.

2. Click the transformation name in the Alignment Manager.


331

3. Click [Apply].

Orient

This Ribbon Group contains a tool that allows you to rotate and translate an object and a

tool that allows you to make fine adjustments to an object's position on the screen.

Translate / Rotate

Performs a defined translation and rotation of an object

This tool translates and / or rotates an object about specified axes.

Translate – Rotate dialog

[Reselect]

The field displays the number of currently selected items that will have the translation /

rotation imposed on them. The [ Reselect ] button enables you to select different objects

in the tree or in the display. The Objects radio button must be selected to do this.


332

Objects

When this option is checked, objects can be selected for translation / rotation in the

display.

Coordinates

When this option is checked, then the coordinates of the start and end position for the

translation / rotation can be defined directly in the display. The coordinates defining the

movements will appear in the Translation or Rotation fields below.

Name

Enter the name that will be applied to the translation-rotation. This name will appear in


Constraints

The options in the drop down menu allow you to select the manner in which the

translation and the rotation will be applied. Depending on the selection from this menu,

the fields in which the constraints are defined will adapt. The following options are

possible :

Features

This option is only available if features have been defined. In this case the drop down list

will display all features that are listed in the Inspection tree. The movement will be

relative to the feature and the means of defining the movement of the object will depend

on the selected feature.

WCS - World Coordinate System

a general Cartesian system of coordinates.

Translate (WCS)

The direction of the translation is defined in terms of the X, Y, Z axes of the coordinate

system.

The Distance is the corresponding three dimensional distance, computed from the three

components.

Translate (Feature)

The direction is defined by the feature. The Distance is the distance it is to be translated

in the feature direction.

Rotation (WCS)

Axis point : the coordinates of the point through which the axis of rotation will pass.

Axis direction : a vector defining the direction of the axis of rotation.

Rotation angle: the angle of rotation that will be applied to the object about the defined

axis.

Rotation (Features)

Axis point : the coordinates of the point through which the axis of rotation will pass.

Axis direction : a vector defining the direction of the axis of rotation, specified by the

feature.

Rotation angle: the angle of rotation that will be applied to the object about the defined

axis.


333


When this option is checked then a copy of the original object is retained in its position

before the translation / rotation. After the [Apply] button is used, a new (moved) object

appears in the Inspection tree. This checkbox is only available when solids, meshes,

and/or point clouds are selected.

[Apply]

Clicking this button, applies the defined translation or rotation to the selected object.

[Restore]

This button becomes available when the [Apply] button has been used and allows you to

restore the objects to their original position. The copied object will be removed from the

Inspection tree.

[Close]

Closes the dialog.

To translate and rotate an object

1. Select the object to be modified.

2. Click on the Translate-Rotate tool.

3. Enter a name for the translation-rotation.

4. If you wish to select a different object, select it in the Inspection tree, then click

[Reselect]

5. Select the means of defining the translation and/or rotation (constraints).

6. To translate the object first check the Translation radio button.

7. You can then either enter the movement required in the three coordinate directions or you

can define the movement graphically

To do this

- Make sure the Coordinate check button is selected in the Selection field.

- Click on a point on the object that you want to move.

- Drag the mouse to the final position for that point and click again.

(The corresponding coordinates and position will appear in the fields.)

8. To rotate the object, check the Rotation button.

9. You can then either enter the rotation parameters required in the input fields or you can

define the rotation graphically

To do this

- Make sure the Coordinate check button is selected in the Selection field.

- Click on a point on the object that you want to rotate.

- Drag the mouse to the a second point to define the direction and click again.

- Drag the mouse to a third point to define the angle of rotation and click again.

(The corresponding coordinates and position will appear in the fields.)

10. If you wish to retain a copy of the object in its original position, check the "Keep copy of

original" button.

11. Click [Apply] to apply the defined translation / rotation.

12. If the object movement is as required click [Close].


334

13. If the movement of the object is not as required, click [Restore] to re-locate the object in

its original position.

Adjust the rotation and translation parameters and repeat the process.

Interactive Alignment

This tool allows you to nudge objects in particular directions

This schedules the Interactive Align dialog.

The Interactive Align dialog

[Reselect]

The field displays the number of currently selected items that will have the movement

imposed on them. The [Reselect ] button enables you to select different objects in the tree

or in the display. The Objects radio button must be selected to do this.

Objects

When this option is checked, objects can be selected for movement in the display.

Rotation point

When this option is checked, a point can be selected in the display to act as the centre of

rotation. Its coordinates will appear in the Rotation Point fields below.

Name

Use this field to enter an alignment name that will be added to the Inspection tree after

applying.

Align

Direction arrows

These buttons in the dialog and on the keyboard move the selected objects in the selected

direction in the screen plane by the defined distance..


335

‘+’ and ‘–‘ buttons

These buttons in the dialog and on the keyboard rotate the selected objects around the

normal of the screen plane. Each click rotates the selected objects with the given specified

angle. The ‘+’ button rotates in a counter clockwise direction, the ‘– ‘button in a

clockwise direction.

Rotation Point

These three fields indicate the location of the screen normal axis, used by rotate. By

default the coordinates of the center of the screen are shown here. However, when the

dialog is open, you can click a point on an object to update these coordinates

[Restore]

The [Restore] button becomes available one a translation or rotation has taken place. It

returns the selected objects to their original location – orientation (before the dialog was

opened).

[Accept]

This button accepts the newly defined position and rotation of the objects.

[Close]

This closes the dialog, accepting the current location/orientation of the selected objects.

To interactively align objects

1. Select the objects in the tree or the display that you wish to move.

2. Enter a name for the movements to be applied.

3. Enter distance in the align translation field.

4. Click on any of the direction arrows to move the object by that amount in the

corresponding direction.

5. Enter a rotation angle in the input field.

6. Click on + to rotate the object by the defined angle in a counter clockwise direction.

7. To define the centre of rotation make sure that the Rotation Point check button is checked

"on", then click in the display to define the centre of rotation.

8. Click [Accept] to apply the translation / rotation defined.

9. Click [Restore] to remove the effects of the movement.


336

Compare task

The Compare task is used to compare the measured data set with the nominal data set.

It includes tools to:

Compare all features, point clouds and meshes in the measured model to those in the

nominal model, either globally or in a specified direction, and present the results of the

comparison.

Create surface points from features or flyouts.

Compare the accuracy of an edge.

Represent the curvature of a point cloud or mesh as a colored compare object.

Compute the distance to the opposite wall and report deviations.

Evaluate defined GD&T tolerances for features.

Modify the flyout display style.

Create and compare sections and add them to a rail.

The Compare task includes the following ribbon groups:

o Compare

o Sections

o Construct : which contains two tools

- The "Intersection" tool is described in the Solid workflow - Nominal task - Feature

fitting ribbon group.

- The "Project Object" tool is described in the Solid workflow - Nominal task - Feature

fitting ribbon group.

Compare


337

The Compare Ribbon Group contains functions to compare the measured data to the nominal

model, either globally or along sections, directions or edges.

Global Compare

Compares all points of Measured Point clouds/Meshes/Feature areas to (selected) Nominal objects/3D features

The Global Compare tool is used to reveal the deviation of measured model(s) with respect

to its associated nominal model(s) as a color plot on each point (if the measured model is a

point cloud) or on vertices (if the measured model is a mesh). The Global Compare tool

can also be used to reveal the deviation of feature areas with respect to the nominal

objects/nominal 3D features.

Global Compare properties sheet

Prevent Fall Through

If this parameter is true, then we the comparison is not made to the closest point but to a

“corresponding” point in the measured surface. A nominal point is said to “correspond” to

the measured point when it has a similar normal orientation.

This option is currently supported for measured meshes and nominal solids only. When the sets of

measured or nominal objects contain one or more not supported object types then the Prevent Fall

Through is ignored for not-supported objects. At the end a warning message on “Not supported

object types” is shown in flashing red.

Shape Recognition

If this option is set, adjustments are made to measured points before projecting them onto

Nominal objects to improve shape recognition.

Exclude Border

If this option is set, those points that happen to be projected onto the border of the

Nominal Surfaces are neglected.

Presently only Nominal Meshes and Solid faces support this option (have border points

defined), while the point clouds and features do not have border points defined. Also note

that every solid face has border points surrounding its geometry. When a projected point

lies on a surface border, it is considered as “border projection” even if it is an internal

point for the whole solid composed of multiple faces.

Keep Measured

After a Global comparison, the measured model/feature area is immediately removed

from the data node of the measured tree and placed under the Comparison node of the

Inspection tree. To keep a copy of the measured model, check the Keep Measured option

ON.


338

Hide Nominal

After a Global comparison, the nominal model is immediately hidden in the Inspection

tree.

To make a global comparison

Note that some comparison parameters are set globally as an attribute of the object. So for solids

for example, the Material thickness and the tolerance range applicable are specified using the

object's attributes.

1. Select the Mixed selection tool.

2. Select both the measured and nominal objects.

The measured objects could be point clouds/meshes/feature areas. The nominal objects

could be nominal models/3D features. More than one object can be selected, meaning that

several solids can be compared to a single point cloud.

3. Open the Global Compare properties sheet and adjust the parameters if needed.

4. Click the Global Compare tool.

The measured objects are compared to the nominal objects. The Comparison is added to the

Comparisons node of the Inspect tree. There will be one comparison object for eaxh solid

selected. The Comparison Information dialog box displays the comparison results.

Directional Compare

Compares nominal data points to mesh(es ) in a specified direction

The Direction Compare tool compares nominal surface points to a points on a mesh and

provides a directional compare object as a result.

This tool works in two ways.

When an anchor point is associated with a nominal point The Anchor point (A) is located in 3D space at (x, y, z). The surface point to be compared

(B) will be located in space at (x+δx, y+δy, z+δ) as shown in the figure below.

Knowing the fixed reference distance in the nominal directional points pair (An, Bn),

automatically detect a measured anchor point Am based on An through a directional

comparison. Am will be deviated from An by a distance ∆

Using the known reference distance (δ) between the nominal anchor point (An) and the


339

surface (edge) point (Bn), the Directional Compare tool will automatically detect a

measured anchor point (Am) based on (An). The distance between Am and An .is ∆A.

Using the anchor point deviation ∆A an intermediate nominal point Bn’ = Bn + ∆A (or Bn’

= Am + δ) will be defined. A measured point (Bm ) will be automatically detected and

compared to it using the directional compare algorithm.

Note that, for clarity, the offset between the nominal model and the measured mesh is

exaggerated in the figure above

When no anchor point is associated with a nominal point the surface point(s) are compared with the measured mesh in the direction of the nominal

point.

The directional compare requires either a pre-existing file that defines the positions and

directions to be used in the comparison or new surface points in the nominal tree. It is

accessible when a mesh is available in the data tree.


340

The Directional Compare dialog box

Meshes

[ Reselect ]

This allows you to update the selection of the measured meshes. If the pre-selection is

empty, then all the mesh(es) are selected by default.

Surface points

From file

Check this option to import the nominal points from a file. This file can be created using

the Surface Point from Point tool in the Feature Fitting toolbar in the Nominal tab.

From tree

Check this option to use defined Surface points in the tree. By default all available

surface points are selected.

[ Reselect ]

Click this button to modify the selection of Surface Points from the tree.

Nominal Points

The list of surface points selected in the tree or in the external file.


341

Anchor Points

Anchor points can be selected from the points defined in the tree. Click in the right hand

field to select an anchor point from the drop-down list.

Flip nominal surface points orientation

Changes the orientation of the nominal points by 180deg.

Create measured surface points

When this option is checked, individual measured surface points will also be created

instead of just one directional compare object.

Maximum search distance

When this option is checked then a comparison will be made between points that are less

then this distance in the normal direction.

[ Compare ]

The Compare button starts the comparison of the selected surface points to the mesh in

the specified direction. The comparison is added under the Comparisons node in the

Inspection tree.

The Directional Compare Information dialog box displays the comparison results.

[ Close ]

This closes the Directional Compare tool.

To make a Directional comparison

1. Nominal surface points must have been defined on the nominal model. Use the Surface

Point from Point tool in the Feature fitting ribbon group in the Nominal tab). These

nominal points can be saved to the tree or a file.

2. In the Measured tab a mesh must be available. Use the Mesh tool in the Filter/ Mesh

ribbon group.

3. Select the mesh for comparison if required.

4. Select the nominal surface points in the tree if these are available.

5. Click on the Directional Compare tool.

6. The Directional Compare dialog opens

If the mesh was pre-selected it will appear in the Selection field. You can change the

selection by clicking on a mesh in the inspection tree and clicking [Reselect].

If no pre-selection was made, all meshes and all surface points selected by default.

7. If nominal points were selected in a tree, the number will be listed and can be adjusted

using the [Refesh] button.

8. If the comparison is to be made using Anchor points, click in the field next to a nominal

point and select the required anchor point from those presented in the drop-down list.

9. To choose nominal points in a file, check the button next to "From file" and browse for

the file.

10. Check any additional options required as described above.


342

11. Click on the Compare button.

The surface point(s) are compared with the measured mesh in the specified direction.

12. The Directional Compare Information dialog box displays the comparison results.

If the "Create measured surface points"option was selected, the corresponding points will

appear in the tree.

Surface Point from Point

Creates Surface points from Feature points and Nominal Model.

The Create Surface Points from Feature Points tool creates the surface point(s) from the

selected feature point(s) and the nominal model. At least one nominal model and one

feature point must be visible to create surface points.

This tool can be opened with a nominal model and pre-selecting a point cloud.

The Create Surface Points from Feature Points dialog box

[ Reselect Points ]

The Reselect Points button selects the feature points that are selected in nominal features

tree to create surface point(s). If no feature point is selected, then all the feature points

will be selected.


The Reselect Nominal button selects the nominal models that are selected in nominal

models tree to create surface points. If no nominal model is selected, then all the nominal

models will be selected.


343

Warning tolerance

Warning tolerance specifies the normal distance from the feature point to the nominal

model. If the feature point is located beyond the Warning tolerance, then warning

message will be appeared in the Warning message box and however, surface point(s) will

be created.

To tree


To file

When checked, the surface point(s) are saved into the file specified. These saved surface

point(s) can be used for Directional Compare.

[ Create ]

Click on the Create button to create the surface point(s). The surface point(s) get added

under the nominal features tree as shown below.

[ Delete ]

This button deletes all the surface points that appear in the nominal features tree

irrespective of their visibility. This button is active only after creating the surface point(s)

(i.e. after clicking on the Create button).

[ Close ]

This closes the Create Surface Points dialog box.


1. Import any nominal model and create feature point(s) on the model.

2. Click the Create Surface Points tool.

3. Select the feature point(s) and the nominal model to create surface point(s).

4. Click on the buttons Reselect Points and Reselect Nominal.

5. Set the warning tolerance as required.



7. Click [Create ] to create surface point(s). If to tree check box is checked then surface

point(s) will be added under the nominal features tree.

Surface Point from Flyout

Creates Surface points from flyouts

The Create Surface points from flyouts tool creates the surface points from the selected

flyouts. At least one flyout must be available.


344

The Create Surface points from flyouts dialog box

[ Reselect Flyouts ]

The Reselect Flyouts button selects the Flyouts that are selected in scene to create surface

points. If no flyout is selected, then all the flyouts will be selected on pressing the

Reselect Flyouts button.

to tree


to file

When checked, the surface points are saved into the file specified. These points can be

used in the Directional Compare tool.

[ Create ]

This button creates the surface points.

[ Delete ]

Click on the Delete button to delete all the surface points that appear in the nominal

features tree irrespective of their visibility. This button is active only after points have

been created.

[ Close]

This button closes the Create Surface points dialog box.


1. Import any nominal model and measured model and create flyout(s) on the comparison

object.

2. Select the flyout(s) create surface point(s).

3. Click on the buttons Reselect Flyouts.



5. Click on the Create button to create surface point(s). If to tree check box is checked, then

surface point(s) will be added under the nominal features tree.


345

Compare Edges

Compares the accuracy of an edge

This tool compares the edges of the point cloud/mesh with the solid model. The edge

accuracy is expressed in 2 deviations:

A deviation perpendicular to the untrimmed edge surface.

A deviation inside the trimmed edge surface.

The Edge Inspection dialog box

Name

The name of the comparison.

[ Reselect Measured ]

The Reselect Measured data box lists the objects that will be compared against the

nominal objects. To modify the current selection, manually select the measured objects

and press the Reselect Measured button.


The Reselect Nominal data box lists the reference objects to edge inspection. To modify

the current selection, manually select the nominal objects and press the Reselect Nominal

button.

[ Draw Line ]

This button allows the user to draw the line close to the edge of the point cloud/mesh to

compare against the nominal edge. The Inspect button gets activated only after drawing

the line and pressing MMB.

Sample Distance

This Sample Distance specifies the distance between the points on the boarder that will be

compared to the edge.


346

[ Inspect ]

The Inspect button starts the comparison of the selected edge points to the nominal edge

in 2 directions: a deviation perpendicular to the untrimmed edge surface and a deviation

inside the trimmed edge surface.

The comparisons in the above two directions are added under the Comparisons node in

the Inspection tree. The Edge Information dialog box displays the comparison results

[ Close ]

This button closes the Edge Inspection tool.

To compare edges

1. Select edges if required.

2. Press the Compare Edges icon.

3. The Edge Inspection dialog opens.

If the edges were pre-selected they will appear in the Options field. You can change the

selection by clicking on a edge and clicking [Reselect Measured] or [Reselect Nominal].

If no pre-selection was made, all meshes and all surface points selected by default.

4. Click on the Draw Line button to draw the line close to the edge of the point cloud/mesh.

And then press middle mouse button to end the edge selection.

5. Click [Inspect] to start the comparison.

Curvature

Creates the colored compare object expressed as the local radius of a point cloud (s) or mesh(es)

The Curvature tool creates the curvature of point cloud(s) or mesh(es) as a colored

compare object expressed as the local radius of a point cloud(s) or mesh(es). This tool

requires pre-selection.

The Curvature property sheet

Keep Measured

After creating Curvature Radius Information, the measured model is immediately

removed from the data node of the measured tree and placed under the comparison. To

keep a copy of the measured model, check the Keep Measured option.

Smallest Detail

The highest curvature to take into account is determined by the Smallest Detail parameter.

If this parameter is set 0, the smallest detail will be determined automatically. Otherwise,

this parameter represents the size of the smallest detail in your drawing. You can set this

parameter to be larger than the noisy areas in your drawing so as to discard noise from the

point cloud.


347

To compute the curvature radius

1. Select the mixed selection tool.

2. Select the measured point cloud/mesh.

3. Open the Curvature Radius property sheet and do the following if needed.

4. If a copy of the measured model is to be retained, check the Keep Measured option.

5. Enter the smallest detail.

6. Click on the Curvature Radius tool.

The Curvature Radius Information dialog box displays the Curvature radius results.

Note: If the Keep Measured option is checked OFF, the Curvature radius command is disabled

after the comparison.

Wall Thickness

Computes the distance to the opposite wall

The Wall Thickness tool computes, for every point, the distance to the opposite wall, and

reports the deviations as a standard wall thickness compare object. This tool can only used

on solid(s) and/or mesh(es).

The Wall Thickness dialog box

Upper tolerance

This pre-sets the upper bound for the color settings of the Wall Thickness Information

dialog. They can also be used to calculate the deviations between the upper tolerance and

lower tolerance.


348

Lower tolerance

This pre-sets the lower bound for the color settings of the Wall Thickness Information

dialog. They can also be used to calculate the deviations with in the upper tolerance and

lower tolerance.

Nominal

This specifies the nominal distance to the opposite wall that needs to be considered for

computing the Wall Thickness.

Angle tolerance

For computing the Wall Thickness, a normal to the surface at every point is taken and a

ray is shot in the opposite direction to hit the opposite surface. The difference in angle

between the ray and the normal to the opposite surface specifies the Angle tolerance. If

this angle is below the Angle tolerance, the Wall Thickness is well defined.

Smooth direction

When the mesh data is noisy, then the normal directions are even more noisy. The Wall

Thickness computed using noisy normals would not be accurate. In that case it is

necessary to check the Smooth direction check box to smoothen the normals data.

Planar

This parameter is used to create a mesh tessellation for the solid. This represents the

maximum distance between the nearby vertices.

Angular

This parameter is used to create a mesh tessellation for the solid. This represents the

maximum angle (degrees) between normals in the nearby vertices.

Output separate faces (lower memory)

When Output separate faces option is checked, then the Wall Thickness information

objects will be created for each face of the solid and added under the comparisons node in


[ Run ]

The Run button starts the computation of Wall Thickness with in the specified upper and

lower tolerance. The Wall Thickness information is added under Comparisons node in the

Inspection tree.

The Wall Thickness Information dialog box displays the Wall Thickness results.

[ Close ]

This closes the Wall Thickness tool.

To make a wall thickness comparison

1. Select the Mixed Object Select tool.

2. Select either the mesh or solid.

3. Open the Wall Thickness dialog box and specify the parameters to compute the Wall

Thickness.

4. Click on the Run button. The Wall Thickness is computed for the selected model and the

Wall Thickness Information dialog box displays the Wall Thickness results.


349

Evaluate GD&T

Evaluates defined GD&T tolerances for features

This tool evaluates features according to specific GD&T tolerances that were set. The

tolerances must have been set using the Create GD&T Annotation tool in the GD&T

Dimension Ribbon Group of the Nominal task. The result of the evaluation is shown in a

flyout.

The flyout shows the nominal tolerances that were defined along with a graphic that indicates the

type of tolerance. The results of the evaluation are shown below the tolerance with colored

backgrounds; green indicates that the result lies within the tolerance and red that it is outside of

it.

The Evaluate GD&T property sheet

All features

When this check box is ON the evaluation will be performed on all features for which

GD&T tolerances have been defined. If this check box is OFF, then features for which

the evaluation is required must be pre-selected in the Inspection tree

Re-evaluate

When this check box is ON, then tolerances for all features selected for evaluation will be

computed even if they have previously been evaluated. This is the default setting.

Checking this button OFF may be interesting if you have a large number of tolerances to

evaluate and you know (for example) that only position and not shape tolerances need to

be re-evaluated.


350

To perform an evaluation of GD&T tolerances

1. If you wish to evaluate specific features, select them in the tree, then click on the Eval

GDT tool.

2. If you wish to evaluate ALL the features for which GD&T tolerances have been defined,

click on the arrow to open the property sheet first and then check the button All Features.

3. It is recommended to re-evaluate previously evaluated tolerances, unless there are a large

number that have not been modified.

4. Click on the icon at the top of the property sheet to start the evaluation process.

The properties of the GD&T flyout can be set by double clicking on the evaluation flyout or by

selecting the Flyout Properties tool.

Compare Features

Compares pairs of features of the same type

The Compare Features tool compares pairs of features of the same type. It generates a

flyout that displays all the information relating to the comparison of features. The

information displayed in the flyout is determined by the

The Compare Features property sheet

All Features

If the All Features check box is checked, the Compare Features tool compares all pairs of

features of the same type and corresponding names. For each feature pair, a flyout with

the differences between both is created.

To compare feature pairs

1. Select the measured and corresponding nominal features.

2. Press the Compare Features button.

The features will be compared and for each feature pair a flyout will be created.

An example of such a flyout is shown below.


351

3. The contents of the flyout can be edited by double clicking on the flyout. This will

schedule the Flyout Properties dialog in which the parameters to be displayed can be

edited.

To compare all feature pairs

1. If your drawing contains multiple features of the same type, ensure that corresponding

features have corresponding names.

2. Open the Compare Features property sheet.

3. Check the All Features option.

4. Press the Compare Features button.

Corresponding features will be compared and for each feature pair a flyout will be

created.

5. The fields on view can be edited as described above.

Compare Info



Flyout Properties

Changes the flyout display style

This tool enables you to edit the display characteristics of an existing flyout.

Flyouts that can be edited using this tool can be created using the following tools from the

Flyouts ribbon group.

The Compare Flyouts tool

The Feature Flyouts tool

The Create Rail Flyout tool

All Flyouts are listed under the "Fyouts"node in the Inspect section of the Inspection Tree,


352



Compare Flyouts tool.

Sections

The Sections Ribbon Group contains tools to create and compare sections as well as managing

rails.

Create Section

Creates Sections on point clouds, meshes and solids

The Create Section tool creates one or more sections on data by user defined axis planes.


353

The Create Section dialog box

Objects

This field reports the total number of measured models that are available in the scene.

X , Y , Z

These options allow you to create sections parallel to the X, Y and Z directions.

3 points

This option allows you to create a section that passes through 3 points.


354

Plane

This option allows you to create a section that passes based on a selected plane object.

Wire

This option allows you to create a section based on a wire.

Solid edge

This option allows you to create a section that is perpendicular to a solid edge or feature

line.

Passing through a defined point and parallel to an edge

This option allows you to create a section that passes through a defined point and is

parallel to a solid edge. This option requires that feature points have been defined. The

plane will pass through the point and remain parallel to the nearest solid edge.

Concentric circles

This enables you to create a set of concentric circular sections.

File

This option allows you to retrieve a section from a file.

Single Section

Selecting the Single Section button will display only one section preview in both the 2D

and 3D preview windows. This is the primary section, highlighted with a blue border and

a shaded gray fill that is different in color from any other previewed section. The primary

section preview is always displayed regardless of its position and regardless of whether or

not it intersects the model.

Parallel Sections

Selecting the Parallel section button will display the primary section preview in the

highlighted color and all feasible section previews in an alternate red-border color without

fill. Only the primary section preview is modifiable. Only the child section previews that

actually intersect the model (thus, can actually create a section result) will be shown.

Rail

This section enables you to choose whether to add sections to a rail or not. A Rail is a

group of sections that are related to a particular part of the object. Rails are useful when

used with the Flush Caliper tool. Information relating to rails is available in the Report

task .

Separate

When this option is selected then each section will be created separately. Sections can be

added to a rail at a later stage.


355

To Rail

When this option is selected then the sections created will be added to the specified rail.

A default rail is provided, but you can define others in the input field. Sections can be

removed from a rail if required.

[Lasso]

Click the Lasso button to mark select an area in the model that would eventually define

boundary while creating sections. Clicking the Lasso button deactivates the Create

Section button and the component selection will become available to click and drag on

the models to enclose a polygon region. Clicking the Lasso button would display the

feedback saying Press MMB and "Done" to end selection. Use the LMB and click on the

measured model to block the region to create sections. The Shift and Ctrl key can be used

to add and subtract the selection. Once the regions are blocked which are marked in red,

press the Done button to ascertain the selected region to create sections.

[Done]

Pressing the Done button ascertains the selected region to create sections and activates the

Create Section button.

[Create Section]

The Create Section button starts the creation of sections on the selected data.

[Close]

The Close button quits the Create Section tool.

To create sections perpendicular to the X-, Y- or Z-axis

1. Click the X, Y or Z buttons .

By default a single primary section will appear in the scene.

The current position of this section along the axis will be displayed.

2. Position this section either by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre or by

entering the required value in the X, Y or Z value field.

3. To create sections parallel to this one, click on the Parallel Sections button .

4. Enter the required position of the last section in the To field.

5. Enter either the number of section between then in the Times field, or the distance

between each step in the Steps field.

6. Define a width of the section plane if required. By default the width is set to the size of

the solid/point cloud/mesh, so that the section would cover the complete part. By

checking the Width option "on" you can create smaller sections, that do not cover the

entire solid/point cloud/mesh.

7. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing

rail.

8. Click the [Create] button to create the section.


356

To create sections using 3 points

1. Click the 3 points button .

2. Pick 3 points in the drawing to define the section plane.

3. Click the Single Section button to create a single section or the Parallel Section

button to create parallel sections.

4. Position the primary section by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre.

5. If parallel sections are created, specify the distance between two successive sections in

the Step field.


rail.

7. Click [Create] button to create the sections.

To create sections using a plane

1. Click the Plane button .



The primary section preview is displayed.



the Step field.

5. Pick a planar object in the drawing or from the drop-down list to define the section plane.

6. You can choose whether to use the complete plane to define the section or you can check

the "Bounded" option to reduce the effective area of the plane to the dimensions

specified.

The dimensions specified are measured from the center of the plane.

7. Choose whether to add the sections to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an

existing rail.

8. Click [Create] button to create the sections.

To create a section using a wire

1. Click the sections from wire button .

2. Draw a wire curve with the LMB. Click the MMB to finish.

3. If required add a step interval to create a series of parallel sections separated by the

specified distance.

4. If required define an angle to define a radial set of sections separated by the specified

angle.


357


rail.

6. Click [Create] button to create the section.

To create sections perpendicular to an edge or feature

1. Click the edge button .

2. Click on an edge in the drawing to position the section plane.

3. Click the Single Section button . Both the 2D and 3D preview windows will display a

section.

4. Adjust the position of the primary section along the wire. This can be done either by

picking a new position, by specifying a coordinate value or using the plane position

arrows. To set the position of the primary section manually, check the Manual Location

check box and select the new position in your drawing. To set the position of the primary

section at a specific X, Y or Z value, check the X, Y or Z button and enter the coordinate

in the edit box. The position of the primary section can be moved by entering a chord

length step in the Step edit box in the Move section and by using its arrows. Pressing the

arrows will move the primary section with steps as specified in the Step edit box, see also

the illustration below. Any change in the data boxes will be reflected in the scene after

hitting the <Enter> key or when the text box looses focus.

5. Specify the width of the section in the Width field.


rail.

7. Click the Create button to create the section.

To create a section parallel to an edge that passes through a point

1. Click the button .

2. Click [Pick] and then click on a defined feature point, or click [Pick all].

The primary section will appear on the nearest edge to the point.

3. To create parallel sections, click Parallel Sections button and entered the required

step between sections in the Step field.

4. Modify the position of the primary section along the edge.

5. Specify the distance between two sections in the Step field.

6. Specify the width of the sections in the Width field.


rail.

8. Click [Create] to create the sections.

To create a set of concentric circular sections

1. Click on the concentric circles button .


358

2. Define the centre of the first circle, either by clicking on an object or by entering the X, Y

and Z coordinates.

3. Enter the required radius for the first (inner) circle.

4. To create a set of concentric circles click on the concentric tool .

5. Enter the difference in radius in the Step field.

6. Enter the number of (additional) circles required in the Times field.


rail.

8. Click [Create] to create the sections.

To create sections from file

1. Click the sections from file button .

2. Press the Sections from file… button to select a file with section definition information.

Section files can be created with the Export Sections tool, see the Export Sections tool for

more information. Upon the file selection, all section previews that intersect the data-set

bounding-box are drawn in both the 2D and 3D preview windows. The Create and

Compare Section dialog box will list the name of the file.


rail.

4. Click [Compare] to create and compare the sections.

Compare Section

Creates Sections on Point clouds / Meshes and compares these to (selected) Nominal objects

The Compare Section tool compares nominal to measured models, along one or more

sections that are created on user defined axis planes. This tool is only active when nominal

and measured model(s) are available in the scene.

The Create and Compare Section dialog box

This dialog allows you to create and compare various types of sections through the nominal and

the measured models.

The sections are displayed as bounded rectangles. The parent section preview is a bounded

rectangle drawn with a blue border and gray fill as shown in the image below. This section

preview is always visible regardless of it intersects the data-set bounding-box. Each child section

preview is a bounded rectangle drawn with a red border and no fill.

This dialog contains two tabs.

The Methods tab

This tab is used to define the required sections.


359

Measured

This field reports the total number of measured models available in the scene.

Nominal

This field reports the total number of nominal models available in the scene.

X, Y , Z

These options allow you to create and compare sections parallel to the X, Y and Z

directions.


360

3 points

This option allows you to create and compare a section that passes through 3 points.

Plane

This option allows you to create and compare a section that passes based on a selected

plane object.

Wire

This option allows you to create a section based on a wire.

Solid edge

This option allows you to create a section that is perpendicular to a solid edge.

Passing through a defined point and parallel to an edge

This option allows you to create and compare a section that passes through a defined

point and is parallel to a solid edge. This option requires that feature points have been

defined. The plane will pass through the point and remain parallel to the nearest solid

edge.

Concentric circles

This enables you to create and compare a set of concentric circular sections.

File

This option allows you to retrieve a section from a file.

Single Section

Selecting the Single Section button will display only one section preview in both the 2D

and 3D preview windows. This is the primary section, highlighted with a blue border and

a shaded gray fill that is different in color from any other previewed section. The primary

section preview is always displayed regardless of its position and regardless of whether or

not it intersects the model.

Parallel Sections

Selecting the Parallel section button will display the primary section preview in the

highlighted color and all feasible section previews in an alternate red-border color without

fill. Only the primary section preview is modifiable. Only the child section previews that

actually intersect the model (thus, can actually create a section result) will be shown.

Two sided nominal

The topology of the sections are 'detected' and aligned, than the compare is made. Note:

this only works well when the curves have similar topology (shape).

Shape recognition

The measured section is 2D Best Fit to the Nominal section. For each measured point the

closest nominal point is taken, the measured section is re-positioned in the original


361

location and the measured points are compared to the nominal points found after align 2D

Best fit.

Rail

This section enables you to choose whether to add sections to a rail or not. A Rail is a

group of sections that are related to a particular part of the object. Rails are useful when

used with the Create Gap/Flush Using Calipers tool. Information relating to rails is

available in the Report task .

Separate

When this option is selected then each section will be created separately. Sections can be

added to a rail at a later stage.

To Rail

When this option is selected then the sections created will be added to the specified rail.

A default rail is provided, you can define others in the input field. Sections can be

removed from a rail if required.

[Lasso]

Click the Lasso button to select the area of the measured data that is used for comparison

with a polygon region. Clicking the Lasso button deactivates the Compare button and the

component selection will become available to click and drag on the models to enclose a

polygon region. Clicking the Lasso button would display the feedback saying Press MMB

and "Done" to end selection. Use the LMB and click on the measured model to block the

region to be compared. The Shift and Ctrl key can be used to add and subtract the

selection. Once the regions are blocked which are marked in red, press the Done button to

ascertain the selected region for comparison.

[Done]

Pressing [Done] ascertains the selected region for comparison and activated the Compare

button.

The Settings tab

Point distribution

Can be : Measured, Uniform, Chordal Deviation


362

[Compare]

The Compare button starts the comparison of the selected measured data to the selected

nominal model along the created sections. The Comparison is added under the

Comparisons node in the Inspect tree. The Section Information dialog box displays the

comparison results.

[Close]

This closes the dialog.

To create and compare sections perpendicular to the X-, Y- or Z-axes

1. Click the X, Y or Z buttons .

By default a single primary section will appear in the scene.

The current position of this section along the axis will be displayed.

2. Position this section either by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre or by

entering the required value in the X, Y or Z value field.

3. To create sections parallel to this one, click on the Parallel Sections button .

4. Enter the required position of the last section in the To field.

5. Enter either the number of section between then in the Times field, or the distance

between each step in the Steps field.

6. Define a width of the section plane if required. By default the width is set to the size of

the solid/point cloud/mesh, so that the section would cover the complete part. By

checking the Width option "on" you can create smaller sections, that do not cover the

entire solid/point cloud/mesh.


rail.


To create and compare sections passing through 3 points

1. Click the 3 points button .

2. Pick 3 points in the drawing to define the section plane.





the Step field.


rail.

7. Click [Compare] button to create and compare the sections.


363

To create and compare sections using a plane

1. Click the Plane button .

2. Pick a planar object in the drawing to define the section plane.



The primary section preview is displayed.



the Step field.


rail.


To create and compare a section using a wire

1. Click the sections from wire button .

2. Draw a wire curve with the LMB. Click the MMB to finish.

3. If required add a step interval to create a series of parallel sections separated by the

specified distance.

4. If required define an angle to define a radial set of sections separated by the specified

angle.


rail.

6. Click the [Compare] button to create and compare the section.

To create and compare sections perpendicular to a solid edge

1. Click the solid edge button .

2. Click on a solid edge in the drawing to position the section plane.

3. Click the Single Section button . Both the 2D and 3D preview windows will display a

section.

4. Adjust the position of the primary section along the wire. This can be done either by

picking a new position, by specifying a coordinate value or using the plane position

arrows. To set the position of the primary section manually, check the Manual Location

check box and select the new position in your drawing. To set the position of the primary

section at a specific X, Y or Z value, check the X, Y or Z button and enter the coordinate

in the edit box. The position of the primary section can be moved by entering a chord

length step in the Step edit box in the Move section and by using its arrows. Pressing the

arrows will move the primary section with steps as specified in the Step edit box, see also

the illustration below. Any change in the data boxes will be reflected in the scene after

hitting the <Enter> key or when the text box looses focus.


364

5. Specify the width of the section in the Width field.


rail.

7. Click [Compare] to create and compare the section.

To create and compare a section parallel to a solid edge that passes through a point

1. Click the button .

2. Click [Pick] and then click on a defined feature point, or click [All points].

The primary section will appear on the nearest edge to the point.

3. To create parallel sections, click Parallel Sections button and entered the required

step between sections in the Step field.

4. Modify the position of the primary section along the edge.

5. Specify the distance between two sections in the Step field.

6. Specify the width of the sections in the Width field.


rail.


To create and compare concentric circle sections

1. Click on the concentric circles button .

2. Define the centre of the first circle, either by clicking on an object or by entering the X, Y

and Z coordinates.

3. Enter the required radius for the first (inner) circle.

4. To create a set of concentric circles click on the concentric tool .

5. Enter the difference in radius in the Step field.

6. Enter the number of (additional) circles required in the Times field.


rail.


To retrieve sections from a file

1. Click the sections from file button .

2. Press the Sections from file… button to select a file with section definition information.

Section files can be created with the Export Sections tool, see the Export Sections tool for

more information. Upon the file selection, all section previews that intersect the data-set

bounding-box are drawn in both the 2D and 3D preview windows. The Create and

Compare Section dialog box will list the name of the file.


rail.


365


Add to Rail

Adds selected sections to a specified rail

This operation is sensitive when a section that is in the ‘Sections’ part of the tree is

selected. It allows you to move a section from the ‘Sections’ part of the tree to a designated

rail.

The Add Selected Sections to Rail property sheet

Rail

This list allows you to select the rail to which the sections will be added. You can select

an existing rail or create a new rail by typing in the name. The default rail is always

available.

To move sections from the separate region to a rail.

1. Select the section(s) to be added to a rail

2. Click on the arrow to see the property sheet in which you can specify the destination rail.

3. Click on the icon to add the sections to the selected rail.

Remove from Rail

Removes sections selected from a rail

This tool is sensitive when a section in a rail is selected in the tree. It moves it from the rail

to the ‘Sections’ area of the tree.

To remove a section from a rail

1. Select a section in a rail.


The section will be removed to the "‘Sections" area of the tree.


366

Report task

Tools provided for reporting include:

Creation and management of Flyouts to provide annotation.

Creation and management of Reports.

Determination of Dimensions.

Export of various items including features, sections and deviations.

The Report task includes the following Ribbon Groups:

o Flyouts

o Reporting

o Dimensions

o Export

Flyouts

A Flyout is a label that displays information relating to a specific object. The tools in the

Flyouts Ribbon Group enable you to create, modify and manage a number of different

types of Flyouts and other annotation functions.

Compare Flyouts

Creates Flyouts for points with comparison information

The Compare Flyouts tool creates flyouts for points for which comparison information is

available.


367

A Flyout is a label that displays comparison information relating to a specific point. A

Flyout therefor can only be created if comparison information is available. Comparison

information is listed under the "Comparisons" node in the Inspect section of the Inspection

tree and is generated using the tools in the Compare toolbar in the Compare task.

The Flyout Properties dialog box

The Flyout properties dialog contains four tabs, that define all aspects of flyouts:

The Flyout Create tab

The Flyout Properties tab

The Flyout Colors tab

The Sign Indication tab

Flyout Create tab

The Flyout Create tab defines which points will have flyouts attached to them.


368

All points outside this range

When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for those points whose values lie

outside the region defined by the defined range.

The ‘and one out of’ field is an additional filter that allows you to select only the

proportion of points defined in the input field. So for example if you enter a value of 10,

then only 1 point out of 10 of those points whose values lies within the range will be

selected for flyouts. This number of points is indicated in the field.

Worst

When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for the defined number of points that

have the maximum deviation in either a positive or negative sense.


369

Worst positive and negative points

When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for the defined number of points that

have the maximum deviation in both positive and negative direction of the nominal

model.

One out of “N” points:

When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for the proportion of points defined.

So if a value of 10 is entered, 1 out of all 10 points will be randomly picked.

Manually selected points

When this option is selected, you can select points on the comparison object for which a

flyout will be created. This is the default selection mode for this tool, it is used without

opening the dialog.

All points

When this option is selected flyouts will be created for all points in the comparison

object.

Flyout Numbering

This determines how the created flyouts will be numbered.

Continuous

The flyouts are numbered serially. Deleting a flyout will not affect the order of the new

flyouts’ serial number when they are created.

Compact

The flyouts are numbered serially, but if flyouts are deleted, their serial numbers are

reused by the new flyouts starting from the lowest available number.

From points

The serial number is derived from the points order in the comparison object.

The Flyout Properties tab

This tab allows you to define how the flyouts are presented.


370

Name

This field displays the name of a selected flyout. If it is empty it implies automatic

naming.

If this option is checked you can use the input field to enter a name that will be added to

the top of the flyouts.

Compare flyouts

The options in this panel apply to flyouts created using the Compare Flyouts tool and

which concern flyouts that relate to comparison information.

Measured data If checked, a column with measured data is shown in the flyout. The data coordinates

used are selected from the Coordinates drop-down list.


371

Nominal data If checked, a column with nominal data is shown in the flyout. The data coordinates used

are selected from the Coordinates drop-down list.

Deviation When checked the deviation between the measured and nominal data will be displayed in

the flyout. The coordinate directions in which the deviations are displayed are selected

from the Coordinates drop-down list.

Tolerance When checked the active tolerance is displayed in the flyout. This corresponds to the

upper (High) and lower (Low) limits shown in the Color tab of the Compare Info dialog.

3D Deviation When checked, the measured point’s 3D deviation from the nominal model will be

displayed in the flyout. The ‘+’ sign in the distance indicates that distance is measured

along the normal side of the nominal model and the ‘–‘ sign indicates the reverse side of

the nominal model.

If the Color bar option is checked, a color bar will appear in the flyout.

If the Go / No Go option is checked then the term indicating whether the value has been

evaluated as being within tolerance will be displayed in the flyout. The text used is set in

the Sign Indication tab.

Number of Points When checked, the total number of compared points will be displayed in the flyout.

Range When checked, the range of distances between the measured data and the nominal model

is displayed in the flyout.

Sigma When checked, the statistical sigma of the measured data to the nominal model is

displayed in the flyout.

Mean When checked, the mean distance between the measured data and the nominal model is

displayed in the flyout.

In Tolerance When checked, the percentage of the area of a mesh or number of points in a point

cloud that is inside tolerance is displayed in the flyout.

The figure below shows the flyout resulting from the a set of compare flyout properties.


372

Feature flyouts

The options in this panel apply to flyouts created using the Feature Flyouts tool and

which concern flyouts that relate to features.

Measured If checked, a column with measured data is shown in the flyout.

Nominal If checked, a column with nominal data is shown in the flyout.

Tolerance When checked the active tolerance is displayed in the flyout. This corresponds to the

upper (High) and lower (Low) limits shown in the Color tab of the Compare Info dialog.

Type When checked the type of feature is displayed in the flyout.

Range When checked, the range of the feature statistics object is displayed in the flyout.

Sigma When checked, the sigma of the feature statistics object is displayed in the flyout.

Points When checked, the number of points used in the feature statistics object will be displayed

in the flyout.

Radius When checked, the Radius of a circular feature will be displayed in the flyout.

(See the additional options described below)

Diameter When checked, the Diameter of a circular feature will be displayed in the flyout.

(See the additional options described below)

Length / Width When checked, the Length and Width of a length and width of a feature will be displayed

in the flyout. (This only applies to specific features)

(See the additional options described below.)


373

Total Length When checked, the total length of the feature will be displayed. (This only applies to

specific features)


Position When checked, the position of the feature will be displayed in the flyout. The label

associated with the position will depend on the type of feature (e.g. "Center" for a Circle

feature, "From" and "To" for a Line feature).

The coordinate values displayed can be selected from the drop down list.


Orientation When checked, the orientation of the feature will be displayed in the flyout. The label

associated with the orientation will depend on the type of feature (e.g. "Normal" for a

Circle feature, "Direction" for a Line feature).

The format of the orientation can be selected from the drop down list.

Color Bar When checked, a color bar will appear in the flyout.

Go / No Go When checked, the term indicating whether the value has been evaluated as being within

tolerance will be displayed in the flyout. The text used is set in the Sign Indication tab.

Deviation When checked, the associated deviation will be displayed in the flyout.

The figure below shows an example of a feature flyout with the corresponding parameter

settings.

Style

The options in this panel define how the information is presented in the flyout.

Flyout style Flyouts can have following styles:


374

Normal

In the normal flyout style, the flyout can be dragged and repositioned. A leader line can

connect the flyouts to the measured point.

In Drawing

In the In Drawing flyout style, a flyout is created right on the point of mouse click with

just an arrowhead pointing the measured point. The flyout cannot be dragged or

repositioned. Only Point number and Total deviation options are available as information.

Dimension

In the Dimension flyout style, similar to In Drawing, the flyout is right on the point of

mouse click with two arrowheads, one pointing the measured and the other the

corresponding projected point on the nominal model. This is useful for sections, as it

allows you to display dimensions between from/to points. The flyout cannot be dragged

or repositioned. Only Point number and Total deviation options are available.

Decimals This option sets the number of decimal places to be displayed for the values shown in the flyout.

Up to six decimal places can be set.

Text height This option sets the size of the text. Though the listed options are from 6 to 26, lower or higher

numbers can be set.

General

Show Units When checked, the units associated with the displayed values will be shown in the flyout.

Locked position When checked, the flyout will remain in its position when the Arrange flyout tool is used.


375

Fixed Leaderline Length When checked, the length of the leaderline remains fixed. When the object is moved, the flyouts

will move the same amount.

Leaderline When checked, a leaderline connecting the flyout to the object will be displayed.

Arrow

When checked, an arrow will be displayed on the leaderline pointing from the flyout to the

connection point.

Tip Size This sets the size of the arrow head.

Connection Point When checked, the connection point is displayed as a colored box. The color can be defined in

the Flyout Colors tab.

Background When checked, the flyout will be displayed with a white background. When unchecked the flyout

with be displayed with a transparent background.

Bounding box When checked, the flyout will be surrounded by a border.

Dimension

These options relate to the display of Dimension information.

ISO Dimension When checked, the text height is defined in mm, and the dimension text is parallel to

Dimension line.

Prevent Inverted Text This option is used to prevent text being reversed when the model is rotated in the scene.

The effect is illustrated in the figures below.

Dimension flyout created with Prevent Inverted Text

OFF

Appearance of the text when the model is rotated.


376

Dimension flyout created with Prevent Inverted Text

ON

Appearance of the text when the model is rotated.

Show Prefix This option toggles the display of the pre-fix in the flyout, if a prefix exists.

Hide with object This option refers to dimensions. When checked the dimensions will be removed if the

object to which they are attached is hidden. If unchecked, the dimensions will remain on

screen when the object is hidden.

GD&T

These options are only available when a GD&T flyout has been pre-selected. A GD&T

flyout consists of two parts: the nominal tolerances that were defined, and the results of

the evaluation.

Show Results When this option is checked ON then the results of the evaluation (red or green) will be

displayed. If this option is checked OFF, then just the nominal tolerances are shown.

Hide Nominal When this option is checked ON then the nominal tolerances will be hidden and only the

results shown.

Show Results ON

Hide Nominal OFF

Show Results OFF Show Results ON

Hide Nominal ON

Use Colors When this option is checked, the results of a GD&T evaluation will be shown using a

colored back ground; green for within the tolerance, red for out of tolerance.


377

Hide Deviation When this option is checked ON then the deviation will be hidden.

Only when within tolerance When this option is checked ON then the deviation will only be hidden if it within the

tolerance.

These options are illustrated below

Hide deviations OFF Hide deviations ON Hide deviations ON

Only when within

tolerance ON

The Flyout Colors tab

The Flyout Colors tab allows you to define the colors used in the flyout.


378

General

The parameters in this panel refer to .....

Default This allows you to set the default colours to be used for the flyout background, the border

and the text colour.

Color from deviation for compare flyouts When checked, the background color of the flyout will have the same color as the

deviation bar color.

Leader line Sets the color of the leader line.


379

Connection point Sets the color of the box defining the connection point.

Arrow tip Sets the color of the arrow tip.

Dimensions

The parameters in this panel define which colors are used in the display of dimension

flyouts.

Fixed

When this button is checked the selected colors defined for the flyout background, border

and text will be applied to all types of dimension flyouts.

Variable

When these buttons are checked, different colors can be used for the background, the

border and the text of different dimensions; i.e. whether they are between Measured to

Measured, Measured to Nominal or Nominal to Nominal.

GD&T background and Feature Compare flyouts deviation bands

Out Tolerance positive

The color used when the deviation is out of tolerance in positive direction.

Above X% of tolerance

The color used when the deviation is above the defined % of tolerance.

In Tolerance

The color used when the deviation is in tolerance

Below X% of tolerance

The color used when the deviation is below the defined % of tolerance.

Out Tolerance negative

The color used when the deviation is out of tolerance in a negative direction.

The Sign Indication tab

This tab can be used to enter a description for a deviation in flyout, such as front, back,

left, right depending on the position. Thus the string from the dialog replaces +/- sign in

front of the deviation.


380

Evaluation

These fields enable you to set the text that will be displayed when a value has been

evaluated as being in or out of tolerance. The default values are Go (In Tolerance) and No

Go (Out of Tolerance). This text will be displayed when the Go / No Go option is set in

the Flyout Properties tab.

To create a flyout

1. Select the comparison object.

2. Click the Compare Flyouts tool.

3. Define which points will have a flyout created in the Flyout Create tab.


381

4. Set the parameters describing the display of the flyout in each of the remaining tabs

(These can all be edited at a later stage with the Flyout Properties tool.)

5. If manual option is selected, click on the model to select the points.

Note: Without pre-selected model(s) or section(s) in the scene, this tool enables you to create

flyouts directly using the option ‘Manually Selected Points’.

Feature Flyouts

Create flyouts detailing information about features

This tool displays a detailed information box about the feature(s) that have been defined on

the nominal and/or measured models. The picture below shows an example.

Feature Flyouts – property sheet

All Features

Check this feature ON to create feature flyouts are for all existing features without pre-

selection. If the features are not visible, the flyouts will be created and appear in the

Inspect area in the tree, but they will not be visible until the feature itself is made visible.

All VisibleFeatures

When this button is checked ON, feature flyouts will only be created for those features

that are visible in the scene.

Note! If neither of these buttons is checked then you must select the features in the Inspection tree

To create feature flyouts for specific features

1. Select one or more nominal and/or measured features in the Inspection tree.

2. Click on the Feature Flyouts tool.

3. The flyouts will appear and can be dragged to suitable positions on the scene.

They will also appear in the Inspect area of the tree.


382

To create feature flyouts for all features

1. Click on the arrow next to the Features flyout tool to open the property sheet.

2. Check the All features button ON.


4. The flyouts of visible features will appear and can be dragged to suitable positions on the

scene.

The flyouts of ALL features will appear in the Inspect area of the tree. The flyouts will

appear in the scene when the feature is made visible.

To create flyouts for visible features

1. Click on the arrow next to the Features flyout tool to open the property sheet.

2. Check the All Visible Features button ON.


4. The flyouts of visible features will appear and can be dragged to suitable positions on the

scene.

They will also appear in the Inspect area of the tree.

To delete a feature flyout

1. Select the Mixed Object Selection Tool.

2. Click the feature flyout to delete.

3. Press the <Delete> key on keyboard.

OR

1. Select the flyout in the tree

2. Right click and select Delete.

Flyout Properties

Changes the flyout display style

This tool enables you to edit the display characteristics of an existing flyout.

Flyouts that can be edited using this tool can be created using the following tools from the

Flyouts ribbon group.

The Compare Flyouts tool

The Feature Flyouts tool

The Create Rail Flyout tool

All Flyouts are listed under the "Fyouts"node in the Inspect section of the Inspection Tree,



Compare Flyouts tool.


383

Arrange Flyouts

Automatically arranges flyouts and color bar in the current view

The Arrange Flyouts tool is used to automatically arrange all flyouts and color bars along

the sides of the screen.

Create Color Bar

Creates a deviation color bar

A color bar displays the color scale to represent the deviations between the selected

Measured and Nominal part.

Note: The Create Color Bar tool is only active when a comparison data is available in the scene.

To create a color bar

1. Select the comparison data in the Inspection tree.

2. Click on the Create Color bar tool.

A Color bar is placed in the center of the scene based on the color bar settings set in the

Color bar properties.

3. You can click and drag to relocate it to the desired location.

Note: The Arrange Flyouts tool also arranges the color bar in the scene along with other flyouts.

Color Bar Properties

Changes the deviation color bar properties

The Color bar Properties tool allows you to modify the properties of the deviation color

bar. It schedules the Color Bar Properties dialog.

The Color Bar Properties dialog box


384

Decimals

The Decimals option sets the number of decimal places for the numbers in the color bar

scale. Up to six decimal places can be set.

Text height

The Text height option sets the font size. Though the listed options are from 6 to 26, other

lower or higher numbers can be set.

Number of levels

This option allows you to set the number of values that are indicated on the color scale.

The minimum and maximum values are always displayed. The number of equally spaced

values shown between these is set by this parameter.

Color bar height / width pixel size

The Color bar height/width pixel size options set the size of the bounding box of the color

bar in screen pixel units.

Background

When this option is checked ON the color bar is displayed with a white background.

When this option is checked OFF, the color bar is displayed with a transparent

background.

Bounding box

When this option is checked ON the color bar is displayed with a border surrounding it.

When this option is checked OFF, no border is displayed.

Fixed spacing

When this option is checked ON the color bar is displayed with equidistant spacing

between the color bar values and equally large color zones. When this option is checked

OFF the values display and the color zones are scaled according to these values.

Create Rail Flyout

Creates a flyout to show information about a rail

This tool creates a flyout providing information about a selected rail.

The information presented is:

the average gap along the rail


385

the maximum gap detected and the section on which this was found

the minimum gap detected and the section on which this was found

the gap/flush parallelism which is the range between the maximum and minimum

dimension of the gap or flush respectively

number of sections contained in the rail.

To create a flyout for a rail

1. Select the rail for which the information is required.

2. Click on the Create Rail Flyout tool.

The flyout will appear on the rail

3. Drag the flyout to the required position.

Compare Rail Flyout

Creates a flyout to compare two rails

This tool generates a flyout that provides statistical comparison information about two

rails.

The information provided in the flyout is:

the average difference between the rails

the maximum difference between the rails

the minimum difference between the rails

the gap / flush center which is the maximum difference between the max gap / flush of

one section and the min gap / flush of the other section

To create a compare flyout for two rails

1. Select the pair of rails in the Inspection tree.

2. Click on the 'Compare Rail Flyout' tool.

The flyout will appear.

3. Drag the flyout to the required position.

Annotation

Creates an annotation

The Annotation tool is used to add your own annotation to a measured point, nominal or

measured features.


386

To create annotation

1. Click the Annotation tool.

2. LMB click on the item to which you wish to add the annotation.

A field showing “Type your text here” with an arrow is created.

3. Drag the pointer to position the annotation and click to fix the position.

The Annotation still is in edit mode.

4. Edit the text with relevant information and press <Enter>.

5. If needed, another point can be clicked to add additional annotations.

The annotation will be listed under the "Fyouts"node in the Inspect section of the Inspection

Tree, and can be removed by deleting it from the tree.

The characteristics (colors) of the annotation flyout can be adjusted using the Flyout Properties

tool in the Compare Ribbon Group.

Scene Annotation

Enables you to add annotation to the display scene

This tool allows you to add textual annotation to a displayed scene. This annotation is un-

related to features and models and allows you to add additional text to the scene.

To add your own annotation to a scene

1. Click on the 'Scene Annotation' tool.

2. Click in the scene where you want to add the annotation.

3. When the input field appears, click on the field.


387

4. The editing mode will be available and you can type in the text that you want to display.

5. Press <Enter> on the keyboard to accept the text.

To edit screen annotation

1. Click on the 'Scene Annotation' tool.

2. Click with MMB on the screen annotation text that you want to edit.

3. The editing mode will be available and you can type in the text that you want to display.

4. Press <Enter> on the keyboard to accept the text.

Compare Info



Reporting

The Reporting Ribbon Group contains a set of tools related to reporting.

Create Report

Creates a report using templates

The Create Report tool creates excel reports of comparison results. Depending on the

selected template, the report can contain a title block, a global view, one or more section

views, a table and statistical information.

Reports appear in the Reports section of the Inspection tree. There are a number of

operations that can be performed on generated reports accessible from the pop up menu

obtained by clicking with the RMB.


388

The Select Report Style dialog box

Template no table

This creates a report with a title block and a global view.

Template with table

This creates a report with a title block, a global view and a table.

Statistic template

This creates a report with a title block, a global view and statistical information.

Section template

This creates a report with a title block, a global view and one section view per sheet.

Template no table A3

This creates A3 size report with a title block and a global view.

Template with table A3

This creates A3 size report with a title block, a global view and a table.

Section template with view A3

This creates A3 size report with a title block, a global view and three section views per

sheet.

Section template A3

This creates A3 size report with a title block and four section views per sheet.

TBI template 1 view:

This creates TBI report with 1 section, TBI data and title block per sheet.


389

TBI template 2 view

This creates TBI report with 2 sections - respective TBI data and title block per sheet.

TBI template 3 views A3

This creates TBI report with 3 sections- respective TBI data and title block per sheet of

A3 size.

TBI template with refA3

This creates TBI report with 3 sections and a TBI section selected as reference per sheet

of A3 size.

Template with Features

This creates a report on available features.

Template with Dimensions

This creates a report on available dimensions.

Template for Rails

This creates a report on available rails.

Template for GD&T

This creates a report which contains GD&T information. It schedules the Fill Report

Settings dialog on the GD&T Information tab described below.

Report name

This field specifies the name for the report.

[OK]

The OK button starts the creation of the report. The Fill Report Settings dialog box

appears to define the report settings.

[Cancel]

This button stops the creation of the report.

The Fill Report Settings dialog box

This dialog appears when the report template has been selected. It enables you to define

the information that is to be included in the report.

It contains three tabs. The Title tab always appears. The Table tab and the TBI tab only

appear when the template contains these items.


390

The Title tab

The Title tab allows you to set the content of the title block in the report.

Drawing title

The Drawing title parameter represents the name of the report that appears as the heading

in the excel spreadsheet.

File name

The File name is derived from the mfi session file name. The user is not allowed to edit

this field.

Report name

The Report name is derived from the Report name field in the Select Report Style dialog

box.

Author name

The Author name represents name of the person responsible for the report.

Client name

The Client name represents the part’s owner name.

Article No

The Article No parameter represents the identification number of the part.

Reference

Any additional information related to the process.

Date meas

The date of measurement, to be entered by the user.


391

Date rep

The date of report. This date is derived from the pc-clock automatically. The user is not

allowed to edit this field.

Use a custom logo

The Custom logo check box is used to confirm the use of the logo set in the Logo location

field.

Logo location

The Logo location field shows the location of the logo that is currently being used. A new

logo can be set by clicking the Browse… button and use the directory search.

The Table tab

The Table tab allows you to set the content of the table in the report.

Note: The Table tab only appears when a report template with table has been selected.

Column

Select the information you wish to view in each of the columns from the drop down list.

The Pass / Fail column provides an indication whether a condition passed or failed.

The TBI tab

The TBI tab allows setting the display style for Turbine Blade Inspection report.

Note: The TBI tab is only shown when a TBI view has been selected in the Select Report Style

dialog box.


392

Chordal Length

Maximum reading on a vernier caliper obtained by rotating the section about the stacking

axis (center cross) in the jaws of the caliper.

The stacking axis is normal to the section plane and goes through the origin.

Maximum Thickness

Maximum diameter circle that can be fitted internally to the section.


393

Leading Edge Thickness

This is the thickness of the section at a point predefined at a fixed distance from the LE

along the camber line.

Trailing Edge Thickness

This is the thickness of the section at a point predefined as a fixed distance from the TE

along the camber line.

Bow, Displacement

Bow and Displacement are the shifts in the vertical/horizontal axis of the center cross

after best fitting.

Twist

The angle of rotation of the section about the stacking axis after best fitting to nominal

axis.

DZ angle

Angle between a line drawn between the two points p1 and p2 (shown in above image)

and the X or Y-axis.

Displacement Factor

User defined Factor relating to bow, displacement and twist of 3 selected sections.

Select Reference

Select the reference section for the ‘Difference in Bow’ and ‘Difference in Displacement’

computation.

Select Measured

Select the measured section for the ‘Difference in Bow’ and ‘Difference in Displacement’

computation. The difference should indicate the difference from the Measured to the

Reference.

The GD&T Information tab

This tab appears when the GD&T template has been selected.


394

Column

Select the information you wish to view in each of the columns from the drop down list.

High Resolution Pictures

When this option is checked ON, the report will contain high resolution pictures. This

allows using you to use font size 4 in the application which means that the flyouts are too

small to read on screen but in the report they will be readable. This option is especially

useful to include a large amount of information on A3-size reports.

1:1 Pictures

When this option is checked, the screen shot in the report will be in scale 1 to 1, resulting

in printouts that allow distances to be measured with a ruler.

Show this dialog box during Automation playback

When this option is checked, this dialog will appear when automation is about to make a

report, allowing the user to edit the report table and general information.

[OK]

The OK button starts the creation of the report using the settings in this dialog box. Excel

will start, showing the report. The report and its contained objects will be added to the

Reports node in the Inspect tree.

Note: that a default Excel macro (autorun_metris_macro) is run each time that a report is created.

This default macro can be adapted by users to run their own macro name

[Cancel]

This button stops the creation of the report.


395

To create a report

1. Click the Create Report tool.

The Save as dialog appears in which you can specify where the report will be saved.

2. The Select Report Style dialog box appears.

3. Enter a name for the report in the Report name text box.

4. Select the Template required.

5. Click [OK] .

The Fill Report Settings dialog box appears.

The number of tabs in this dialog will depend on the type of template selected.

6. Fill in the required information for the Title tab.

7. If the Table or the TBI tabs appear fill in the appropriate information.

8. Click [OK].

Excel will open showing the report. For all subsequent reports, the newly created report is

added as a new work sheet in the Excel report file. The report and its contained objects

will be added to the Reports node in the Inspect tree.

Note that there are a number of options to manage the reports in the Inspection tree using

the RMB.

9. The report can be printed using the functions provided in Excel.

Note : There are a number of operations that can be performed on reports using the RMB on the

reports in the Inspection tree. This includes an option "Restore Report State" which restores a

report to its original state when modifications have been made.

Restore Report State

Restores the scene to correspond to the state in a report

This tool enables you to restore the scene to a state that corresponds to that of a selected

report. It is available when a report has been created. Reports appear in the Reports

section of the Inspection tree. There are a number of operations that can be performed on

generated reports accessible from the pop up menu obtained by clicking with the RMB.


396

The Select Report dialog box

List of reports

Select the report that you want to restore the scene to correspond with, from the current

list of reports available.

To restore the scene to correspond to a report

Reports must have created and be available in the Reports node of the Inspection tree.

1. Click on the Restore Report State tool.

2. Select the report that you wish to see the corresponding state.

3. Click [OK].

The scene will be restored to the state that corresponds to the selected report.

Update Report

Updates a report with new items in view and table

The Update Report View and Table tool updates an existing report using the status of the

current session. It can also be used to re-create lost Excel reports.



obtained by clicking with the RMB. The option "Restore Report State" which restores a



397

The Select Report dialog box

To update a report

1. Select the reports to be updated or recreated.

2. Click [OK].

The report will be updated with the status of the current session, and will be presented in Excel.

Edit or recreate report

Edits an existing report’s Title and Table settings, or recreates a lost report

This tool allows you to edit a report.



obtained by clicking with the RMB. The option "Restore Report State" which restores a


To edit a report

1. Click on the Edit or recreate tool.

2. The Select report dialog appears in which you can select the report to be edited.

3. Click [OK] to select the report.

4. The Select Report Style dialog appears in which you can define all the parameters relating

to the report.


398

Object Information

Allows you to fill out the information required in a selected object information template.

This tool enables you to complete the information set out in an object information template.

It schedules the Object Information dialog.

See also : Defining object templates

The Object Information dialog

Template

By default this shows the currently selected template from those that have been defined.

[Other]

Clicking this button enables you to select another template. If password protection has

been set then you will need to enter the password in order to access a different template.

If the correct password is entered then a dialog appears in which defined templates can be

selected.

When the [OK] button is clicked a new template is selected, all existing fields are

replaced by those in the new template.

Object information

This contains a list of fields defined in the selected template. The value for each of the fields can

be filled in by the user.


399

[OK]

Saves the written information in the current mfi, ready to be used by Report Features tool

(now still called ‘Spec Inspection 8.3 - Reporting - Features in DMIS out.doc’)

[Close]

Closes the dialog.

See also: Defining object templates

To fill in template information

1. Select the required template if necessary by clicking on [Other].

2. Enter the password if necessary.

3. Select the template from the drop down list then click [OK].

4. Fill in the description for each of the fields.

5. Click [OK] when the information is complete.

Report Features

Generates a report output file with compared features defined in a template

This tool generates a dmo (DMIS Out) or a DFQ-QSTAT or a TXT file (depending on the

selected file format), with a header as defined in Object information template and the

descriptions as filled out using the Object Information tool. This tool requires that you have

feature comparison objects available.

Report Features property sheet

Export using dmi file

The dmi file contains a list of features to be reported. When this option is on, these

features will be reported, regardless of the user selection. When this option is off, only

user selected features will be exported.

Export Object Information

When this option is checked the Object Information is exported in the header. When

unchecked, only the feature content is reported.

[Report features]

This writes a file containing the information. It schedules a "Save As" dialog, allowing

you specify a file name and format. The supported file formats are :

DMIS Out

DFQ-QSTAT file

TXT Object Info File


400

To create a feature output file

1. Feature comparison objects need to have been created and be available in the Inspect

section of the data tree.

2. Select the required feature comparison objects in the Inspection tree.

3. Click on the Report Features tool and open the property sheet.

4. Select the required options

5. Click [Report Features].

6. In the "Report Features as" enter the name of the file.

7. Select the file format from the drop down list.

8. Click [Save].

Dimensions

The Dimensions Ribbon Group contains commands to add dimensions to the drawing.

Linear Perpendicular

Determines the true linear dimension between two points or between a point and defined direction

This tool determines and displays the true 3D (linear) distance between two points or

between the point and a line/axis or the origin of the axis system. The distance can be

determined between any two points on the measured model or two points on nominal

features.

Options are provided to allow you to select a point on that section that lies within a radius

of a user-selected point.

The Linear Perpendicular property sheet

Towards

The options provided here allow you to choose how the second point will be defined. The

options provided are:


401

Second click

in this case the dimension will be determined between any two points defined by mouse

clicks. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled "Dim2pt".

Origin

in this case the linear dimension between a selected point and the origin of the coordinate

system will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled

"Dim2pt".


in this case the perpendicular dimension between the selected point and the selected axis

will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled

"DimPerpendicular".

List of features

in this case the dimension will be determined between the selected point and the

perpendicular direction towards the selected feature. The dimension will appear in the

Inspection tree labelled "DimPerpendicular".

Find Extreme

Check this option ON to determine the dimension of a point that lies within a defined



Search Radius



Target



figure below.

To determine the true 3D distance between two points


2. Select the option "Second Click" from the Towards menu.


402












To determine the true 3D distance between a point and a line


2. Select the required option from the Towards menu. This can be one of the coordinate axes

or a feature.









Note: The Bi-directional arrow labeling the measurement would relocate and stick to their axes

when the scene view is tumbled.

Aligned Parallel

Creates dimensions that are aligned with an axis or a feature

This tool determines the distance between two points in a specified direction. The points

can be any two selected point in the measured model, or selected points on features in the

nominal model. The direction in which the dimension is measured can be selected and

includes the model and the screen axes as well as parallel to defined features.

Specific options are available for measuring the dimension of a section that allow you to

select a point that lies within a radius of the user-selected point.


403

The Aligned Parallel property sheet

Parallel To

The options in this drop down list allow to select the direction in which the dimension

will be measured. The following options are provided:

Automatic XYZ

this option enables you to interactively select the direction for the dimension to match the

screen axes.


the dimension will be aligned with the X, Y or Z axis and the name of the axis will be

indicated on the flyout.

List of defined features

in these cases, the dimension will be determined in a direction that is parallel to the

selected feature.

Find Extreme

Check this option on to determine the dimension of a point that lies within a defined



Search Radius



Target



figure below.


404

To measure the distance between two points

1. Click on the Aligned/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.

2. Select the direction in which the dimension will be measured from the list available in the

Parallel To drop down list.







5. Drag the pointer to position the distance measurement along the required axis.

If you have selected the option Automatic XYZ, you can adjust the dimension presented

as you drag.



7. Click on a new point to create another dimension.

Gap-Step Dimension

Creates a gap-step dimension by indicating 3 points

In any given process there will be an ideal separation (gap) and ideal relative depth (step)

that was specified at design time. The manufactured product however will deviate from this

ideal by a varying amount. The figure below gives a cross section through two flat panels,

showing the definition of gap and step.

The Gap-Step Dimension tool provides a manual way of measuring the relative position of

two panels in an assembled product. This tool works best on sections across the panels.

The Gap – Step Dimension property sheet

Use LSQ Fit




405

To measure the gap between two panels

1. Select a good view on the section or measurement (for example using the View section

tool).

2. Indicate the line to represent one side of the gap. This is done by clicking with the LMB

on two positions along this line. The gap dimension is displayed as a bi-directional arrow

connecting the two yellow squares with the distance labeled.

3. Move the pointer to the other side of the gap and click the LMB on the location where the

gap needs to be measured to fix the gap dimension.


squares with the distance labeled.

4. Optionally drag the mouse pointer to relocate the measurement labels and click to fix the

label.

The dimension appears on the data tree.

Gap Flush Caliper

Use of predefined calipers to determine Gap and Step dimensions in a repeatable manner along a rail

Gap - Step measurements are common practice in applications such as Sheet metal and

Aeronautics. They are used to describe the relation of adjacent parts.

In almost all most cases, this is still a manual operation, where people use plastic

‘calipers’ to check the gap, while a hand-sweep checks for the step. Each measurement is

made on multiple sections along a rail. A rail consists of multiple sections and contains the

statistics of these Gap – Step measurements. This tool allows the use of predefined calipers

to determine Gap and Step dimensions in a repeatable manner along a rail.

It schedules the Gap-Flush Dimension dialog that contains three tabs.


406

Gap-Flush Dimension dialog

Dimension tab

Nominal


Measured


Manual

This option allows the user to manually indicate the Gap – Step dimension points.

Least Square Fit

When this option is checked all points between the first two points are used to fit a line

Caliper

This allows the user to select a caliper from the list of available calipers

Use on Rail



407


This tolerance value allows you to ignore small gaps in the sections when positioning the

caliper.

Gap Caliper Definition tab

Caliper

[Save]



[Load]



Dimension



408

Angles


Flush Caliper Definition

Caliper

[Save]

This opens a Save As dialog and saves the current caliper to disc and renames the


[Load]



Dimension


Angles



409

Reverse dimension sign

When this option is checked, it reverses the sign of the flush dimensions used during the

detection of the dimension.

To create a gap / flush using a caliper

1. Use the Create Section tool, in the FeatureFitting or the Compare toolbars to create

sections and add them to a rail.

2. Click on the Create Gap / Flush using Calipers tool.

3. Define the Caliper required by clicking on the Gap Caliper Definition tab or the Gap

Caliper Definition tab, or click [Load] to load a previously saved caliper.

4. Click [Save] to save the defined caliper.


6. Click Calipers.

7. Check the 'Use on Rail' then select the rail that the rail on which the caliper will be

placed.

8. Click [Dimension].

The caliper is automatically positioned on the rail/section(s) and computes the distances defined

by the caliper.

When used on Gap or Step dimensions, the caliper information is stored and visible in the

Information dialog.

Radius

Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs

This tool measures the radius of the circle and arc features that were created in the

Nominal or Measured task.



Fit is used to fit a circle over all the points.

To determine the radius of a circular feature


2. Click on the center point of a circle. A line arrow passing through the center of the circle

with a single arrow on the circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.



410

To determine a radius using the Least Squares Fit






A line arrow passing through the center of the circle with a single arrow on the

circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.


To measure the radius between two points








Diameter

Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs

The Diameter tool measures the diameter of the circle and arc features that were created

on the Nominal or Measured models.



Fit is used to fit a circle over all the points. When the Pick tool is used, the circle will be

created through the picked points.

To determine the diameter of a circular feature


2. Click on the center point of a circle. A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and

connecting the circumference of the circle is created with a label showing the distance of

the diameter.



To determine a diameter using the Least Squares Fit





411



A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and connecting the circumference of the

circle is created with a label showing the distance of the diameter.



To measure the diameter between two points









Angle

Creates an angular dimension

This interactive tool is used to compute the angle between two lines created on the

measured object. The angle shown is always less than 90 deg. Lines are made longer if

necessary. Use this tool on planer points (intersecting lines/sections), otherwise end points

of the angle will not necessarily be on the line.

The Angle property sheet

Use LSQ Fit



To create an Angular Dimension

1. Click on the Angular tool.

If you are measuring a section, you can click on the arrow to open the property sheet and

use the Use LSQ Fit option described above.

2. Pick a point on the measured object.

A dynamic preview of the line used for dimension will appear with one end anchored at

the selected point and the other end at the current cursor location. Any movement of the

cursor will immediately update the line preview.

3. Pick second point, which will define the first line.


412

4. Pick a third point. This will generate a new line starting at the second point and reveal the

angle between the two lines.

5. Move the cursor at this position to update the dimension.

6. Click on a fourth point to define the angle between 2 objects (lines).

7. Click on the label to fix the position of text.

View Section

Shows and modifies the Section view for the Section report, allowing for fast dimensioning

The 2D Section View command is used for dimensioning and reporting of a section created

in the Compare task . It schedules the View Section dialog box to set appropriate views.

The View Section dialog box

Rotate through angle

This button applies a rotation that is entered in the input field.

Note: Positive values rotate the view in 90 degrees clockwise and negative values rotate the section

view in counter clockwise.

Rotate through 90 degrees counterclockwise

Rotate the section view 90 degrees counterclockwise.

Rotate through 90 degree clockwise

Rotate the section view 90 degrees clockwise.

Flip vertically.

Flip the Section view vertically.

Flip horizontally.

Flip the Section view horizontally.


413

[X] [Y] [Z]

These buttons set the selected axis vertically in the scene.

Scale

Adapts the magnification of the section in the scene.

[Default Scale]

This restores the magnification scale to the default magnification so that it fits in the

scene.

[Pick] / [Restore]

The [Pick] button provides the view of the selected section. The [Restore] button returns

the view to the complete models.

[Apply to All]

Assigns the current settings to all sections.

To view sections

1. Select a section in the Inspection tree if required.

2. Click on the View Section tool

3. Select a different section if required and click [Pick]

4. Set the parameters defining the View.

The view will be updated.

Export

This Ribbon Group contains a set of tools that enable you to export a variety of objects to

file.

Features

Exports features to a file

This tool enables you to export features to MFF (Metris Feature Files) or TXT (Delimited

ASCII Files) or IGS, IGES (Interop) files. Features that have been exported to an MFF file

can then be imported using the Import Features tool.

It schedules the "Export features as" dialog in which you can specify the file in which the

features will be exported.

If you select to export the features to a Delimited ASCII file, you will be presented with

the Export Features dialog in which you can select the specific feature data to be exported

and the Delimiter (Tab or Comma) to be used.


414

Note that Failed features can be exported using the specific Failed Features tool in the Export

ribbon group in the Report tab.

To export features

1. Select the Features to be exported (in the tree).


3. In the "Export features as" dialog enter a name for the file in which the features are to

stored.

4. If the output format you have chosen is ASCII delimited, select the feature information to

be exported and the delimiter to be used.

5. Click [Save].

Section Planes

Exports selected section planes to a file

The Section Planes tool exports selected compared sections to a text file (txt). The Save

Sections as dialog box will prompt for a file name.

The exported sections can later be used on similar parts for comparing sections.

Section/Mesh borders

Exports sections or mesh borders

This tool allows you to export sections or mesh borders in various formats.

The formats supported are:

Igs Files (*.igs)

Iges Files (*.iges)

The IGES sections should inherit the color of the sections and mesh borders in Inspection.

-For created sections, this is the color of the created section.

-For compare sections this is the color of the measured section of the compare section.

Delimited ASCII files (*.asc)

the section/border is exported in the ascii format, listing the xyz coordinates of each point.

It schedules the "Export Sections / Mesh Borders as" dialog in which you can specify the location

and the name of the file containing the selected items.

Deviations

Export tabulated deviations to file

This tool allows you to export calculated deviations from a compare information object

into a text file for further treatment. All pre-selected compare objects can be exported.

It schedules the Select output file dialog box which will prompt for a file name. It then

schedules the Export Deviations dialog.


415

Export Deviations dialog box

Selected

These fields display the number of selected compare objects according to the item

selected from the Selection field, as well as the total number of available.

Selection

The following items can be used for selection.

Existing Flyouts the points to which a flyout is connected.

All points all point of the compare object.

Worst the defined number of points with the worst deviation.

Worst x positive and negative points the defined number of points with the worst deviation in both senses.

Points outside a defined proportion of points whose value lies outside the range.

Information

The following parameters can set:

Statistics This exports a header-type of information with all the numerical values as displayed in

the Compare Information dialog on the first page ‘Numbers’.

Point number Each line with information of a point starts with the point number.

Measured point The X, Y and Z coordinate of the measured point.

Nominal point The X, Y and Z coordinate of the projected point.


416

XYZ deviations The X, Y and Z deviation of the point.

3D deviation The 3D deviation of the point.

Tolerances The tolerances imported and used in Directional compare.

To export a deviation

1. Select a compare object in the data tree.

2. Click on the Export Deviation tool.

3. Select a file name and location where the exported data is to be located.

4. Click [Save].

5. In the Export Deviations dialog, select the data to be exported.

6. Select the information to be included.

7. Click [OK].

The file will be generated. The file name will be {the given name}-dev.txt.

Feature Compare Info

Exports Feature Compare Info to as user defined file

This tool enables you to export feature compare information object to a specific customer

defined file format. It schedules a file selection dialog in which you can define the location

and the file type.

To export feature compare info to a file

1. Select the features you wish to export. If no specific features are selected, then all features

will be exported.


3. In the "Export Feature Deviations as" dialog enter the name for the file and the file type.

4. Click [Save].

Failed Features

Exports failed feature information to a user defined file

This tool enables you to export failed feature information to a specific customer defined file

format. It schedules a file selection dialog in which you can define the location and the file

type. Failed features are those that failed to be detected using the Auto Dimension tool in

the Feature Fitting toolbar in the Measured task .

To export failed feature information


2. In the Export Failed Features dialog select the input file and specify the output file type.

3. Click [Export].


417

All Nominal features that did not produce a measured feature will be exported.

418

Handheld Measurement - Inspection (STL Based) workflow

The STL based workflow deals with meshes as primary Nominal models. It consists of the

following tasks.

Nominal task

The Nominal task consists of the following ribbon groups:

Import Nominal

The tools in this group are described below.

Feature Fitting

Detect / Fit Feature is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.

Export Features is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.

Create Section is described in Solid Based Workflow - Compare Task - Compare.

Intersection is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.

Project Object is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.

Detect Edge is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.

Mesh Border is described in Solid Based Workflow - Measured Task - Feature Fitting.

Flip feature is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.

GD&T Dimensions

All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - GD&T

Dimensions.

Cut / Merge

All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Measured Task - Cut /

Merge.

Filter / Mesh

All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Measured Task - Filter /

Mesh.

Modify Nominal

All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Measured Task - Modify

Measured.


419

Handheld Measurements task

All of the ribbon groups and tools contained in this task are described in the

Solid Based Workflow - Handheld Measurements task

Measured task


Solid Based Workflow - Measured task

Align task


Solid Based Workflow - Align task

Compare task


Solid Based Workflow - Compare task

Report task


Solid Based Workflow - Report task.

Import Nominal Ribbon Group

The Import Nominal toolbar contains commands to import the nominal point cloud /mesh

models.

It consists of the following tools :

Import - described below.

Import Features - described below.

Solid to Mesh - described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Import Nominal.

Add to Nominal - described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Import Nominal.


420

Import

Imports a point cloud / mesh

This tool imports a new point cloud or a mesh from a variety of file types and places the

object in the nominal section of the Inspection data tree.

The Import dialog

Files of type

You can import files of the following types:

Delimited ASCII: any ASCII file where the X, Y and Z values are separated by a

delimiting character ISO: a file with ISO codes (such as G00, G01, ...)

STL: an ASCII or binary STL (stereo lithography) file

IGES: points in an IGES file

RIS: a Range Image Standard file.

Hyscan: a Hyscan measurement file.

Metris Base file (mbf-format).

Kube files (sab2 format)

Metris Focus files (*.mfi)


421

The options available depend on the type of file being imported.

Import as a single point cloud

You can import several files at the same time. All files you select must be of the same

type. If you check the Import as a single point cloud checkbox, a single point cloud will

be created from the selected files. If you leave this checkbox unchecked, each file will be

imported as a separate point cloud.

Import as Feature points

This option allows you to import cloud points directly as features.

Use prefilter 1 out of

During import you can filter the point cloud by checking the Use prefilter 1 out of

checkbox. Enter the Prefilter step in the Prefilter’s edit box. Only one out of Prefilter step

points of the point cloud(s) in the file will be visible in static display.

Note: If you use a prefilter when importing a STL file, the mesh will be discarded.

Merge all point clouds

If the Merge all point clouds option is checked ON, all the selected point clouds are

merged into one point cloud and only one object is added into the Measured tree. If

Merge all point clouds option is checked OFF, all the point clouds are imported one by

one, and a separate object is created for each point cloud in the Measured tree.

When the importation is started, ISO, STL, IGES, RIS Hyscan, Metris Base and Kube files are

directly imported. For Delimited ASCII files, the Import Delimited ASCII dialog appears. This

dialog has three tabs that must be stepped through in order to complete the importation.

The General tab

The General tab shows a preview of your file. Each line in the preview is preceded between

brackets by its line number in the file. By default the preview only shows you the beginning

and end of the file. If you press the Show full preview button, the preview will expand to

show the whole file.

Note that it may take some time to view a large file.

You can also set the following options in the General tab:

Skip first lines

Inspection will not read the first lines in the file (for example the file header)


422

Skip last lines

Skip last lines: Inspection will not read the last lines in the file (for example the file

footer)

The Delimiters tab

The columns for the X, Y and Z values in a delimited ASCII file are separated by one or

more delimiting characters.

Delimiters

Selection of delimiters indicating the columns in the file.

The Treat consecutive delimiters as one

This checkbox, allows you to collapse consecutive delimiters into one.

Data preview

View if the contents of the file, with columns separated by ‘|’ characters.

The Columns tab

The Columns tab allows you to set what columns in your file will be used for the X, Y and Z

coordinates. For each coordinate you can choose to read it from a column in the file, or to

keep it fixed at a certain value.

To import a point cloud / mesh

1. Click the Import Point cloud/ Mesh tool to open the Import dialog box.

2. Select the File Type in the drop down box at the bottom of the dialog.

3. Select one or more files and click the [Open] button.


423

4. If the Import delimited ASCII dialog box pops up, modify the parameters under General,

Delimiters or Columns tabs if needed and click the OK button when done.

The point cloud(s) / meshes are imported and automatically placed under the data node of the

Inspection tree located in the Nominal window.

Import Features

Imports features that have been exported using the Export features tool.

This tool enables you to import features that have been exported using the Export Features

tool. It schedules the Import Metris Focus Files dialog in which you can browse for the file

that contains the exported features.

The file types supported are:

- .TXT (client feature files)

- .MFF (Metris feature files)

- CSV (CSV feature files - Audiplan)

- INS (INS feature files - Audiplan)

The imported features appear in the nominal tree list and can be seen on the structure.

To import nominal features

1. Click on the Import Nominal Features tool.

2. In the "Import Metris Focus files" dialog browse for the file in which features have been

exported using the Export Features tool.

3. Click [Import].

424

Handheld Measurements - Inspection Turbine Blades workflow

This workflow deals with solids as primary Nominal models and contains specific functions for

turbine blade inspection.

Nominal task


Solid Based Workflow - Nominal task

Handheld Measurements task


Solid Based Workflow - Handheld Measurements task

Measured task


Solid Based Workflow - Measured task

Align task


Solid Based Workflow - Align task

Turbine Blade task

The Nominal task consists of the following ribbon groups:

Compare

All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Compare Task - Compare.

Sections

All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Compare Task - Sections.

Construct

All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Compare Task - Construct.

TBI

The tools in this group are described below.


425

Report task


Solid Based Workflow - Report task.

TBI Ribbon Group

The TBI Ribbon Group contains commands for turbine blade inspection and flyouts.

Turbine Inspect

The Turbine Inspect tool calculates specific turbine blade parameters from sections

and a specific section alignment. The specific section alignment is possible for measured

sections and their corresponding solid, and for section compare objects (in which case no

solid required).


426

Turbine Inspect dialog box


427

Selection

When the dialog is opened, the first available section or section compare object is

automatically selected.

You can use the arrow buttons at the bottom of the dialog to select the

next and previous section or section compare object in the Inspection tree.

If no pre-selection of sections or section compare objects was made before the dialog was

open, then these arrows will enable you to step through all the available objects. If a

number of sections or section compare objects were pre-selected then these arrows will

step through just the pre-selected objects.

Dimensions

Dimensions associated with the current section are displayed in the Dimension Results

area.

Fields are provided to allow you to adapt the parameters that will be used for computing

dimensions associated with the current section. When the Turbine Inspect tool is selected,

the selected object is orientated so that it aligns with axes as shown below.

Turbine Blade dimensions

The parameters that can be set are:

Trailing Edge position

Left or Right - these buttons are used to indicate which on side of the section the

distance is to be taken. The orientation of the section is always as indicated in the

figure above when the Turbine Inspect tool is selected.

Distance from L/E

Distance from the leading edge: required for computing the Leading Edge

Thickness.

Distance from T/E

Distance from trailing edge: required for computing the Trailing Edge Thickness.

Chord length at:

DZ angle - chord length at the current DZ angle.

A specified DZ angle. When this option is selected, the chord length is computed

based on this value.


428

Results (Dimensions)

The dimensions described below are computed when ever a selection is made.

Chord: Maximum reading on a vernier caliper obtained by rotating the section about the

stacking axis (indicated by the circle with a cross) in the jaws of the caliper.

Max Thick: diameter of the largest inscribed circle to the section.

L/E thick: the leading edge thickness is the thickness of the section at a point predefined

as a fixed distance from the LE along the camber line (line joining centers of adjoining

circles fitted internally to the section). The trailing edge must be indicated as being on the

left or the right.

T/E thick: the trailing edge thickness is the thickness of the section at a point predefined

as a fixed distance from the TE along the camber line.

DZ angle: Angle between the chord line and the X axis.

[Compute]

This calculates the dimensions listed above using the defined parameters. For a compare

section, it calculates the dimensions of measured section; for a measured section it

calculates the dimensions of the available section.

Alignment

Name

The name with which the alignment will be saved.

Keep True Position Data

When this option is checked a copy of the section is made. It is the copy that is aligned,

the original will be unchanged.

2D Best Fit

Performs a best fit of the section to the solid or the compare measured section to the

nominal section in case of a section compare object.

Minimal Improvement

The external stop criteria for Best Fit command.

[Apply]

This button starts the Best Fit alignment. The results are displayed in the Results area.

Manual

This area provides tools to manually align the section to the solid, or the compare

measured section to the nominal section inside the compared section.


429

Displacement and Bow dimensions

These up and down buttons, as well as the keyboard arrow keys, can be used to

adjust the Bow.

The left and right buttons, as well as the keyboard arrow keys, can be

used to adjust the Displacement.

The + and - buttons, as well as the keyboard + and - keys, can be used to adjust the

Twist by rotating the section in the plane, around the stacking axis of the current section.

[Set]

Click on this button to define the adjustments that will be made with the buttons in terms

of Bow/Displacement (shift) and Twist (rotation).

Results

The results area shows the results of the alignment, expressed in terms of the

Displacement, Bow and Twist.

Bow and Displacement are the shifts perpendicular/parallel to the chord length.

Twist is the angle of rotation of the section about the stacking axis.

[Restore]

Restores the section to its original location before the dialog box was opened.

These buttons are used to select the previous or next section or compare section. If no

pre-selection of sections or section compare objects was made before the dialog was

open, then these arrows will enable you to step through all the available objects. If a

number of sections or section compare objects were pre-selected then these arrows will

step through just the pre-selected objects.

[Close]

Closes the dialog.


430

To align a turbine blade section

1. If you wish to work with just a selection of sections, pre-select them in the tree first.

2. Click on the Turbine Inspect tool.

The Turbine Inspect dialog will appear. The first section in the list, or the first pre-

selected section will appear in the Selection field.

3. Enter a name for the alignment if you want a name other than the default name.

4. If you wish to make a copy of the section that is to be aligned, check the "Keep True

Position Data" button. The original section will be unchanged.

5. You can perform an alignment in two ways:

2D Best fit

Enter the required Minimal Improvement and click [Apply].

Manually

Use the buttons to manually shift the section along the Displacement and the Bow

directions and rotate it around the stacking axis.

6. The results of the alignment will be displayed in the Results field.

7. Click on [Restore] if the alignment is not as expected.

8. Click on the Previous and Next buttons at the bottom of the dialog to

view the other available sections. The selected item is highlighted in the tree.

To calculate turbine blade dimensions

1. The dimensions associated with that section will be displayed in the Dimensions- Results

fields.

2. Change the parameters used to determine the dimensions if necessary.

- You can adjust the distance from the left or right leading edge at which you wish to

compute the blade thickness.

- You can define a specific DZ angle at which the chord length will be calculated.

3. Click [Compute] to compute the new dimensions for the current selection.

4. Click on the Previous and Next buttons at the bottom of the dialog to

view the other available sections. The selected item is highlighted in the tree.

Turbine Blade Flyout

The Turbine Blade Flyout tool creates flyouts on sections with TBI information. The

following parameters are shown in the flyout:


431

Bow & Displacement

Bow and Displacement are the shifts in the vertical/horizontal axis of the center cross

after best fitting.

Twist

The angle of rotation of the section about the stacking axis after best fitting to nominal

axis.

Chordal Length

Maximum reading on a vernier caliper obtained by rotating the section about the stacking

axis (center cross) in the jaws of the caliper.

The stacking axis is normal to the section plane and goes through the origin.

Maximum Thickness

Maximum diameter circle that can be fitted internally to the section.

Trailing Edge Thickness

TE Thickness is the thickness of the section at a point predefined as a fixed distance from

the TE along the camber line (line joining centers of adjoining circles fitted internally to

the section).

DZ angle

Angle between a line drawn between the two points p1 and p2 (shown in above image)

and the X or Y-axis.

To create flyouts

1. Compute the dimension of compare section or measured section using ‘Compute’ button

from ‘Turbine Inspect’ tool.

2. Activate Turbine Blade Flyout and click on computed section.

3. A flyout mentioning TBI details is shown.

4. If TBI data for section is not computed then a flyout as ‘No tbi info found’ is shown.

432

The Information dialog

This document describes the fields that appears in a number of informational dialogs.

These dialogs are:

The Attributes dialog

The Global Comparison dialog

The Section Information dialog box

The Directional Compare Information dialog

The Feature Statistics Information dialog

The Golden Template statistics dialog

The Curvature Radius dialog

The Wall thickness dialog

There are five tabs in these dialogs. The tabs that are available will depend on the dialog and

whether a single or multiple comparisons are selected.

The Numbers tab

The Numbers tab shows statistical information about the comparison. This parameters on the

Numbers tab are listed below for the following dialog boxes:

The Global Comparison Information dialog box


The Directional Compare Information dialog box

The Compare Edges dialog box

The Feature Statistics Information dialog box

that also displays additional information.

See also:

The Curvature Radius dialog

The Wall thickness dialog


433

Number of valid Points represents the number of points actually used for compare.

Maximum Deviation

represents the largest positive distance between a compared point and the nominal model.

Minimum Deviation represents the smallest distance or the largest negative distance between a compared point

and the nominal model.

Range represents the range of distances of the measured data to the nominal model.

Mean Deviation represents the average of the distances of the measured data to the nominal model.

Sigma represents the statistical sigma of the distances of the measured data to the nominal

model.

Root Mean Square represents the statistical root mean square of the distances of the measured data to the

nominal model.

The Curvature Radius Information dialog - Numbers tab

This dialog contains the addition parameters listed below:

Number of Valid Points represents the number of points actually used for compare.

Maximum Radius represents the maximum local radius of a point cloud or mesh.

Minimum Radius represents the minimum local radius of a point cloud or mesh.

Range represents the difference of Maximum Radius and the Minimum radius.

The Wall Thickness Information dialog – Numbers tab

This dialog contains the following additional parameters:

Maximum Thickness represents the global maximum distance to the opposite wall.

Minimum Thickness represents the global minimum distance to the opposite wall.

Range represents the difference between the Maximum and the Minimum Thickness.


434

The Colors tab

The Colors tab shows the colors and tolerances used in the display of the comparison result.

This tab appears in the following dialog boxes:




The Curvature Radius Information dialog box

The Wall Thickness Information dialog box


[Save]

This saves the current color scale.

[Open]

Click on the Open button to restore the already saved color scale.


435

Default colors

Check this button to use or switch back to the default colors.

Note : the values set for the limits of the color range correspond to the upper and lower Compare

Tolerance values set as an attribute of the object.

Reverse colors

This button will reverse the order of the colors with the scale values.

Manual colors

If the colors are changed using the dropdown lists, the manual colors check box will be

checked on.

Discrete

Check the discrete button to use discrete colors. For discrete option, there are 16 colors

available.

Smooth

Check the Smooth button to use smooth colors. For smooth option, there are 15 colors

available.

[Fill]

If the slider is used to select more colors, the color boundaries are not automatically

filled. The color boundaries can be specified manually or automatically using the Fill

button. The Fill button will not modify the color boundaries whose check box is checked

on.

[Apply]

This button updates the comparison information object in your drawing.

To adjust the colors used to display information

1. To adjust the number of colors being used, use the slider on the left.

2. To define specific values to colors, click the check box in front of the color.

3. To change the color, select a new color from the drop down list.

4. Click [Fill] to adjust the colors.

5. Click [Apply] to update the scale in the drawing.

6. Click [Save] to save the defined color scale.

The Interrogate tab

The Interrogate tab shows the number of points with values in specific ranges.

This tab appears in the following dialog boxes:




The Curvature Radius Information dialog box


436



Points

The Points section lists how many points lie inside or outside the specified bounds, both

in absolute number as in percentage. The bounds can be modified in the edit boxes.

[Recalculate]

The Recalculate button recalculates the number of points that lie inside or outside the

specified bounds. Press this button after modification of these bounds.

Color groups

The Color groups section contains a pie chart and a bar displaying how many points lie

between the color boundaries set on the Color page.

Apply

Press the [Apply] button to update the comparison information object in your drawing.

The Drawstyle tab

The Drawstyle tab shows the drawstyle options for the selected object display.

This information applies to the:


437

The Comparison Information dialog box




See also :

The Section information dialog

The Edge information dialog

The Attributes dialog

General drawstyle panel

Points Check the Points check box to display the comparison information as colored points.

Lines Check the Lines check box to display the comparison information as colored lines.

Deviation scale factor

The scale factor of the deviation lines can be set and modified using the Deviation scale

factor edit box and slider. The scale factor gives the amplification of the deviation lines

on the screen with respect to their real length. Initially, the range of the slider bar is

limited to 100. A larger scale factor can be typed in the edit box, followed by pressing the

Apply button. The range of the slider bar will automatically expand.

Note: the Deviation scale factor edit box and slider is only enabled if the Lines drawstyle is chosen

The Section Information dialog – Drawstyle tab

This dialog contains an additional Section drawstyle panel which is only visible for

section comparison information. The General drawstyle panel is the same as described

above.


438

Measured section

Check the Measured section check box on to show the measured section. In the

corresponding drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the

measured section, check this check box off.

Nominal section

Check the Nominal section check box to show the nominal section. In the corresponding

drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the nominal section,

check this check box off.

Tolerance bands

Check the Tolerance bands check box to show the section tolerance bands as offsets from

the nominal section. To hide the tolerance bands, check this check box off.

Bounding rectangle

Check the Bounding rectangle check box to show the bounding rectangle of the section.

In the corresponding drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the

bounding rectangle, check this check box off.

The Edge Information dialog – Drawstyle tab

Arrows

Check the Arrows check box to display the comparison information as colored arrows.

The arrow size can be edited using the text boxes as shown above.

Measured border

Check the Measured border check box on to show the measured border. In the

corresponding drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the

measured border, check this check box off.

Projected border

Check the Projected border check box to show the Projected border. In the corresponding

drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the projected border,

check this check box off.


439

Nominal border

Check the Nominal border check box to show the nominal border. In the corresponding

drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the nominal border, check

this check box off.

The Attributes dialog – Drawstyle tab

The Attributes dialog appears when the Colors tool is selected in the general toolbar. It allows

you to define the display color of individual objects.

Color

The required color for the selected object can be selected from the drop down list

Randomize

When this option is checked then each of the selected objects will be assigned a different

(random) color. This function is useful when you have a number of point clouds selected

and you wish to easily distinguish between them without having to assign individual

different colors.

Separate solid faces

This option assigns a random color to each of the faces in the selected object. It thus

enables you to easily distinguish all the different faces on a single object.

Default

This removes the randomly assigned colors and returns the color to the default color for

the type of object.

Transparency

This makes the colors transparent to the alpha level indicated.

Lights

This option shows a light source thus creating shading on the object.

The Attributes tab

The Attributes tab displays attribute values for selected objects.

The objects that can be selected are:

Nominal solids / meshes / point clouds or features


440

Nominal features

The values for attributes in this tab are used for all alignment and comparison operation, and no

longer need to be defined specifically for these operations.

The attribute values that can be edited in this tab depend on the selected items.

Attributes for Nominal solids/ meshes /point clouds

Material thickness

This parameter defines the sheet metal thickness associated with the part. This does not

apply to point clouds. It is used in comparison info.

The value must entered in the current unit of length, visible in the bottom right corner of

the scene.

Compare tolerance

This is the tolerance used for alignment and comparison. Upper and lower values can be

defined. Sheet metal parts often have different tolerances depending on whether their

faces and edges have to mate with other parts. Parts that have no connection with other

parts can have larger tolerance values.

The values that are defined here relate to the object selected. When performing a

comparison the number of created compare objects depends on the number of ranges that

are defined here.

To define attributes

1. Click on the Attribute info tool in the Info toolbar.

2. Select the object in the tree.

3. Enter the required values.

4. Click [Apply].

441

Automation

Automation allows you to record a series of actions that form a script that can be saved, loaded

and played back.

The Automation window is opened by selecting View-Automation from the main menu bar.

It contains a number of functions for creating and playing the automation scripts.

The Function buttons

New

This creates a new script. If the current script has been modified since it was last saved

you will prompted to save the current script. The automation tree will be cleared and the

single "end" entry will be visible.

Load

This will load an existing script in the Automation window. If the current script has been

modified since it was last saved you will prompted to save the current script. The newly

commands contained in the newly loaded script will appear in the Automation tree.


442

Save As

This saves the current script. The "Save Metris Focus Automation Document" dialog

appears in which you can enter the file name and the location where the file will be

stored. Automation scripts are saved with the file extension .mfa

Record

When this button is pressed, all the following user actions performed will be recorded in

the current script.

Pressing this button again ends the recording.

Play

This starts the playback of the current script. A small arrow ( ) shows the command that

is currently being executed. Play will continue until the Stop button is pressed.

Step

This allows you to step through the automation script, command by command. The

current command is indicated by the presence of the small arrow ( ).

Stop

This stops the playback or the recording of the current script. .

Insert

This button allows you to insert an action into the current script.

When the button has an colored background (as shown above) then the command will be

inserted above the currently selected command.

If the button has a clear background, then the command will be inserted at the end of the

script.

Repeat

This button will schedule the Focus Automation software if it is installed, from which you

can run a number of automated batch jobs. If Focus Automation is not installed then this

button will cause the automation script to be replayed repeatedly until the Stop button is

clicked.

Eventing

This enables you to insert a condition where the script will wait for a specific event to

take place. It schedules the "Wait for an Event" dialog.

Automation

443

Wait for file

When this option is checked, the automation script will wait for a certain file to appear at

a given location. When the file is there, automation continues.

User message

When this option is checked, you can enter text in the dialog, that will appear in a

message box that will be displayed when this line is executed in the script. If the "Display

image" option is checked, the picture specified here will be also appear.

During play back, a dialog will pop up with the text and screen shot showing. The dialog

has 2 buttons:

[Continue] which will cause the automation script to continue with the next statement.

[Stop]: which causes the automation script to stop.

The user can access the scene while this dialog is open.

Timeout

When this option is checked, automation will continue after the timeout time has elapsed,

regardless of whether the condition was fulfilled or not.

Toggle Breakpoint

This inserts a breakpoint into the automation script that causes the script to halt. The

actions in the script can be continued either by clicking the Play or the Step buttons.


444

Delete breakpoint

The Delete breakpoint deletes all the breakpoints inserted in the script.

The Script Tree

Each of the commands contained in the automation script are listed in Script Tree. Items

can be selected in the Script Tree and operations carried out on them.

Multiple items can be selected using the <Shift> and the <Ctrl> keys.

command node

Each command is a node in the tree and each of the parameters associated with the

command can be seen by clicking on the + sign next to it.

Double clicking on any of the parameters allows you to edit them as shown above. This

thus allows you to easily adapt a script to use a different file or model for example.

current command

The arrow indicates the current command.

If the script has halted at this command because there is problem, then this command is

shown in red.

break

A command at which the script will halt is indicated by a hand.

The Contextual menu

This can be obtained by clicking on selected command(s) with the RMB. Multiple commands

can be selected using the <Shift> and the <Ctrl> keys, thus providing extensive editing facilities.

Automation

445

Undo

This will undo the last action performed on items in the Script tree. It does not undo the

action performed by the script. Only one level of undo is possible.

Redo

This will redo the last action that was undone.

Cut

This will cut the selected item(s) from the Script Tree. They can then be Inserted to

another position.

Copy

This will copy the selected item(s) from the Script Tree. They can then be Inserted to

another position.

Insert

This will insert items that have been cut or copied from the tree into the tree. They will be

inserted above a selected item.

Delete

This will remove the selected item(s) from the ScriptTree

Set Execution Pointer

This Moves the execution pointer to the current command as indicated by the arrow ( ).

The script will then be executed from this command.

To create an automation script

1. Click on the New button if necessary to start a new script file.

2. Click on the Record button to start the recording mode.

3. Insert actions by executing commands which will then be recorded in the script.

4. When the required actions have been recorded, stop the recording either by clicking on

the Stop button or by clicking on the record button again.

5. Click the Save As button to save the script.

Note: Automation is not supported for all the commands. Though most of the commands have

automation support, there may be some that can not be recorded into a script.

To load and playback a script

1. Click on the Load button.

2. In the dialog that appears browse to the location where the require file is to be found.

3. Click [Open].

4. Click on the Play button to playback the script.

To insert a command into a existing script

1. Click on the Load button and select the required script file.

2. Click on the Insert button until it is in the required mode. If you wish to insert a command

at a specific point in the script, then the Insert button needs to have a colored background.


446

If you wish to insert the command at the end of the script then the button should have a

clear background.

3. Click on the Record toggle button to start the recording mode.

4. To insert the command at a specific point, click on the script line above which new

command should be inserted.

5. Execute the required commands. They will be inserted into the script at the required

location.

Note: that items that are already in the automation tree can be copied and pasted

To edit a script


2. Click on the button in front of a command to open up the tree and show all the

parameters associated with that command.

3. Double click on the parameter line.

4. The value of the editable parameter will appear in the input field.

5. Enter a new value then click outside of the input field. The new value will be displayed in

the command parameter list.

To add a break point to a script


2. Click on a script line to select it.

3. Click on the Toggle Breakpoint button to insert a breakpoint at that script line.

When the script is played back it will halt at this line. The script can be continued by clicking on

the Step or the Play button.

A break point can be removed using the Delete Breakpoint button.

447

Glossary

A

Attribute: additional information attached to an object. This information can be visible or

invisible in the scene.

C

CMM: Coordinate Measuring Machine

CNC: Computer Numerically Controlled

Comparison information: Information object that contains comparison information of a global,

section, directional compare, edge and wall thickness comparison.

D

Deviation: The dimensional difference between a Measured and Nominal object.

Dimension: A distance/angle between 2 points/lines.

Drawstyle: Scene representation of objects.

E

Edge: The border of a mesh or solid.

F

Face: The smallest part of a mesh or solid.

Feature: Functional element in an object, such as a hole or a slot.

Flush: The distance between 2 points perpendicular to a line.

Flyout: Label that contains the information on the object it is attached to.

G

Gap: The distance between 2 point parallel to a line.

GD&T: Geometric Dimensioning &Tolerancing based on the ASME Y14.5M Standard

I

IGES: Initial Graphics Exchange Specification; a neutral exchange format for 2D or 3D CAD

product models, drawings, or graphics. Only 3D surface/solid information is imported in

Focus Inspection.

L

Laser line: Projection of the laser light emitted by the scanner on the physical object to be

measured.


448

Laser plane: Plane of the laser light emitted by the scanner

LMB: Left mouse button

M

Mesh: Representation of a physical object as a collection of connected triangular faces. It can be

created from a point cloud.

MFI: Metris Focus Inspection, the native file format of Focus Inspection

MMB: Middle mouse button

N

Nominal model: Model to compare the measured model against, such as a surface/solid model

or a STL model

O

Object: All things represented in the scene

P

Point cloud: Central object that represents a physical object as a set of points in space

Q

Qualification: A scanner orientation. A qualification can be red = orientation not computed,

orange = orientation is computed but less accurate than the threshold, green = orientation

is computed a more accurate than the threshold

R

Rail: Series of sections defined in parallel for which information can be viewed for the group

Reference sphere: The Metris sphere that is used for qualifications, calibration update and

alignments.

Report: Output of the comparison results in a specific layout

RMB: Right mouse button

Rotary table: a rotating table mounted on the CMM table. A rotary table allows to scan a part

automatically on all sides by rotating the part. This is mainly used on horizontal arm

CMMs

RPS: Reference Position System, a tool to align objects and features by subsequently fixing the

known degrees of freedom to a reference position and matching the remaining degrees of

freedom while maintaining the fixed ones

S

Scan line: Path between two positions, representing one linear movement of the scanner.

Scene: The graphical display of the application.

Glossary

449

Section: A 2D object representing a cut through a point cloud/mesh or solid.

Solid: Closed geometric model

Statistics information object: Information object that contains statistics information on a feature

detected from a point cloud

STL: Stereolithography Interface file format that has become the Rapid Prototyping industry's

defacto standard data transmission format. This format approximates the surfaces of a

solid model with triangles and lacks engineering data. The STL format was designed to

give just the amount of data in the form of meshes. STL files may be ASCII or binary in

form.

Stripe: Set of scanned points that result from a single shot.

Subtract: Automatic cutting of point cloud/meshes based on inter-distance and point cloud/mesh

density.

T

Task: A part of a workflow. Each task represents a separate part of a workflow.

TBI: Turbine Blade Inspection

U

UCS: User Coordinate System, a coordinate system created by the user.

W

Wall thickness: The thickness of a double sided mesh/solid

Workflow: A list of tasks that describe all steps to follow between start and end.

451

Index

2

2D Best Fit ............................................... 315

A

Add to Measured ...................................... 209

Add to Nominal.......................................... 74

Add to Rail ............................................... 365

Align 3-2-1 ............................................... 318

Align 6 Points .......................................... 305

Align N Points.......................................... 300

Align Normals .......................................... 132

Aligned Parallel ............................... 124, 402

Alignment Manager ................................. 329

Angle ................................................ 127, 411

Annotation................................................ 385

Arrange Flyouts ....................................... 383

Assembly Match ...................................... 285

Auto Dimension ....................................... 279

Auto Rename ........................................... 281

B

BestFit ...................................................... 311

C

Color Bar Properties ................................ 383

Compare Edges ........................................ 345

Compare Features .................................... 350

Compare Flyouts ...................................... 366

Compare Info ........................... 284, 351, 387

Compare Rail Flyout ................................ 385

Compare Section ...................................... 358

Connection ............................................... 202

Coordinate System ................................... 201

Create Color Bar ...................................... 383

Create GD&T ........................................... 114

Create Rail Flyout .................................... 384

Create Report ........................................... 387

Create Section .......................................... 352

Curvature ................................................. 346

D

Delete Selected ........................................ 217

Detect Edge .............................................. 275

Detect/Fit Feature .................................... 224

Create Measured Feature Point ............. 226

Create Measured Point cloud/Mesh-Area

.......................................................... 257

Detect / Fit Measured Circle ................. 231

Detect / Fit Measured Cone ................... 254

Detect / Fit Measured Line .................... 228

Detect / Fit Measured Plane .................. 246

Detect / Fit Measured Sphere ................ 252

Detect Measured Christmas Tree .......... 268

Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin .......... 258

Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin with

Cone Guiding.................................... 260

Detect Measured Diamond Pin ............. 262

Detect Measured Hexagon Slot ............. 243

Detect Measured Key Slot ..................... 240

Detect Measured Rectangular Slot ........ 237

Detect Measured Round Slot ................. 235

Detect Measured T-stud ........................ 264

Detect Measured Welded Bolt .............. 266

Detect Measured Welded Nut ............... 270

Detect/Fit Measured Cylinder ............... 249

Deviations ................................................ 414

Diameter .......................................... 126, 410

Digital Readout ........................................ 141

Directional Compare ................................ 338


452

Duplicate .................................................. 293

E

Edit/Recreate Report ................................ 397

Evaluate GDT .......................................... 349

Export Features ........................................ 113

F

Failed Features ......................................... 416

Feature Compare Info .............................. 416

Feature Flyouts......................................... 381

Features .................................................... 413

Filter ......................................................... 220

Fit Feature .................................................. 75

Flip Feature .............................................. 284

Flip Normal .............................................. 134

Flyout Properties .............................. 351, 382

Fuse .......................................................... 219

G

Gap Flush Caliper ............................ 128, 405

Gap-Step Dimension ................................ 404

Global Compare ....................................... 337

Golden template ....................................... 297

H

Handheld scan .......................................... 143

Hardware Configuration .......................... 202

Hide Faces ................................................ 136

I

Import ......................................................... 69

Import Features ................................ 104, 423

Interactive Alignment .............................. 334

Iterative N Points Alignment ................... 307

K

Keep Selected........................................... 214

L

Linear Perpendicular ........................ 121, 400

M

Merge ....................................................... 209

Merge Solids ............................................ 138

Mesh ........................................................ 223

Mesh border ............................................. 283

Mesh Volume........................................... 297

Mirror Objects ......................................... 294

O

Object Information................................... 398

Offset Mesh ............................................. 289

Optimize .................................................. 223

P

Prescan ..................................................... 142

Processing Settings .................................. 203

Q

Quick Shading ......................................... 295

R

Radius .............................................. 125, 409

Refine Mesh ............................................. 296

Remove Duplicate Faces ......................... 135

Remove Faces .......................................... 136

Remove from Rail.................................... 365

Remove mesh........................................... 224

Remove Shading ...................................... 296

Report Features ........................................ 399

Restore Report State ................................ 395

Reverse Mesh Normals ............................ 293

RPS alignment ......................................... 324

S

Scale ......................................................... 290

Scanner Image ......................................... 141

Index

453

Scene Annotation ..................................... 386

Section Planes .......................................... 414

Section/Mesh borders............................... 414

Select Single Side .................................... 288

Separate .................................................... 212

Smooth ..................................................... 291

Solid Display Accuracy ............................. 73

Solid to Mesh ............................................. 71

Subtract .................................................... 209

Surface Point from Flyout ........................ 343

Surface Point from Point .................. 104, 342

T

Tactile Measurement ............................... 143

Translate-Rotate ....................................... 331

U

Update Report .......................................... 396

V

View Section ............................................ 412

W

Wall Thickness ........................................ 347

Documents

Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual